PUMP STATION #16 RELOCATION - 02-0002-UT
I
u.
o
>-
t-
U
.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
AND
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
I
~
I
I
-1
I
--I
~
.
~
~
for
PUMP STATION 16
RELOCATION
Contract Number 02-0002-UT
Prepared By
~
GROUP
TBE Project Number: 00083-021-06
July 2007
JBI Group, Inc.
6191 Orange Dr., Suite 6159 E
Davie, FL 33314
Phone: 954-327-0442
Fax: 954-584-0309
JEDLICKJBIGROUP@AOL.COM
14502 N. Dale Mabry Hwy., Suite 200
Tampa, FL 33618
Phone: 813-968-4422
Fax: 813-968-4545
BONDJBIGROUP@AOL.COM
October 11,2007
City of Clearwater
Re: TLC Diversified, Inc.
Project: Pump Station 16 Relocation (02-0002-UT)
CP $2,025,994.50
To Whom It May Concern,
Please let this letter authorize City of Clearwater to date Performance & Payment Bond No:
0038254, along with the powers of attorney, on the above mentioned project the same date as
the contract.
If you have any questions please can me at the Davie offICe.
-:: -
<.~. -
~, -
cc: TLC Diversified, Inc.
.., Ie
CONSTRUCTION GROUPS
CG C041816
UG C053963
Diversifie~
.
Inc.
. GENERAL CONTRACTING GROUP
. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSTRUCTION GROUP
. UNDERGROUND UTILITIES GROUP
October 11, 2007
Mr. Glen L. Bahnick, Jr.
Assistant Director of EngineeringJProduction
City of Clearwater
P.O. Box 4748
Clearwater, FL 33758-4748
~E~E'VED
Ocr , 6 1007
'el,t~ i~if'fORNEV
Re: Our Job #0717 Pump Station 16 Relocation
Dear Mr. Bahnick:
LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL
We are sending you X_Attached
_Under separate cover via:
_Shop Drawings
_Specifications
Prints
_Copy of letter
Plans
_Change Order
_Samples
X Other
These are transmitted as checked below:
_For approval _Approved as Submitted
_For your use _Approved as noted
Jetumed for Corrections, Please resubmit
_Pay Request
_X_As requested
For Review
This Transmittal contains:
Copies Date
5
5
No.
Description
Executed Contracts& Bonds
Insurance Certificates
Remarks:
Joanne R. Lamberson
Vice-President
CC: Chrono
0428CORES
p/l:': .:(. '.'."\'o".i,':-:=I
MAIN OFFICE. 271917TH STREET EAST. PALMETTO. FL 34221 · 941-722-0621 · FAX 941-722-1382
EAST COAST. 7233 SOUTHERN BOULEVARD. B-1. WEST PALM BEACH. FL 33413. 561-478-2025. FAX 561-478-7159
I
I
I
I
I
I
'(
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
I ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS &
NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS ................................................................................................1-1
II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1.0 COPIES OF BIDDmG DOCUMENTS......................................................................................... 1
2.0 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS .......... ...... ................................... .................. ............................ 1
3.0 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE ................................................. 1
4.0 IN"TERPRET A TIONS AND ADDENDA...................................................................................... 2
5.0 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND .................................................................................................. 3
6.0 CONTRACT TIME ................... ............... ............ ............. ...... ....................... ...... .......................... 3
7 .0 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ......... ........................... .................. .... .................... ........ ................ ..... 3
8.0 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT .. ................... ........................................ ........... 3
9.0 SUBCONTRACTORS. .............. ............... ............................... ............................... ................. ....... 4
10.0 BIDIPROPOSAL FORM. ........... .................... ........... .............. .......................... ........ ..................... 4
11.0 SUBMISSION OF BIDS............ .................... ........ .................. ...... ............................ ............... ...... 4
12.0 MODIFICATION AND WITIIDRA W AL OF BIDS ....................................................................5
13.0 REJECTION OF BIDS ....... .............. ..................... ........................................... ......... ..................... 5
14.0 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER ................................................................................... .......... 5
15.0 OPENIN"G OF BIDS... ........ ................. .................. ....... ............................................. ..................... 6
16.0 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ........................................................... 6
17.0 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSIVENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE ..............................................6
18.0 AWARD OF CONTRACT ................................................................................................... .......... 7
19.0 BID PROTEST..... .......... ......... .............. ......... ........................... ............................. .................... ..... 7
20.0 TRENCH SAFETY ACT .................... .................... ................. ....... .......................... ..................... 8
ill GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.0 DEFINITIONS ......... ....................... ........ ................................. ......... ........ .................................... 1
2.0 PRELIMIN"ARY MA TIERS ............................................ .... ...................................................... 4
2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF mSURANCE.................................... 4
2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS .............................................. ............... ......... .............................. 4
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\ TOC.doc
TOC-i
Table of Contents
June 2007
SECTION
III GENERAL CONDITIONS - CONTINUED
PAGE
2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED;
STARTING TlIE PROJECT ................... ........... ............. ...... ........ ....... ......... ....... ................... 5
2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................. 5
2.5 PRECONSTRU CTION CONFERENCE................................................. ............................... 5
3.0 CONTRACT DOc;UME.NTS, INTENT .....................................................................................5
3.1 INTENT............... ................................................... ............. .................... ................................. 5
3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES .........................................................6
4.0 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL
COND ITONS; REFERENCE PO:JNTS ..................................................................................... 6
4.1 . AVAILABILITY OF LANDS ................................................................................................. 6
4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS ....................................................................................6
4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES ............................................. 7
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS..................... ..................... ................................. ...................... ........... 7
5.0 BONDS AND IN"SURANCE ........................................................................................................8
5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND .....................................8
5 .2 INSURANCE. ............ ...........................;............ ......................................... ............................. 8
5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE ............................................................. 9
5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE ..............................9
5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ....................................................... 10
5.3 WAIVER .OF RIGHTS ....................................................... ............................................. 10
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
CONTRACTORS RESPONSmllTJE.S ............................................................................11
SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE ..................................................................... 11
LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT .......................................................................12
SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS...................................................................... 12
RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTlIERS .............. 13
USE OF PREMISES .............................................................................................................. 13
LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES .......................................... 14
LAWS AND REGULATIONS .............................................................. ................................ 14
PERMITS........................... ..................................................................................................... 15
SAFETY AND PROTECTION .................................................... ......... ................... ............. 15
EMERGENCIES....................................................................................... ..... ........................ 16
DRAWINGS. .......................................................................................................................... 16
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\TOC.doc
TOC-ii
Table of Contents
100% - May 2007
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
,a
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION
III GENERAL CONDITIONS - CONTINUED
PAGE
6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES ........................................................................... 16
6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ................................................................................................ 17
6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS ............................................. ................. ..................... ..................... .19
6.11.4 DELNERABLES .......... ..... ..... ................................................................... ..................... 20
6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE................................. 21
6.13 CONTIN1JlN"G TIlE WORK.... ........ ............ ................ ................ ..................... .................... 21
6.14 INDEMNIFICATION ............................................................................................................21
7.0 OTHER WORK. .........................._.............................................................................................. 22
7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE ................................................................................................ 22
7.2 COORDIN"A TION. ................ ...... .............. .............................................................. ............... 23
8.0 OWNERS RESPO NSmaITY ..._.._........................................................................................ 23
9.0 ENGINEER'S STATUS DlJRIN"G CONSTRUCTION .....................~................................... 24
9.1 OWNERS REPRESENET A TNE.........................................................................................24
9 .2 CLARIFICATIONS AND IN"TERPRET A TIONS................................................................ 24
9.3 REJECTIN"G OF DEFECTNE WORK................................................................................24
9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS ......................................... 24
9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES.............................................. ................... ................. ........ ....... 24
9.6 LIMITATIONS ONE NGINEER'S RESPONSffiILITIES .................................................. 25
10.0 CHA.NGES IN' THE WORK......................................................................................................26
11.0 CHANGES IN' THE CONTRA.CT PRICE .............................................................................. 26
11.1 CHANGES IN" TIlE CONTRACT PRICE............................................................................ 26
11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FIN"AL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT .............................. 27
11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK ............................................................................................................. 27
12.0 CHANGES IN' THE CONTRA.CT TIl\1E ........................................_.....................................28
13.0 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR
ACCEPT.AN'CE OF DEFECTIVE WORK.................................................................._...........29
13.1 TESTS AND IN"SPECTION ......................................................................... ................. ........ 29
13.2 UNCOVERIN"G TIlE WORK ...............................................................................................29
13.3 ENGINEER MAY STOP TIlE WORK ................................................................................. 30
13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK................................................ 30
13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD .............................................................................. 30
13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK........................................................................... 31
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\ TOC.doc
Table of Contents
100% - May 2007
TOC-iii
SECTION
III GENERAL CONDITIONS - CONTINUED
PAGE
13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTNE WORK .........................................................;....31
14.0 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ...................................................31
14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT................................................................... 32
14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE ...................................................................... 32
14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS ....................................... 32
14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION ................................................................................. ....................33
14.5 FINAL INSPECTION............................................................................................................ 34
14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ........................................................................... 34
14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE .......................................................................... 34
14.8 WANER OF CLAIMS ..........................................................................................................35
15.0 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION ............................................................... 35
15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK ............................................................................. 35
15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE .............................................................................................. 35
15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE .................................................. 36
16.0 DISPUTE RESOLUTION ......................................................................................................... 37
17.0 l\fiSCELLANEO US.................................................................................................................... 37
17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS ........................................................................ 37
17.2 GNING NOTICE .......................................................................................... ........................37
17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM .............................................................................................................37
17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED ............................................ 38
17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ......................................................................................... 38
17 .6 RENEWAL OPTION ............................................................................................................. 38
IV TEC~CALSPECnnCATIONS
1.0
1.1
1.2
2.0
2.1
2.2
seo PE OF WORK............................................. ............. ............................................................. 1
SCOPE DESCRIPTION........................................................................................................... 1
SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST ................................ ........................................................... 2
LIN'E, GRADE AND RECORD DRA. 'WIN'GS ..........................................................................4
LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR...................... 4
LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY ........................................4
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\TOC.doc
TOC-iv
Table of Contents
100% - May 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION
IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - CONTINUED
PAGE
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
7.1
7.2
8.0
8.1
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
D EFIN'ITI 0 N OF TERMS ........................................................................................................ 4
ORDER AN'>> LOCATION OF 'fHE WORK .........................................................................5
EXCAVATION FOR 'UNDERGROUND WORK.................................................................5
CONCRETE ........................_...................................................................................................... 6
EXCA V A TION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK................................................. 7
EXCAVATION ....................................................................................... ........... ...................... 7
FORMS ..................................................................................................................................... 7
REIN'FO R CEMENT ................................................................................................................. 7
BASIS OF PAYMENT.. ................... ...................... ......... ........... ........................ ..................... 7
o BSTR U CTI 0 NS .................................._.................................................................................. 7
RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS
AND STREET P A 'VEMENT ..........._.......................................................................................... 8
WORK IN" EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS ............................................................................ 8
DEW A TERIN' G .........................._............_................................................................................ 9
13.0 SANITARY MA.NHOLES .................._.....................................................................................9
13.1 BlJII.., T UP TYPE ..................................................................................................................... 9
13.2 PRECAST TYPE.. ...... ............. ...... ..................... ..... ............ .............................. ..................... 10
13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) .............................................10
13.3 DROP MANHOLES ..... ................. ....... .............. .... ......... ......................... ......... .................... 11
13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS ..................................................................................................... 11
13.S MANHOLE COA TIN"GS. .................... ................... ..... .... ................. .... ............. .................... 11
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES......................................................................................11
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
17.1
17.2
BA CKFaL ................................................................................................................................ 11
STREET CROSSIN" GS, ETC. .................................................................................................. 12
RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE
8TR U cruRES ......................_._................................................................_............................... 12
16.1
BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................................... 12
UNSUITABLE MA.TERIAL REMOVAL ............................................................................12
BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................... ........................ ......... ........ ................ 12
BASIS OF PAYMENT ...................................................................................................... .... 12
18.0 UND ERD RAINS....................................................................................................................... 13
18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ............................................................................................... 13
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\TOC.doc
TOC-v
Table of Contents
100% - May 2007
SECTION
IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - CONTINUED
PAGE
18.2 BASIS OF P A Yl\1ENT ..................................................................... ............... ...................... 13
19. 0 STORM SEWERS ................................................................................................................... 13
19.1 AS BUILT INFORMA nON ................................. ............................ .................................... 14
19.2 TESTIN" G ................................................................................................................................ 14
19.3 BASIS OF P A Yl\1ENT .......................................................................................................... 14
20.0 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MA.IN"S ......................................................................14
20.1 MATERIALS ................................................ .............. .......................... ................................. 14
20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE ............................................................................................... 14
20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE......................... .......................................................... ..................... 15
20.2 INST ALLA nON.............................................. ..................... .................... ............ ................ 15
20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE ................ ..................................................... .......................... 15
20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE................ ............... .......................................................... ............... 15
20.3 AS BUILT DRA WlN"GS........................................................................................................ 15
20.4 TESTIN"G. ............ ......... .................................................... ....... ..................... ........ ....... ........... 16
20.4.1 TESTmG OF GRAVITY SEWERS .............................................................................. 16
20.4.2 TESTmG OF FORCE MAmS ...................................................................................... 16
20.5 BASIS OF P A Yl\1ENT ......... ...................... ...................................................................... ..... 16
20.5 .1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE .......... ............................................................................... ...... 16
20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE......... ..... .......................................................................................... 17
21.0 DRAINAGE ............................................................................................................................... 17
22.0 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE ..................................................................................17
22.1 BASE...... .................. ...................... .................................. ........ ................... .......... ................. 17
22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ...................... 19
22.1.2 BASIS OF P A Yl\1ENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ................................. 19
22.2 SUBGRADE ......................................................... ........ .......................... .................... ............ 19
22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ........................................................................................19
22.2.2 BASIS OF P A Yl\1ENT ...... ............... .............................................................................. 19
23.0 ASPHAL TI C CONCRETE MATERIALS ........................................................................... 20
23 .1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE...................... ................................... ........................ ........... ........20
23 .1.1 AGGREGATE.......... ........... ........ ............ ........ ..... .......... ........ ............. ......... ..... ..20
23.1.2 BITUMIN"OUS MATERIALS .......... .......... .............................................................. ...... 20
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\TOC.doc
TOC-vi
Table of Contents
100% - May 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
a
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION
IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - CONTINUED
PAGE
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY
ASSURANCE ........................................................................................................................ 20
23 .3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES............................................................................ 21
23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS..................................... 21
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS............................................................. 22
23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION ......................................................................22
23.6.1 CRACKS.................... ......... ............................................................................. ................ 22
23.6.2 POTHOLES ........................... ......................... .......................................... ....................... 22
23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES ........................................................................................ 22
23.8 ADDmONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................23
23.9 SUPERPA VE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ........................................................................... 24
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ............................................................................................... 24
23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................................................................................................... 24
24.0 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT.................................. 24
25.0 GENERAL PL.AN'TIN' G SPECIFI CA TI 0 NS ................................................................... 2S
25 .1 IRRIGATION ...... ........... ................ ..... ............ ........ .... .............. ................. ....... ....... .............. 25
25 .1.1 DESCRIPTION..... ....... ........ ........................... ...... ..................... .............. ........................ 25
25.1.2 PRODUCTS....... .......... ...... ...... .... ................ .... ....... .... ................ ...... ............................... 27
25 .1.3 EXECUTION. ..... ..... ................ .... ...................... .... .................... ...... ................................ 31
25.2 LANDSCAPE........... ........................ ........... ............. ............ ......... ..... ....... ............................. 34
25.2.1 GENERAL..... .............................. .................................... .............. .................................. 34
25.2.2 PRODUCTS..... ............. ..... ........ ............ ..... ........ ....... ...... ................... ............................. 39
25 .2.3 EXECUTION...... ..... ........ ...................................................... ......... ......... .... .................... 43
IIDPE DEFORMED - REFO~D PIPE L.ININ'G ...................................................... 49
26.0
26.1
26.2
26.3
26.4
26.5
26.6
26.7
26.8
INTENT ..................................................................................................................................49
PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INST ALLER ACCEPTABILITY ...............................50
MATERIALS ....... ..... ............. ....................... ......................... ... ...... ................ ....................... 50
CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ........................................................................... 51
TELEVISION INSPECTION ... .... ......... .................. ............. .................... ......... .................... 51
LINER INSTALLATION ...... ........ ....................................... ................................................. 51
LATERAL RECONNECTION ...... ....................................................................................... 51
TIME OF CONSTRUCTION................................................................................................ 52
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\ Toe.doc
Table of Contents
100% - May 2007
TOC-vii
SECTION
IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - CONTINUED
PAGE
26.9 PAYMENT ....... ............. ........................ ....... .......................................................... ................ 52
27.0 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS .................................................................................................52
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT.... ........ ................................................................................... 52
27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ........ ................................................................................................... 52
28.0 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS................................ 52
29.0 CONCRETE CURBS .............................................................................................................. S3
29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ............................................................................................... 53
29.2 BASIS OF P A Y"MENT ................................. ......................................................................... 53
30.0 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS ..........................................................54
30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS................................................................................................... 54
30.2 CONCRETE DRlVEW A YS... ............................................................................................... 54
30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ............................................................................................... 54
30.4 BASIS OF P A Y"MENT .................................................................. ........................................ 54
31.0 SOD D m G ................................................................................................................................... S4
32.0 SEED m G ................................................................................................................................... S4
33.0 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASmS OR OTHER STORM
STRUCTURES ............................................................................................................................ 55
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES ...............................................................'......................... 55
33.2 PRECAST TYPE.. ................... ......................................... ..... ....................... ...... .................... 55
33.3 BASIS OF P A Y"MENT ......................................... ................................................................. 56
34.0 MATERIAL USED ................................................................................................................... 56
35.0 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS....................................... 56
36.0 STREET SI GNS......................................................................................................................... 56
37.0 AUD I ONID EO TAPE OF WO RK AREAS..................................................................... 56
37.1 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREA SHALL BE PREPARED BY THE CITY ...... 56
37.2 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF ALL WORK AREAS SHALL BE PREPARED BY THE
CONTRACTOR............................................................................................................................56
37.2.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO TAPE.............................................. 56
37.2.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO TAPE................................................................... 57
37.2.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS .......................................................... ............... 57
37.2.4 EQUIPMENT............................................................................................................. ..... 57
TBE Group. Inc.
1 :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\TOC.doc
TOC-viii
Table of Contents
100% - May 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION
IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - CONTINUED
PAGE
37.2.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO ........ ................................................. .............. 57
37.2.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO......................................................................... 57
37.2.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION ............................................................................................. 57
37.2.8 LIGIITlN" G............................... ........................................................................................ 58
37.2.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL ...................................................................................................... 58
37.2.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX ...................................................................................................... 58
37.2.11 AREA OF COVERAGE ................................................................................................. 58
37.2.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES ..................................................................................... 58
38.0 EROSI ON AND saT A nON CONTR.OL......_.................................................................... 58
38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS......................................................................... 58
38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES .................................... 59
38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SySTEMS............................................ 59
38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPIN"G MEASURES ................................................................................ 59
3 8.5 SEDIMENTATION BASIN"S ....... ..... ..................... ........... ................... ............................. .... 59
38.6 WORKING IN" OR CROSSIN"G WATERWAYS OR W ATERBODIES ........................... 59
38. 7 SWALES, DrrClIES AND CHANNELS ............................................................................ 60
38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION................................................................ 60
38.9 MAIN1'ENANCE...................................................................................................................60
38.10 COMPLIANCE...................... .............. ........................... ...................... .................... ....... ...... 60
39.0 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKIN"G..........................................................................63
40.0 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE........................... 63
41.0 WATER MAIN"S AND APPURTENAN'CES .........................................................................64
41.1 SCOPE... ...................... ............. ........................... ........................................... .......... ........ ...... 64
41.2 MATERIALS .. ............ ................................................. ........................ .......... ................ ......... 64
41.2.1 GENERAL ......................... .................. .............. ............................ ........................ .......... 64
41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS ............................................................................64
41.2.3 GATE VALVES ............................................................... ............................................... 66
41.2.4 VALVE BOXES............................................................................ .................................. 66
41.2.5 HYDRANTS ...................... .............................................. ........ ....... ................................. 67
41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES............. ........................................... .................. ............................ 68
41.2.7 TESTS, IN"SPECTION AND REPAIRS......................................................................... 68
41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS..... ....... .............. ............. ....................... .......................... 68
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\ Toe.doc
Table of Contents
100% - May 2007
TOC-ix
SECTION
IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - CONTINUED
PAGE
41.2.9 T APPIN"G SLEEVES ....... ........... ...... ....... ....................................................................... 69
41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS .............................................................................................. 69
41.3 CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................................................. 69
41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLIN"G .............................................................................................. 69
41.3.2 PIPE LAYING ....................... .......................................................................................... 70
41.3.3 SETTIN"G OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTmGS ............................................ 71
41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTmG LINES ...................................................................... 72
41.4 TESTS...... ...... ......................... ............. ............. ............................................. ......................... 72
41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS ................................................................................................ 72
41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST ..................................:....................................................................... 72
41.5 STERILIZATION................. ......... .................................. ........ ............. .............. .................... 72
41.5.1 STERILIZIN"G AGENT .................................................................................................. 72
41.5.2 FLUSlIIN"G SySTEM............. .......................... .............................................................. 72
41.5 .3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE .................................................................................. 73
41.5.4 RESIDUAL CIll.,ORINE TESTS ................................................................................... 73
41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS ............................................................... ....................................... 73
41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ...................................................................................73
41.6.1 GENERAL....... .............. ............................. ......................... .......... .................................. 73
41.6.2 FURNISH AND IN"ST ALL WATER MAmS ............................................................... 74
41.6.3 FURNISH AND IN"ST ALL FITTmGS.......................................................................... 74
41.6.4 FURNISH AND IN"STALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND
COVERS............... ....................... ................. ................................... ................................ 74
41.6.5 FURNISH AND IN"ST ALL FIRE HYDRANTS............................................................ 75
42.0 GAS SYSTEM SPEcmCA TIONS ........................................................................................75
43.0 TENNIS COURTS ..................................................................................................................... 75
43 .1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS .................................................................................................. 75
43.1.1 SOIL TREA Tl\1ENTS ..........................,.......................................................................... 75
43.1.2 BASE COURSE ............................................................................... ..... .......................... 75
43.1.3 PRIME COAT ......... ......... ............................. .................................................................. 75
43.1.4 LEVELIN"G COURSE.... ............................... ...................................................... ............ 76
43 .1.5 SURFACE COURSE .................................... ........ .......................................................... 76
43.1.6 COLOR COAT .............................................. ................. .......... ............... ........................ 76
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\ TOC.doc
TOC-x
Table of Contents
100% - May 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION
IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - CONTINUED
PAGE
43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS .....................................................................................................77
43.2.1 GENERAL........................... .................................. ................. .... ............. ........................ 77
43.2.2 SITE PREP ARA nON .................................... ..... .................. ......................................... 78
43.2.3 SLOPE... .................................. ............................... .......... ............................................... 79
43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION ..... ............ ......... .............. .................. ........... ....... ................... 79
43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBIN"G ................... .................... ........................ .................... ....... ...... 80
43.2.6 StJRF ACE COURSE.......... ..... .............. .................................... ................ ..................... 80
43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER. ..... ....... ............... ......... ............... ........................... .............................. 80
43.2.8 FENCIN"G ...................... ...... ..... ......... ............. .......... ..... .............. .................................... 80
43.2.9 WINDSCREENS .......... ............. ..... ...................................................... ........................... 81
43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................... 81
43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE .... ....................... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........... ........... .......... ........ 82
43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (potable) .......................................................................................... 82
43.2.13 CONCRETE ........................ ..................... .............. .................. ....................................... 82
43.2.14 EXISTIN"G SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGIITIN"G....................................................... 82
43.2.1 5 WATER COOLER.......................................................................................................... 84
43.2.16 DEMONSTRA nON .......................................... ............................................................. 84
43 .2.17 WARRANTY .... .............. ....... ...... ........................... ....... ................ ........;...... .................. 84
44.0 WORK. WNE TRAFFIC CONTROL ...................................................................................84
44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSmLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ................ 84
44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN....................................................................... 84
44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY ........................................................................................... ...... 85
44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELIN"ES............................................................................... 85
44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS .........................................................................................................85
44.3.2. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MIN"OR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS ..................86
44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MIN"OR ARTERIALS.............................................................. 86
44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS............ ......... ........ ....................... ................................................. 86
44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN.......................................... 86
44.5 IN"SPECnON OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERA nON ...........................86
44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL .................................................... 86
44.7 CERTIFICA nON OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR .................. 86
TBE GraDO, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\D0a8pecs\TOC.doc
Table of Contents
100% - May 2007
TOC-xi
SECTION
IV TEC~CALSPECnnCATIONS-CON~D
PAGE
45.0 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING .........................................................................................87
45.1 IN"TENT .................................................................................................................................. 87
45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY............................... 87
45 .3 MATERIALS ..... ........................................ ............... ......................... .................................... 87
45.4 CLEANIN"G/SURF ACE PREPARATION ................................................ ........................... 88
45.5 TELEVISION IN"SPECTION ..................... ....................................... ........ ............................ 88
45.6 LINER IN"ST ALLA TION ................ ........... .................................. ......... ........ ........................ 88
45. 7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ................................... .......... ....... ......... ........ ........................ 89
45.8 TIlVIE OF CONSTRUCTION..................... ........................................... ....... .......... ............... 89
45 .9 PAYMENT... .......................................................................................... ...... .......................... 89
46.0 SPECIFICA nONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING ........................................... 89
46.1 MATERIALS ....................... .......... ............... ............. ............ ........ ....... ........ .......... ............... 89
46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTIN"GS ..................................................................................................... 89
46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL .............................................................................. ...................... 89
46.1.3 SAMPLES... .................................. ............................................... .................................... 90
46.1.4 REJECTION........................ ...... ............................... ....................................................... 90
46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS ....................... ............................................................... ........................ 90
46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES................................... ..... ...... .......... ................... ............... 90
46.3.1 HANDLIN"G OF PIPE... ............ .... ......................... .......... ............. .................................. 90
46.3 .2 REPAIR. OF DAMAGED SECTIONS ........................................................................... 90
46.3.3 PIPE JOIN"IN"G.... .................. ........ ........... .......... ...................... ........... ....... ......... ............. 90
46.3.4 HANDLIN"G OF FUSED PIPE .......................................................................................91
46.4 SLIPLIN"IN"G PROCEDURE....... .............................................. ................................ ............ 91
46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS ............................................................. 91
46.4.2 CLEANIN"G AND IN"SPECTION......................................................................... .......... 91
46.4.3 IN"SERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS............................................................... 91
46.4.4 IN"SERTION OF TIIE LINER ........................................................................................ 92
46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES ...............................................................................92
46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN" CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED ....................................................... 92
46.4.7 BACKFILLIN"G ..... .......................................................................................................... 92
46.4.8 POIN"T REPAIR...................................................... ........................ .......... ....................... 93
46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERA TIONS........................... ......................... ...... .................................. 93
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\ TOC.doc
TOC-xii
Table of Contents
100% - May 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION
IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - CONTINUED
PAGE
47.0 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE............................ 93
47.1 SCOPE.... ............................................................................................ .................................... 93
47.2 MATERIALS ................... ............. ....................................................... .......... ........................ 93
47.3 PIPE ................... ........................... ........... ........... ............... .................... ................................. 93
47.4 JO ININ"G SySTEM..... ........ ....... ............... .......... ................................................................... 93
47.5 FI1TIN" GS................. .......... ............................... ............. .................... .................................... 94
48.0 G UNITE SPECIF'I CA TI 0 NS .................................................................................................. 94
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT ......................................................................................... 94
48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE....................... 94
48.3 COMPOSmON ..... ........ ...................... .......................... .................... .............................. ...... 94
48.4 STRENGTII REQUIREMENTS... ......... ...................... ................ ...... ................................... 94
48.5 MATERIALS ....... ......... ............. ....................... ..... ....... .................... ..................................... 95
48.6 WATER......... ................ .... .............. .................................... ...... ............. ........... ..................... 95
48.7 REINFORCEMEN"T ...................... ....................... ................. ................... ..... ........... ............. 95
48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS ...............................................................................................95
48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ........................................................ ......................................... 96
48.10 PROPOR TIONIN'G ........... .......... ............ .......... ........................ ......................... .................... 96
48.11 MlXIN"G .................................. ................. ............................................................................... 96
48.12 APPLICATION...... .................. ..... ..... ......... ......... ............ ................. ....... .............................. 96
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS....... ................ ........... ......... .................. ..... ......... ..... ........ ........... 97
48.14 SURFACE FINISH .... ............... .............. ............... ......... ............... ..................... ................... 97
48.15 CURIN'G ......... ......... ............ ......... ........... ................ ............ ............... .................................... 97
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION .............................................................................. 97
48.17 IN"SPECTION .... ........ ..... ........ ........ .............. ......... ............ ........ ..... .... ................ .................... 98
48.18 EQUIPMENT ................. ............... ..... ................ .......... .... ...................... ............... ................. 98
49.0 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION .................................. 99
49.1 SCOPE AND IN"TENT .......................................................................................................... 99
49 .2 PAYMENT. ......... ...... ..... ....... ......................... ....................................... .......... ........................ 99
49.3 FffiERGLASS LIN"ER PRODUCTS ..................................................................................... 99
49.3 .1 MATERIALS.... ....... ...... ......... .......... ............................................................................... 99
49.3.2 IN"STALLATION AND EXECUTION ........................................................................100
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LIN"ER PRODUCT SySTEM....................................................... 100
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\TOC.doc
Table of Contents
100% - May 2007
TOC-xiii
SECTION
IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - CONTINUED
PAGE
49 .4.1 MATERIALS........................ ...................... .........................;......................................... 101
49 .5 INFILTRATION CONTROL ......................................................... ..................................... 101
49.6 GROUTING MIX................................................................................................................. 101
49.7 LINER MIX................................................................. ...... ................................................... 101
49 .8 WATER ..................................................... ........................................................................... 102
49.9 OTIIER MATERIALS ....... ...................... ................ ............................................................ 102
49.10 EQUIPMENT ............................................ .... .............. ......................................................... 102
49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ............................................................................... 103
49 .11.1 PREPARATION ............................................................................................................ 103
49.11.2 MIXING .................................................................. ....................................................... 103
49 .11.3 SPRAYING .................................................................................................................... 103
49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING .................................. ................................................................. 104
49.11.5 CURING ....................................................... ........................................... ...................... 104
49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE............................................................ 104
49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM .............. 104
49.12.1 SCOPE ....................................................................................... .................................... 104
49 .12.2 MATERIALS................ ................... .................................................... .......................... 104
49 .12.3INST ALLA TION AND EXECUTION .... ...... ......... ..................................;......;;.;.......; 107
PROJECT IN'FORMA nON SIGNS ....................................................................................109
50.0
50.1
50.2
50.3
50.4
50.5
50.6
50.7
50.8
SCOPE AND PURPOSE....................... .............. ..... ...... ..................... ...................... .......... 109
TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORT ABLE....................................................... 109
FIXED SIGN ........... ................. ........................... .............. ................... ............... ................. 109
PORTABLE SIGNS.. ................. ........................... ........... .......................... .......................... 109
SIGN COLORING ......... ................. .... ......................... .................... .......................... .......... 109
SIGN PLACEMENT......................................................... ................................................... 109
SIGN MAINTENANCE .................................... ............ ...................................................... 110
TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN .................................................. .............. ................................. 110
51.0 IN'-LINE SKA.TING S'URFACIN'G SySTEM.....................................................................110
51.1 SCOPE ....................... .................. ............ ............... ...... ................. ....... ..................... ........... 110
51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS ............................................................................................. 111
51.2.1 ASPHAL T........................................................................................................... ........... 111
51.2.2 CONCRETE ................................................ .......... ....................... ................................. 111
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\OO083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\TOC.doc
TOC-xiv
Table of Contents
100% - May 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION
IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - CONTINUED
PAGE
51.2.3 COURT PATCH BIN1)ER MIX................................................................................... 111
51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FULER COAT ................................................................ 111
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIP AVE................................................................. 112
51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION ............................................................................................. 112
51.6 PLA YIN"G LINES ................................................................................................................. 112
51.7 GENERAL...... ................ ............ ..................... ...... ....... ................ ..... ................................... 112
51.8 LIMIT A TIONS..................................................................................................................... 112
52.0 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION ................................113
52.1 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CITY................................................... 113
52.2 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CONTRACTOR ................................ 113
53.0 GABI 0 NS .AND MA 'ITRESSES............................._............................................................ 114
53.1 MA TERIA.L.. ........ .......... ............ ........ ................. ........ ......... ............. .......... ....... ............. ..... 114
53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL...................................................... 114
53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL:.................................................. 117
53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE ....................................................................................................... 117
53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC ............................................................................................... 117
53.2 PERFORMANCE................ .................. ............... ......... ............ ............. .............................. 118
54.0 LAWN MAIN'TENANCE SPECIF'ICATIONS.....................................................................118
54.1 SCOPE............... ........ .................. ....... .............. ......... .............. ............ .............. ...... ............. 118
54.2 SCHEDULrnG OF WORK................................................................................................. 119
54.3 WORK METHODS .. ........ ..... .......... ......... .......... ...... ............ .............. ............ ........ ............. 119
54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULIN'G ............................................................................... 119
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT.................................................................................... 119
54.4 LITTER........ ........... ......... ......... ....... .............................. .............. ..... ................. ..... .... .......... 119
54.5 VISUAL CHECK.. ................ ............. ................. ..... ............ .................. .............................. 120
54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNrnG .................................................................. 120
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, IN'DIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) ..........120
54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL.... ................ ........................... ..... ..................... ......... .......... ............... 120
54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL.............. ........ ......... .................... .................. ............. .......... .............. 120
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY .................................................................................. ................... 120
54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION .................................................................................................. 120.
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN' LANDSCAPED AREA ................................................................ 121
TBE GrouD, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\ TOC.doc
Table of Contents
100% - May 2007
TOC-xv
SECTION
IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - CONTINUED
PAGE
54.13 MULCH CONDITION ..... .......................... .................................... .................... ............ ..... 121
54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR............................................................................ 121
54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL............................................................ 121
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION ............................................................. ....................................... 121
54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION ................................:.................................... ... ............................. 121
54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE............................................. ..............................:.............................. 122
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK......................................... ................................ ........................ 122
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROV AL....................................................................................... 122
54.21 SPECIAL CONDmONS ......................................... ........ ................. .................................. 122
55 J.\.fiLL.IN' G OPERA. TI 0 NS ..................................................................................................... 123
55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE.............................................. 123
55.2 ADDmONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS................................................................... 123
55 .3 SALVAGEABLE MA TERIALS......................................................................................... 124
55 .4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS........... .............................. ..................................................... 124
55.5 ADmSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES ......................... 124
55.6 ADmSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES..................................................................... 124
55.7 TYPES OF MILLING ................ .......................................................................................... 124
55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS ....................................................................................... 124
55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT.................................... .............................. ........................... 124
55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT .................................................................. ...................................... 124
56.0 CLEARIN'G AND GRUBBIN'G ............................................................................................125
56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ............................................................................................. 125
56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................:....................................................................... 125
57.0 RIPRAP .....................................................................................................................................125
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .............................................................................................125
57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................... .............................................................................. 125
58.0 TREATMENT PL.ANT SAFETY .........................................................................................126
58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL ....................................................................................... ............... 126
58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING .........................................................................126
59.0 TRAFFIC. SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ...................................................126
59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .............................................................. 127
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\ TOC.doc
TOC-xvi
Table of Contents
100%- May 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
SECTION
IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - CONTINUED
PAGE
60.0 SI GNIN" G AND MAR.KIN' G ............................................................................................ ....... 127
60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ..............................................................127
61.0 ROADWAY LIGHTIN'G .......................................................................................................127
61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .............................................................. 127
62.0 TREE PROTECTION .............................................................................................................. 127
62.1 'fREE BARRICADES .............. ........ ................................................................ .................... 127
62.2 ROOT PRUNlN"G.......... ....... .................................. ..... ........ ...............................................:. 128
62.3 PROPER 'fREE PRUNlN"G ......... .......................................................... ........ ...................... 129
63.0 PROJECT WEB PAGES ..._..................................................................................................130
63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN ........................................................................................................ 130 .
63.2 . WEB ACCESSffiILITY GUIDELINES.............................................................................. 130
63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE ..............................................................130
63.4 MAPS AND GRAPmCS ........ ............ ............................. .................................................... 130
63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS ................ ............................ ........ ............................. .................... 131
63.6 POSTIN' G............. ........... ..................... .......................... ........ ............. ................. ............. .... 131
63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES .................................................................................................... 131
SUPPLEMENTARY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
00800 Supplementary General Conditions ...................................................00800-1 THRU 00800-9
01010 Summary of Work .............................................................................. 01010-1 THRU 01010-6
01025 Measurement and Payment ..............................................................01025-1 THRU 01025-11
01046 Modifications to Existing Structures Piping, and Equipment........... 01046-1 THRU 01046-2
01310 Construction Schedules ...................................................................... 01310-1 THRU 01310-3
01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples .....................................01340-1 THRU 01340-3
01370 Schedule of V alues ............................................................................. 01370-1 THRU 01370-2
01600 Material and Equipment ..................................................................... 01600-1 THRU 01600-3
01650 Starting of Mechanical Systems......................................................... 01650-1 THRU 01650-3
01700 Contract Closeout ............................................................................... 01700-1 THRU 01700-3
01730 Operating and Maintenance Data.. .................. ................................... 0 173 0-1 THRU 01730-5
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\TOC.doc
Table of Contents
100% - May 2007
TOC-xvii
SECTION
SUPPLEMENTARYTEC~CALSPEC~CATIONS-CONTENVED
PAGE
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
02050 Building Demolition...... ...... ..... .... ... .................. ................. 02050-1 THRU 02050-4
02220 Structure Excavation andBackfill .....................................................02220-1 THRU 02220-4
02221 Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting............................................ 02221-1 THRU 02221-4
02413 Horizontal Directional Drilling......... ... ... ....................... ....02413-1 THRU 02413-22
02531 Fiberglass Manholes........................................................................... 02531-1 THRU 02531-6
02532 Fiberglass Wet well or Lift Station .................................................... 02532-1 THRU 02532..7
02594 High Density Polyethlene (HDPE) Pipe. .. . .. " . . . . ... " . . ........ . . . .02594-1 THRU 02594-10
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03200 Concrete Reinforcing ... ............ ...... ......... ....... ...... ..... ...03200-1 THRU 03200-2
03300 Concrete ......... ................................................................................... 03300-1 THRU 03300-10
03600 Grout ................................................................................................... 03600-1 THRU 03600-2
DMSION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11305. Submersible Sewage Pumps, Controls, and Panels ...........................11305-1 THRU 11305-8
DMSION 15 - MECHANICAL
15050 Piping, Fittings, Valves, and Accessories........................................ 15050-1 THRU 15050-15
DMSION .16 - ELECTRICAL
16000 Basic Electrical Requirement. . . . . . . .. . .. . . . .. . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. ..16000-1 THRU 16000-4
16011 Cabinets and Control Panels............................................ ..16011-1 THRU 16011-3
16012 Supporting Devices ................................................. ~.. ....16012-1 THRU 16012-2
16013 Grounding and Bonding............................................ ...... .16013-1 THRU 16013-3
16051 Electrical Wastewater Pump Station................................. .16051-1 THRU 16051-9
V CONTRACT FORMS
CONTRACT BOND .................. ......... .............. .......... .......... ....... .............. ............... .......... CF-1
CONTRACT .. ......... ......... ......... ..... ... .................... ...... ....... .... ....... ....... .... ........ .................. CF - 3
. CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT............................................. CF-6
PROPOSAL BOND......... ................................... .......... ....... ............. ...... ...... ............... ...... CF-7
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\ TOC.doc
TOC-xviii
Table of Contents
100% - May 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION PAGE
AFFIDAVIT .......... ........ ............. ............ ........ ...... ................ ................. ........... .................. CF-8
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT........................... ..................................... ............... ...... CF-9
PROPOSAL ... ...... ...... .................. ................. ........... .......... .......... .......... ................. ........ CF -10
ADDENDUM ACKNOWLEDGMENT SHEET ....................................................... CF-13
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL....... ...... ......... ..................... ....... ....... .......... .... ................. .......... CF -14
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\ TOe.doc
Table of Contents
100% - May 2007
TOC-xix
SECTION
PLANS
SHEET NO
G-I
G-2
G-3
G-4
G-5
PS-I to PS-6
FM-I to FM-3
D-I to D-4
E-I to E-8
lofl
PAGE
DESCRIPTION
Cover Sheet
General Notes
Legend and Abbreviations
Erosion Control Details
Erosion Control and Tree Protection Details
Pump Station Plan and Section Sheets
Force Main Plan and Profile Sheets
Details
Electrical Plan Sheets
Survey Sheet (informational Only)
TBE GrouD. Inc.
1 :\OOO83\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\TOC.doc
TOC-xx
Table of Contents
100% - May 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION I
ADVERTISEMENT
OF
BID
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
PUMP STATION 16 RELOCATION
CONTRACT #02-0002-UT
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this project are available for inspection and/or
purchase by prospective bidders at the Municipal Services Bldg., Engineering Department, 2nd
Floor, Room 220, 100 So. Myrtle Av.e., Clearwater, Florida, between the hours of 8:30 a.m. and
4:30 p.m. Monday thru Friday, MONDAY, JULY 30, 2007, until no later than close of business
three days preceding the bid opening. A charge of $100.00, none of which will be refunded, will be
made for each set.
The work for which proposals are invited consists of: construction of a new Pump Station 16,
installation of approximately 1500 linear feet of 12 inch force main, jack and bore of 54-
inch steel casing, landscaping, demolition of the existing Pump Station 16 and other
necessary appurtenances.
A MANDATORY Pre-Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on TUESDAY,
AUGUST 14,2007, at 10:00 a.m. at the Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue,
First Floor, Human Resources Training Room #130, Clearwater, Florida. Representatives of the
Owner and Consulting Engineer will be present to discuss this Project.
Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasine: Mana!er. at the Purchasine: Office. located
at the Municipal Services Blde:.. 100 So. MvrtIe Ave.. 3r. Floor. Clearwater. Florida 33756-
5520. until 1:30 P.M. on THURSDAY, AUGUST 30, 2007 and publicly opened and read at that
hour and place for: PUMP STATION 16 RELOCATION CONTRACT #02-0002-UT.
A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits
and proposal form is available only to City pre-qualified contractors in the construction
category of PUMP STATIONS with a minimum pre-qualification amount of
$1.500.000.
Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be interested as a possible
subcontractor, supplier, etc., may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans,
specifications, and pay items worksheet.
A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects.
The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids.
The City of Clearwater, Florida
William B. Home, II, City Manager
SECTION II
INSTRUCTION
TO
BIDDERS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section II-Instructions to Bidders
1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available for the swn stated in the
Advertisement for Bid from the Office of the Purchasing Manager. This amount represents
reproduction costs and is non-refundable. A complete bidders package containing plans,
specifications, bond fonns, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only
to pre-qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who
may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a
"Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items.
1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor
the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of
incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others.
1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above tenns, does so
only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant
any other pennission to use the documents for any other purpose.
2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the
City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial
resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining
drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre-
qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering
Department, Engineering Services Division at P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-
4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street
address only) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. All qualification data must be completed and
delivered to the Director of Engineering. at the above address not later than fourteen (14)
days prior to the time set for the receipt of bids. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City
do not have to make reapplication.
3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract
Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in
any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; ( c) consider and
abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and
(d) study and carefully cOIrelate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and
notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents.
3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification
of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have
been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely
upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical
data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the
purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical
conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities)
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIl.doc
Section II-Instructions to Bidders
July 2007
Section II-Instructions to Bidders
which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in
preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical
data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of
bidding or construction.
3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the
City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not
assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in
the Contract Documents.
3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective
Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions,
possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing
conditions appear in the General Conditions.
3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any
additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface
and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such
explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for
submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former
condition upon completion of such explorations and tests.
3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access
thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are
identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by
the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents.
3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the
Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that,
without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required
by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures
of construction as may be indicated in or. required by the Contract Documents, and that the
Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding
of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work.
4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the
Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response
to such questions will be issued by Addenda, either by mail or facsimile transmission, to all
parties recorded by the Purchasing Manager as having received the Bidding Documents.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionII.doc
Section II-Instructions to Bidders
2
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section II.Instructions to Bidders
Questions received less than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be
answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and
other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect.
4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the
City or Engineer.
5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND
5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in
an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of
a certified or cashiers check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the
requirements of the General Con~tions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted.
5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed
the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the
Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the
Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract
by the City Commission, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will
be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable
chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of
the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid
opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after
the Bid opening.
5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company
qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida.
6 CONTRACT TIME
6.1 -.The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set
forth in the Technical Specifications.
7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement.
8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the
Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or
"or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications
that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance
will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract
Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General
Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionII.doc
3
Section II-Instructions to Bidders
July 2007
Section II-Instructions to Bidders
9 SUBCONTRACTORS
9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so
requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the' date of the request, submit to the Engineer
an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence
of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the
Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed
fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If
the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed
Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award
of the Contract.
Agreement to the City Commission, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable
substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder
declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest
and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and
other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not
constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any
Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom
the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the
City Commission will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such
acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General
Conditions.
9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or
organization against whom he has reasonable objection.
10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM
10.1 The BidlProposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and. shall be completed in
ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. The Bidder
must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations
or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract
Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump
sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for
completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be
found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the
work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the
work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct
proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items.
10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the
corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be
shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or
partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind
the corporation or partnership.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\SectionlI.doc
Section II-Instructions to Bidders
4
. July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section II-Instructions to Bidders
10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general
partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the
partnership shall be shown below the signature.
lOA All names shall be typed or printed below the signature.
11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS
11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the
Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in the bid envelope provided with the bid
documents. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the
notation If Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the City of Clearwater,
attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the
Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by
the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted.
12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the
manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of
Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person
duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to
submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for
receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified.
12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for
typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a
typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the
requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction
is accepted by the City., Tile City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or
modify any bid.
13 REJECTION OF BIDS
13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City
reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds
for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized
alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or
irregularities of any kind Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City
believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that
Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful
financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the
City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in
the interest of the public.
14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER
14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists
among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future
TBE Group, Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionII.doc
Section II-Instructions to Bidders
July 2007
5
Section II-Instructions to Bidders
proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit
contained in the Contract Documents.
15 OPENING OF BIDS
15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement
for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids.
16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES
16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as
specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply
with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which
in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees
and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical
Specifications.
16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any
construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically
stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be
stated by the Contractor.
16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law.
The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales
tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements.
17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE
17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor
Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders
with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with
respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of
commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has
implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process.
Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied
bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace
program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six
statements and the accompanying certification statement:
(1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution,
dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and
specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such
prohibition.
(2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy
of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and
employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for
drug abuse violations.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIl.doc
Section II-Instructions to Bidders
6
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section II-Instructions to Bidders
(3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that
are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
(4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of
working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will
abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or
plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled
substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the
workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction.
(5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance
or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee
who is so convicted.
(6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through
implementation of this section.
I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above
requirements.
18 AWARD OF CONTRACT
18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words.
Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in
favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of
figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or
not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may
be requested in the BidlProposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and
experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by
the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City
deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility,
qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and
. other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time.
18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive
Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the
best interest of the City.
18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items
in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will
be awarded to only one Contractor.
19 BID PROTEST
19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the
solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with
the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with
protest procedures set forth in this section.
TBE GrOUD. Ine.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionII.doc
Section II-Instructions to Bidders
July 2007
7
Section II-Instructions to Bidders
19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE:
A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for
proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the
opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposal. Opening dates for bids or
due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself.
B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of
five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each
bidder, which ever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders
upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite
specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly
been violated.
C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be
granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have
knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of
intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions
should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception.
D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the fonnal written protest within five
business days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully
coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City
Manager.
E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager,
he/she may then submit in writing within five business days of receipt of that
response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of hislher original
fonnal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City
Manager.
F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the'
matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten work
days of receipt of the appeal.
19.3 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the
Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all
administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written
determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best
interest of the City.
20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT
20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections
553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650
Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws.
TBE Group. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionII.doc
Section II-Instructions to Bidders
8
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION III
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
1 DEFINITIONS
Addenda
Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct
or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents.
Agreement
The written contract between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work to be
performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part
thereof as provided therein.
Application/or Payment
The form accepted by ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR in requesting
progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting
documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.
Approve
The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or
methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given
in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer
to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications.
Bid
The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the
prices forthe work to be performed.
Bidding Documents
The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the
proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
Bonds
Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security.
Change Order
A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition,
deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract
Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement.
City
The City of Clearwater, Florida.
Contract Documents
The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid
(including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation
submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the
Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any
Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits
identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of
the Agreement.
Contract Price
The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work.
TBE GraDO. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIlI.doc
Section III-General Conditions
July 2007
Section III - General Conditions
Contract Time
The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work.
Contractor
The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement.
Day
A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
Defective
An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,
faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the
requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the
Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final
payment.
Drawings
The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement,
which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been
prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop
drawings are not Drawings as so defined.
Engineer
The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the
purposes of this contract, the City Engineer or his duly appointed representative.
Engineer's Consultant
A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent
professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as
such in the Supplementary Conditions.
Furnish
The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar
meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and
install complete in place and ready for service".
Inspection
The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to
ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and
Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or
overseeing.
Laws and Regulations
Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind
of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction.
Liens
Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances. upon real property or personal
property.
Milestone
A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate
completion date or time prior to the final completion date.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIII.doc
Section III-General Conditions
2
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
Notice to Proceed
A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the
Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his
obligations under the Contract Documents.
Owner
The City of Clearwater, Florida
Person
A natural person or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial
entity.
Project
The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents
may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Partial Utilization
Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is
intended (or' a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work.
Shop Drawing
All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by
or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard
schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a
supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the
Work.
Specifications
Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of
materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the
Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto.
Subcontractor
A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the
performance of a part of the Work at the site.
Substantial Completion
The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the
opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial
Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so
that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended;
or ifno such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment
as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms
"substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the
Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
Supplementary Conditions
The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions.
Supplier
A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman or vendor having a direct
contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to
be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\Sectionlll.doc
Section III-General Conditions
3
July 2007
Section II1- General Conditions
Surety
Any person, fIrm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be
responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid,
Performance or Payment Bond.
Underground Facilities
All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such
facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been
installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity,
gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable
television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or
water.
Unit Price Work
Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
Work
The entire completed construction or the various separately identifIable parts thereof
required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result
of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the
construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as
required by the Contract Documents.
Work Change Directive
A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement
and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or
responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be
performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or
Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or
documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued
Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract
Price or Contract Times.
2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE
When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to
Owner such Bonds and CertifIcates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this
contract.
2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS
Engineer shall furnish to Contractor four copies of Contract Documents for execution.
Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIII.doc
4
Section III-General Conditions
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO
PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT
The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor
shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall
be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run.
2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION
Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable
field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or
discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or
clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however,
Contractor shall not be liable to Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in
the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof.
No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of Owner or Engineer,
either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or
obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without
approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be
the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
Within twenty days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Engineer may
schedule a conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer and others as appropriate to
establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule
of the Work and general Contract procedures.
3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT
3.1 INTENT
The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor
concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents
are complementary; ,what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of
the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be
constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment
which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or
from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and
performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well-
known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials
or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning.
Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Engineer.
Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or
association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether. such
reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIIl.doc
Section III-General Conditions
July 2007
5
Section III - General Conditions
code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise
specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard
specification, manual or code (whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the
responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents) shall change the
duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor or Engineer, or any of their agents or employees
from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract
shall be issued by Engineer. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be
inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be
read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any
such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either
party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion.
The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or
discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary
Conditions, General Conditions, Drawings, Technical Specifications. In a series of Modifications
or Addenda the latest will govern.
3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES
If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or
discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any
provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any
such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor
shall report it to the Engineer in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work
affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract
Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications,
provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report
any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should
have known thereof.
4 AVAilABiliTY OF lANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL
CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS
4.1 AVAilABILITY OF lANDS
Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is
to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are
designated for the use of contractor. Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of
general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor
will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent
changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by Owner, unless otherwise provided
in the Contract Documents.
4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS
Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for
identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical
conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which
have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such
THE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionlII.doc
Section III-General Conditions
6
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify Engineer in writing of any subsurface or latent
physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those
indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those
conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall
obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and
Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are
subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the
contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a
work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions.
4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to
Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise
expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for
the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following
will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i)
reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities
shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (Hi) coordination of the Work with the owners of
such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such
Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The
Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER
prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a
member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any
excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the
protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in
local telephone directory.
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS
Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which
in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor
shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference
points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner.
Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires
relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the
accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by professionally qualified personnel.
The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information
regarding the provision of construction surveys. Excessive stake replacement caused by
negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the
Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be
computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with
a minimum charge of one hour.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\OO083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIII.doc
Section III-General Conditions
7
July 2007
Section III - General Conditions
5 BONDS AND INSURANCE
5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND
Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and Payment Bond, each in an amount at least
equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all
Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect at
least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is
prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish
such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the
form prescribed by the Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named
in. the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on
Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570
(amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury
Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such
agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section
255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the
Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. The Owner reserves
the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared
bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any
part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents,
the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both
of which must be acceptable to the Owner.
5.2 INSURANCE
Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the
Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below
which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and
Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or
furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts
any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability
benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily
injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for
damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability
coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related
to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v)
Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for
damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the
ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with
copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of
insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured)
which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this paragraph. The
policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (i)
include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIlI.doc
Section III-General Conditions
8
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
liability) City of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary .
Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include coverage for the
respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed
operations insurance; (Hi) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity
obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement
that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at
least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each
other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of
. insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as
described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times
thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in
accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed
operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in
effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other
additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance
has been issued evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation
of such insurance at fmal payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number
of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer.
The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the
following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations:
5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE
Contract A ward Amount Contract A ward Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory
(2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000.
5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE
Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and
Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual,
Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities:
Contract A ward Amount Contract A ward Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Bodily Injury: .$500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
$1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
Aggregate Aggregate
(2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
$1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionlII.doc
9
Section III-General Conditions
July 2007
Section III - General Conditions
Aggregate Aggregate
(3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
employment exclusion deleted Aggregate Aggregate
5.2.3
COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles:
Contract A ward Amount Contract A ward Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person
$500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident
(2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
Receipt and acceptance by the Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other
similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages,
which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. Owner shall not be responsible
for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor,
Subcontractors or others in the Work. The Owner may at its option require a copy of the
Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document
shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No
deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from the Owner.
Lon2shore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932,
requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of
benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S.
Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self-insurer.
For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable
for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7,
8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor
fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to
secure the payment of compensation.
5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS
Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance
will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other
persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or
additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages
caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that
in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against
any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, Owner and Contractor waive all rights
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIII.doc
Section III-General Conditions
10
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section II1- General Conditions
against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and
damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies
and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights
against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities
identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under
such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the
rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise
payable under any policy so issued. In addition, Owner waives all rights against Contractor,
Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and
agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential
loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner's property or the Work caused
by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by Owner and; (ii)
loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting
from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed
Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after
final payment.
6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBiliTIES
6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE
Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting
such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, but Contractor shall not
be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means,
method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and
expressly required by the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a
competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to Owner and
Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's
representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All
communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor.
Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever Engineer shall
notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful,
disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the project and shall
not again be employed on it except with the written consent of Engineer.
Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as
a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner's normally
approved holidays. At Owner's option, overtime costs may either be deducted from the
Contractor's monthly payment request or deducted from the Contractor's retention prior to
release of final payment or the Engineer may elect to receive a monthly check from the
Contractor in the amount of the overtime costs. Minimum number of chargeable hours for
inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per
hour shall be $40.00 per hour.
TBE Group, Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIIl.doc
Section III-General Conditions
11
July 2007
Section III - General Conditions
Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary
accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the
requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer.
6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, layout and construct
the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good
discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of
persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated
in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours
and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday,
or any legal holiday without Owner's consent given after prior notice to Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full
responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and
machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities,
temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing,
performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work.
All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish
satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and
equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used
in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly
stored, may be rej~cted by the Engineer without testing.
All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and
conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS
Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents
by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or
description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the
specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or
"or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material
or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an
item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and
sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by
Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment
proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a
proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the
Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is
essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review
of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other
than Contractor.
TBE Group. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIII.doc
Section III-General Conditions
12
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section II1- General Conditions
Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to
Engineer and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination.
All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be
at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or
submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability.
6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND
OTHERS
Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a
direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own
acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer
and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of
Owner or Engineer to payor to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor,
Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating
the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the
work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all
Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to
communicate with the Engineer through Contractor.
The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not
control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the
work to be performed by any specific trade.
All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically
binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer.
Contractor shall not payor employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization
whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable
objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person
or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable
objection.
Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his
Subcontractors or between Subcontractors.
6.5 USE OF PREMISES
Contractor shall confme construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the
operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract
Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and
easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or
other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any
such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting
from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant
because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party
TBE Grouo. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIlI.doc
Section III-General Conditions
13
July 2007
Section III - General Conditions
by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in
or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify
and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors,
employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or
resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant
against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or
based upon Contractor's performance of the Work.
During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of
waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the
Work or at intervals established by. the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials,
rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction
equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all
property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES
Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process,
product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular
invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in
the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is
subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to
others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents.
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents
and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and
damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident
to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any
invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall
defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights.
Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in
accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental
agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work.
6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS
Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to
furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by
applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for
monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any
work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor
shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however,
it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and
Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of
Contractor's obligations to Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIlI.doc
Section III-General Conditions
14
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section II1- General Conditions
6.8 PERMITS
Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for
all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining
such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees
necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids.
Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and Owner shall
pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment
fees.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, City of Clearwater Building Permit Fees will
be waived.
6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION
Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions
and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for
the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i)
all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials
and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site;, and (iii) other
property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation
or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work,
or during inclement weather, or whenever Engineer may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause
Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the
weather. If, in the opinion of Engineer, any portion of Work or materials shall have been
damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so
protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of
Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which
shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the
education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe
conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees.
The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program
and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of
construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal
protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The
Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to Owner's employees,
equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of
loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to the Owner, and the Contractor shall
remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all
persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his
employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their
safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians
and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity.
Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss;
and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor
shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIIl.doc
Section III-General Conditions
15
July 2007
Section III - General Conditions
prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection,
removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property
caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any
other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish
any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by
Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall
continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner
and Contractor that the Work is acceptable.
6.10 EMERGENCIES
In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or
adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or
Engineer, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer
prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or
variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If Engineer determines that a
change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in
response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to
document the consequences of such action.
6.11 DRAWINGS
6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the
Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will
be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria,
materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to
provide and.to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples
to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample,
Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions,
specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar
information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication,
shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work,
and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and
programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop
Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work
and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that
Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to
Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall
give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample
submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a
written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific
notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and
approval of each such variation.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the
items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to
TBE GraDO. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIII.doc
Section III-General Conditions
16
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ii
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of
the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's
review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of
construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety
precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will
not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make
corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of
Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall
direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer
on previous submittals.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from
responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless
Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of
submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written
notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor
will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with
the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor.
6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order
and legible condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and
annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes
or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans,
including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the
construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the
plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not
indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which
are revealed during the construction period.
The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer at all times during the
progress of the Project.
The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the City Inspector for accuracy and compliance
with the requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests.
The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not conform to the "As-
Built Drawings" requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the City Inspector for
approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request.
Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer
intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains.
The City's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole
responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings.
6.11.2.1
General
The Contractor shall prepare an "AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 61017-6, Florida
Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionlII.doc
Section III-General Conditions
17
July 2007
Section III - General Conditions
surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the City two hard copies of signed and sealed As-Built
Drawings and an AutoCAD file.
61G17-6.002 Definition: (10)(a) As-Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal
and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and
delineated: also know as Record Survey.
This survey shall be clearly titled "As-Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida
registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the City of Clearwater Construction
Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the City will
procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and
will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the City
with the required As-Built Survey.
6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems
1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation)
based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the
construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service
connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes,
cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions,
pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if
one exists.
2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted.
6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain)
All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the
approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction
plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new
and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described
above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear
type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points.
6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring
The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the. original Contract Plans. The as-built
drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where
this information is too voluminous to be. contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall
prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional
conduit runs, I-line diagrams, ladder diagrams1 and other information. The wiring schematic
diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder
diagram.
6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control
The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans
or if required by the City the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90
(horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be
the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical),
must be approved by the City of Clearwater Engineering Department.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionlILdoc
Section III-General Conditions
18
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I:
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
6.11.2.6 Standards
The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 61G17 and the
Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that
pertain to the as-built survey it is the requirement of the City to have minimum location points at
every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes.
6.11.2.7 Other
The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same
level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans.
6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS
6.11.3.1 Layer Naming
6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes
DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities
EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected
EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols
PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols
FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) -line
work and symbols
TX suffix denotes text - use for all text, no matter the prefix
6. D fi ..
11.3.1.2 La' er Nammg e Inltlons:
GAS gas lines and appurtenances
ELEC power lines and appurtenances
PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances
CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances
BOC curbs
WALK sidewalk
WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers
STORM storm lines and appurtenances
TREES trees, bushes, planters
SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances
FENCE all fences
BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation
DRIVE driveways
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIlI.doc
Section III-General Conditions
19
July 2007
Section III - General Conditions
EOP edge of pavement without curbs
TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes
TOPBANK top of bank
TOESLOPE toe of slope
TOPBERM top of berm
TOEBERM toe of berm
SEAWALL seawall
CONCSLAB concrete slabs
WALL walls, except seawall
SHORE shoreline, water elevation
CL centerline of road
CLD centerline of ditch
CLS centerline of swale
CORNER property comers, monumentation
BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks
Other layers may be created as required, using above format.
6.11.3.2 Layer Properties
All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer.
All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer.
All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts.
6.11.3.3 Text Styles
Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 00, and a text height of .008
times the plot scale.
Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.50, and a text
height of .010 times the plot scale.
6.11.4 DELIVERABLES:
The as-built survey shall be produced on vellum or bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1 "=20'
unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format.
Acceptable file formats include: DWG, DXF of a shape file.
Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail
address Tom.Mahonv@mvClearwater.com .
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIlI.doc
Section III-General Conditions
20
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~I
Section III - General Conditions
6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work
will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's
warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism,
modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until
the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the
Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part
thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution
or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own
expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its
completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any
defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom
which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance".
Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by
Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work,
which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the
Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of
Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's
obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by
Engineer, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Engineer, (iii) the issuance of
a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by Owner to contractor under the
Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any
acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or
Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer.
6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK
Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any
disputes or disagreements, except as Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
6.14 INDEMNIFICATION
Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the
officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and
against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other
dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work,
provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness,
disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself),
including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any
negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or
indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or
omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such
indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person.
TBE Grauo. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIII.doc
Section III-General Conditions
21
July 2007
Section II1- General Conditions
If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor
shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or
Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so
settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against Owner on such
account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall
indemnify and save hannless Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims against Owner
or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by
any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any
Subcontractor, any
Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of
the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation
under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of
damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor,
Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts
or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this
paragraph. shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers,
directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any
of them.
7 OTHER WORK
7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE
Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the site by Owner's own forces, or let
other direct contracts therefore which shall contain General Conditions similar to these, or have
other work performed by utility owners. If the fact that such other work is to be performed was
not noted in the Contract Documents, then: (i) written notice thereof will be given to Contractor
prior to starting any such other work, and (ii) Contractor may make a claim therefore if
Contractor believes that such performance will involve additional expense to Contractor or
requires additional time and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof.
Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract and each
utility owner (and Owner, if Owner is performing the additional work with Owner's employees)
proper and safe access to the site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of
materials and equipment and the execution of such other work and shall properly connect and
coordinate the work with theirs. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,
Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of the work that may be required to make its
several parts come together properly and integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not
endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering their work and will
only cut or alter their work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will
be affected. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this paragraph are for the benefit
of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for
the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and
other contractors. Should the Contractor cause damage to any other contractor on the Project, the
contractor agrees, upon due notice, to settle with such contractor by agreement or arbitration, if
he will so settle. If such other contractor sues the Owner on account of any damage alleged to
have been so sustained, the Owner shall notify the Contractor, who shall defend such
TBE Group, Inc.
I :\OO083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIII.doc
Section III-General Conditions
22
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:1
I
I
II
I.
I
!
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
proceedings at his own expense~ and if any judgment against the Owner arises therefrom the
Contractor shall payor satisfy the judgment and pay all costs incurred by the Owner.
If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor's work depends upon work performed
by others under this Article. Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to
Engineer in writing any delays~ defects or deficiencies in such other work that render it
unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor's work. Contractor's
failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for
integration with Contractor's work except for latent or nonapparent defects and deficiencies in
such other work.
7 .2 COORDINATION
If Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site~ the
following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and
responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be
identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be
itemized; and (Hi) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless
otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions~ Owner shall have sole authority and
responsibility in respect of such coordination.
8 OWNERS RESPONSIBiliTY
Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications
to Contractor through Engineer.
Owner shall furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and
shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General
Conditions.
Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The
Work.
Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the
Article on Tests and Inspections.
In connection with Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may
Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with Owner's right to
terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances.
The Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for~
Contractor's means, methods~ techniques~ sequences or procedures of construction or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto~ or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. Owner will not be
responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
TBE Grauo. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021. 06\DOC\Specs\SectionIII.doc
Section III-General Conditions
23
July 2007
Section III - General Conditions
9 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE
Engineer will be Owner's representative during the construction period. The duties and the
responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner's representative during
construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written
consent of Owner and Engineer.
9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS
Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of
the requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of Drawings or otherwise) as Engineer
may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable
from Contract Documents. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on
Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies
an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to
the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided
in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time.
9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK
Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Engineer believes to be
defective, or that Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the
Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed
Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have
authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is
fabricated, installed or completed.
9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS
In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop
Drawings and Samples. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Change Orders, see the
articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Engineer's
authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and
Completion.
9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES
Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge
of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the
acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents
pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for
Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred
initially to Engineer in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this
paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the
claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Agreement promptly (but in no event later than
thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting
data will be submitted to Engineer and the other party within sixty days after the start of such
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionllI.doc
Section III-General Conditions
24
July 2007
I
I
I
I
,I
,I
I
I
I
i
-!
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I'
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
occurrence or event unless Engineer allows an additional period of time for the submission of
additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing
party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within thirty days after receipt of
the claimant's last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time). Engineer will render a
formal decision in writing within thirty days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if
any, in accordance with this paragraph. Engineer's written decision on such claim, dispute or
other matter will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from
Engineer's decision is taken within thirty days of the Engineers decision, or the appeal time
which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between the Owner and Contractor for
the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into,
a written notice of intention to appeal from Engineer's written decision is delivered by Owner or
Contractor to the other and to Engineer within thirty days after the date of such decision and a
formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to
exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim,
dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty days of
the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by Owner and Contractor.
When functioning as interpreter and judge, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or
Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in
good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Engineer with respect to any such
claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or
Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract
Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter
pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution.
9.6 LIMITATIONS ON ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
Neither Engineer's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision
of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or
not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undert3king, exercise or performance of any
authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by
Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to
any surety for or employee or agent of any of them.
Engineer will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for
Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Engineer will not be
responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor,
any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work.
Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all
maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of
inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the
Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements
of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that
the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIlI.doc
Section III-General Conditions
25
July 2007
Section III - General Conditions
The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to
Engineer's Consultants and assistants.
10 CHANGES IN THE WORK
Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or
from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions
or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change
Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work
involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents
(except as may otherwise be specifically provided).
If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the
Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a
Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions.
Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract
Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions
except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in
article for Uncovering Work.
Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments
recommended by Engineer covering:
changes in the work which are (i) ordered by Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of
defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective
Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the
parties;
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written
decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes;
provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any
such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable
Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and
adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work.
If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the
provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's
responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly.
11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations
assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the
TBE Group. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIII.doc
Section III-General Conditions
26
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
it
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
Section III - General Conditions
Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice
of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to
the other party and to Engineer promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of
the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with
supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after the start of such occurrence or event
(unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data
in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the
claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said
occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not
submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order
or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where
the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application
of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not
covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum
(which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered
by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit
prices for the Work.
11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT
It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the
Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such
sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances
include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment
required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii)
Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead,
profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract
Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the
foregoing will be valid.
Prior to fmal payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer
to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the
Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly
adjusted.
11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK
Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,
initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to
the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times
the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of
items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of
Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and
classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer. Each unit
price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover
Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. Owner or Contractor may
make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price
Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of
TBE GraDO. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIII.doc
Section III-General Conditions
27
July 2007
Section III - General Conditions
such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment
with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled
to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner
believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree
as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, the Owner endeavors
to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is
expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit
quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract
unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result
in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract
Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid.
12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME
The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time ( or Milestones) shall be based on
written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Engineer
promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to
the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with
supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after such occurrence (unless Engineer
allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim) and
shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire
adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence
of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined
by Engineer. No claim for an adjuStment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid ifnot
submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph.
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement.
. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones)
may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made
therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the
Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by
Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the
article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God.
Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be
delays within the control of Contractor.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both Owner and Contractor, an extension of
the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be
Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall Owner be liable to
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee
or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or
within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but
not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility
owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other
Work.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIIl.doc
Section III-General Conditions
28
July 2007
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I;
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION
Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required
inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to
facilitate required inspections or tests.
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Docwnents. The costs for these
inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in
the Contract Documents.
If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)
specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such
public body including all City Building Departments and City Utility Departments, Contractor
shall asswne full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals,
pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection
or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, City permit and impact fees will
be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all
costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's
acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix
designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for
incorporation of the Work.
If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence o.f Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be
uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at
. Contractor's expense unless Contractor.has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention
to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such
notice.
13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK
If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by
Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense.
If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or
inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer's request, shall uncover, expose or
otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer may require, that
portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is
found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages
caused by; arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection
and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all
costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate
decrease in the Contract Price for th~ costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to
agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change
in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be
allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones),
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIlI.doc
Section III-General Conditions
July 2007
29
Section II1- General Conditions
or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing,
replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent
thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract
Price and Change of Contract Time.
13.3 ENGINEER MAY STOP THE WORK
If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed
Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer may order Contractor to stop the Work,
or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of
Engineer to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Engineer or Owner to
exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Engineer stops
Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or
increase in Contract Price.
13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If required by Engineer, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work,
whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by.Engineer,
remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all
claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal
(including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others).
13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD
If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may
be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee
required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any
Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner-and in
accordance with Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been
rejected by Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii)
satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others
resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions,
or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the
defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs,
losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not
limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor.
In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from
an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written
Amendment.
Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected,
removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such
Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and
replacement has been satisfactorily completed.
THE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionlII.doc
Section III-General Conditions
30
July 2007
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner prefers
to accept it, Owner may do so.
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to Owner's evaluation of
and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to
reasonableness). If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer's recommendation of final
payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract
Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in
the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may
make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance
occurs after the Engineer's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid
by Contractor to Owner.
13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK
If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct
defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance
with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any
other provision of the Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days' written notice to
Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under
this paragraph Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and
remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all
or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, take possession of
Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site, and incorporate
in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which Owner has paid
Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's
representatives, agents and employees, Owner's other contractors,' and Engineer and Engineer's
Consultants access to the site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this
paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising
such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued
incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and
Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are
unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the
article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not
be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by
correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be
allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the
performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner's rights and remedies
hereunder.
14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units
completed.
TBE GroDD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIILdoc
Section III-General Conditions
31
July 2007
Section III - General Conditions
14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Engineer for review an
Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of
the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the
Engineer and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,
payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment
will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials,
labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application
for Payment for the total of all Work completed to date will be held until final completion and
acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be
construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract.
In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Engineer may require the
Contractor to produce for the Owner, within fifteen days of the approval of any progress
payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid
any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required
herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is
provided.
14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE
Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by
any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no
later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall
be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a
conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller.
Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work,
free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner
harmless from- all claims growing out of. the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers,
workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment,
power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract.
Contractor shall at Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the
nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do
so, then Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid
bills, of which Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation
a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until
satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon
payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no
event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon Owner to
the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, Owner shall be
deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by Owner shall be considered as
payment made under the Contract by Owner to Contractor, and Owner shall not be liable to
Contractor for any such payment made in good faith.
14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
Engineer will within twenty days after receipt of each Application for payment, either indicate a
recommendation of payment and present Application to Owner, or return the Application to
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIll.doc
Section III-General Conditions
32
July 2007
I
I
I
'I
Ii
I
I
_i
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
Contractor indicating Engineer's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case,
Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Engineer may
refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to the Owner. Engineer may also
refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the
results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to
such extent as may be necessary in Engineer's opinion to protect Owner from loss because: (i)
the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or
replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii)
Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Engineer has
actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension
of Work and Termination.
Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Engineer because:
(i) claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing
of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has
delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such
Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, or
(iv) Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner
shall give Contractor immediate notice of refusal to pay with a copy to the Engineer, stating the
reasons for such actions, and the Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld,
or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to
Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action.
14.4 PARTIAL UTiliZATION
Use by Owner at Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has
specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer and Contractor
agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner
for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the
remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject
to the following:
Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use any such part of the
Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If
Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to
Owner and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Engineer to
issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time
may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work
ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate
of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such
request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to
determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be
substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons
therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions
of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to
certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility
in respect thereof and access thereto.
TBE GrouD. IDe.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\SectionIII.doc
Section III-General Conditions
33
July 2007
Section III - General Conditions
14.5 FINAL INSPECTION
Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is
complete, Engineer will make- a fmal inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify
Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is
incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to
complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Engineer and has
delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions,
schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the
paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents as
may be required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make
application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The fmal
Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (I) all
documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of
insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the surety, if any or if
necessary, to fmal payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers
(satisfactory to Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of
such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or
releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor,
services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material
and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner or.
Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any
Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish
a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien.
Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all
surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an
acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the
prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition.
14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE
If through no fault of Contractor, fmal completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if
Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment
and recommendation of Engineer, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the
balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance
to be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage
stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for
Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that
portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer
with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and
. conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of
claims.
If on the basis of Engineer's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection,
and Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation,
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIII. doc
Section III-General Conditions
34
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section II1- General Conditions
all as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied. that the Work has been
completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled,
Engineer will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to
Owner for payment. Thereupon Engineer will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that
the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Engineer will return
the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend fmal
payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and
substance, Owner shall, within sixty-five days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount
recommended by Engineer.
14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS
The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by Owner
against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing
after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any
special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the
Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against Owner other than those
previously made in writing and still unsettled.
15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK
At any time and without cause, Engineer may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a
period of not more than ninety days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on
which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor
shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or
both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim
therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time.
15.2 OWNERMAYTERMINATE
Upon the occurrence of anyone or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails
to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to,
failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere
to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time);
if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
if Contractor disregards the authority of Engineer;
if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract
Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this
Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of Owner, or
if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as
herein specified, or at any time Engineer certifies in writing to Owner that the rate of
progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part
thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed.
TBE Group, Ine.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIIl.doc
35
Section III-General Conditions
July 2007
Section III - General Conditions
Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the
extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude
Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools,
appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent
they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion),
incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which Owner has
paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as Owner may deem
expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the
Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and
damages sustained by Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess
will be paid to Contractor.
If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the
difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed
by Engineer as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Engineer incorporated in a
Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph Owner
shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed.
Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect
any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue.
Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from
liability.
Upon seven days' written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In
such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items):
for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract
Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable
sums for overhead and profit on such Work; .
-~ ~ .--.- .' .., ....
for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services
and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in
connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and
profit on such expenses;
for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts
with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly
attributable to termination.
Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other
economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE
If, through, no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety
days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or Engineer fails to act on
any Application for Payment within sixty days after it is submitted or Owner fails for sixty days
to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days'
written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such
suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from Owner
payment on the same terms as provided in the article for Owner May Terminate. However, if the
TBE Group. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIII.doc
Section III-General Conditions
36
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of the Owner, the Contractor shall
not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement
and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an
Application for Payment within thirty days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for thirty
days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven day's
written notice to Owner and Engineer stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due
Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making
claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise
for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this
article.
16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION
If and to the extent that Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for
resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution
method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for
resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on
Disputes, Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise
have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute
provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding
arbitration.
17 MISCELLANEOUS
17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS
The form of all submittals, notices, change orders and other documents permitted or required to
be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Engineer
subject to the approval of the Owner.
17.2 GIVING NOTICE
Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice
will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member
of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by
registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of
the notice.
17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM
Should Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error,
omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents
or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the
other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The
provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the
provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose.
TBE Group. Ine.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionlII.doc
Section III-General Conditions
37
July 2007
Section III - General Conditions
17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED
Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in
each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other
professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs.
17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT
The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without
the approval of the Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its
rights to notice of assignment.
17.6 RENEWAL OPTION
Annual Contracts issued through Public Works Administration may be renewed for up to two (2)
years, upon mutual consent of both the City and the ContractorN endor. All terms, conditions
and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or
in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the City, and must be
agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds,
and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by Public Works
Administration.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIII.doc
Section III-General Conditions
38
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION IV
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
1 SCOPE OF WORK
1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION
Project Name: Pump Station 16 Relocation
Project Number: 02-0002-UT
Scope of Work:
The work consist of the construction of a new pump station 16 including new wet well, valve
box, electrical controls, manholes and appurtenances. New gravity sewer including a jack and
bore of 54-inch steel casing, directional drill of approximately 1500 linear feet 12-inch HDPE
force main, connection to an existing 24-inch force main and the grout filling of an existing 30-
inch gravity sewer and 24-inch force main and other miscellaneous items.
The bid also includes an alternate bid item for the demolition of the existing pump station 16
building and site restoration.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST
Project Name: Pump Station 16 Relocation
Project Number: 02-0002-UT
The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X"
as shown below:
1 X Scope Of Work
2.1 X Line, Grade And Record Drawings - by Contractor
2.2 [ ] Line, Grade And Record Drawings - by City
3 X Definition Of Terms
4 X Order And Location Of The Work
5 X Excavation For Underground Work
6 X Concrete
7 X Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work
8 X Reinforcement
9 X Obstructions
10 X Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement
11 X Work In Easements Or Parkways ....
12 X Dewatering
13 X Sanitary Manholes
14 X Backfill
15 X Street Crossings, Etc.
16 X Raising Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures
17 X Unsuitable Material Removal
18 X Underdrains
19 X Storm Sewers
20 X Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains
21 X Drainage
22 X Roadway Base And Subgrade
23 X Asphaltic Concrete Materials
24 [ ] Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt
25 X General Planting Specifications
26 [ ] Hdpe Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining
27 X Plant Mix Driveways
28 [J Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials
29 X Concrete Curbs
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionN .doc
2
Section IV -Technical Specifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
30 X Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways
31 X Sodding
32 Seeding
33 X Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures
34 X Material Used
35 X Conflict Between Plans And Specifications
36 X Street Signs
37.1 AudioMdeo Tape Of Work Areas - by City
37.2 X AudioMdeo Tape Of Work Areas - by Contractor
38 X Erosion And Siltation Control
39 X Utility Tie In Location Marking
40 X Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee
41 X Water Mains and Appurtenances
42 Gas System Specifications
43 Tennis Courts
44 X Work Zone Traffic Control
45 Cured-In-Place Pipe Lining
46 Specifications for Polyethylene Slinlining
47 Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe
48 Gunite Specifications
49 Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration
50 X Proiect Information Signs
51 ] In-Line Skating Surfacing System
52.1 ] Resident Notification of Start of Construction - by City
52.2 X Resident Notification of Start of Construction - by Contractor
53 Gabions and Mattresses
54 Lawn Maintenance Specifications
55 Milling Operations
56 X Clearing and Grubbing
57 Ripran
58 Treatment Plant Safety
59 Traffic Signal EQuipment and Materials
60 Signing And Marking
61 Roadway Lighting
62 X Tree Protection
63 J Proiect Web Pages
TIME: 210 DAYS allotted for the construction of PS 16. For the demolition of the existing
PS 16 ,if awarded, an additional 60 days will be allocated.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
2 LINE, GRADE AND RECORD DRAWINGS
2.1 L.INE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE
CONTRACTOR
Benchmarks to be used shall be those as shown on the plans. Control points (for alignment only)
shall be established by the Engineer. Contractor shall submit cut sheets for all underground work
24 hours in advance of commencement of the work for checking. Checking of cut-sheets does
not relieve the Contractor of any responsibilities for any errors or conflicts whatsoever. Cut
sheets shall be submitted in triplicate. The Contractor shall provide three complete sets.ofRecord
construction drawings prior to fmal payment being made.
2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY
At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project
inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project.
Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and
grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the
rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be
computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the
project Record construction drawings.
3 DEFINITION OF TERMS
For the purpose of these Technical Specifications the following definition of terms shall apply:
City
_ City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, FL.
Engineer
The City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized
representative.
Contractor
The person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by
the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative.
Inspector
An authorized representative of the City Engineer of Clearwater, assigned to make
official inspections of the material furnished and the work performed by the Contractor.
F.D.o.T.
The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as
Specifications
issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition).
A.A.S.HT.O.
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
4
Section IV - Technical Specifications
A.WS
American Welding Society
A.ST.M
American Society for Testing Materials
A.SA.
American Standards Association
A.N.Sl
American National Standards Institute
A.WWA.
American Water Works Association
o.S.HA.
Occupational Safety & Health Administration
A.C.l
American Concrete Institute
RepresentativeofCon"actor
The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the
construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these
persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction
conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City
Engineer.
Estimated Quantities
The Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on
the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which
the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that
the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantitiesnorshall the
contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or
of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining
thereto.
4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to
the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the
Contractor shall work and order thereof.
5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK
The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner
which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times
maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property.
The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements
of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in
these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory
agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
5
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to
consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as
OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for
excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the
removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of
a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor Will identify his Competent
Person to City staff at the start of construction.
City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or
other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with
the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with
these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's
excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is
unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must
either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the
accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense.
The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain
sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open
cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to
OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the
Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in compliance with all
safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work
necessary to complete the project.
Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the
completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance
specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than
the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid
in them. The bottom of the. trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the.
body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place,
excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling
and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without
compensation.
6 CONCRETE
Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest
editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the
American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall
be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials.
Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum
compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall
conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete
shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except
when admixtures or special placement considerations are required.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
concrete placement.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
6
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
All concrete shall be tested in the following manner:
Placement ofless than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise,
for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3
compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion
of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as
determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and
compensation or denial thereof.
7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK
7.1 EXCAVATION
Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon
which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to. a
point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the
dry".
7.2 FORMS
Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by
written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth
equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall
be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or
springing.
8 REINFORCEMENT
When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be
deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel sh~IJ'.e...billet ,Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel
A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM AI85). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete
reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated
reinforcing Steel Bars shall meetASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements.
8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the
contract unit price for the item of work specified.
9 OBSTRUCTIONS
Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be
carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and
properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof.
Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains,
or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims
for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made.
Failure. of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or
obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
7
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless
otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land
surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the
nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means.
10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS,
CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT
Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and
shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards,
whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be
replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is
unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved
material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as
base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T-
180.
Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor,
materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or
square yard of base.
The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals,
shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid
for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of
replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the
pipe. Allover this will be at the Contractor's expense.
The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in
the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and
..... shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard:
concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot.
Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10
welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30).
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work.
11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS
Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the
construction progress.
The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time
following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration
within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction
activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests.
Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery
removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionlV .doc
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
8
Section IV - Technical Specifications
The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on
any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local
residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission.
Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater
treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for
Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre-
construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory
requirements.
12 DEWATERING
Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the
dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the
work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity
underdrain system, or sumps with pumps.
Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the
excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain
firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and
the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of
handling large volumes of air as well as of water.
The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering
operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work,
the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in
excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to
conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer.
The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the
case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures.
13 SANITARY MANHOLES
13.1 BUILT UP TYPE
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the
drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to
inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of
as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and
evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into
concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full
section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe.
The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed
twenty four inches.
Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
9
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a
stretcher course.
13.2 PRECAST TYPE
Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the
City Engineer.
AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5
inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be
a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "0" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum
concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days.
Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for
approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance
to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by
the City Engineer.
Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as
numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before
being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering
system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered.
Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of
Clearwater Engineering Detail #302 Sheet 2 of3.
Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings
are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry-will not be allowed.
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5)
inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing.
Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring
shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade
changes without disturbing the manhole.
13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS)
1. All grade adjustments of manhole frame and cover assemblies shall be completed
utilizing the following: High Density Polyethylene Grade Adjustment Rings - Comply
with ASTM Standard D-1248 for recycled plastic.
a. Material properties shall be tested and certified for usage by the following ASTM
methods:
b. Property Test Method Acceptable Value
c. Melt Flow Index ASTM D1238 0.3 to 30 g /10 min.
d. Density ASTM D792 0.94 to 0.98 g / cm3
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\SectionIV .doc
10
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
e. Tensile Strength ASTM D638 2.00 to 5 x 103lb / in 2
f. Polyethylene adjusting rings shall not be used when they are exposed to heated
hot mix asphalt pavement.
g. Tapered configuration: When used in a single configuration tapered adjusting ring
thickness will range from 0.5 inch to 3.0 inch.
h. Grade adjustment rings are to be installed on clean flat surfaces according to the
manufacturer's recommendations with the proper Butyl Rubber sealant/adhesives.
2. The inside diameter of the adjustment ring shall not be less than the inside diameter of the
manhole frame.
3. Manholes shall be constructed with at least two adjustment rings.
4. Maximum height of adjustment ring stack: 12 inches max. for new'manholes and 16
inches max. on existing manholes.
13.3 DROP MANHOLES
Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as
detailed on the drawings.
13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS
Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush
with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301.
13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS
The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two coats of bitumastic
black.solution 300 M as manufactured by Koppers Company, Inc..or,.appro..v:ed.equal. Interior of
built up manholes which have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a
force main shall have the inside plastered with 1/2 inch of grout and coated as precast manholes
below.
The exterior and interior of all precast manholes shall be coated with at least 15 mils dry
thickness of PRO CO EP 214351 Epoxi Mastic as manufactured by Protective Coatings Inc.
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES
Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a
manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling. '
14 BACKFILL
Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources
as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or
debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all
fill shall be similar material.
Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand
shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\OOO83\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness
unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98%
compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement.
Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a
minimum of 95% compaction of AASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test.
The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the
case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure.
15 STREET CROSSINGS. ETC.
At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be
bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon
the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The
material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be
satisfactory to the Engineer.
The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation.
16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER. STORM
DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans
or as indicated by the Engineer.
16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work.
17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL
All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the
site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off-
site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall either be shown on the plans, or determined
in the field by the Engineer in conjunction with the City's Materials Tester.
17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated
and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation,
truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal.
17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment,
tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable
material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item.
TBE GroDD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
12
Section N - Technical Specifications
18 UNDERDRAINS
The Contractor shall construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of
Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe
shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and
aggregate surface covered with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate
may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be
stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8"
diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification
For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiflhess of
46 in conformance with ASTM D24l2, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189
described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 _
SDR 35.
Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe
exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of l2454B or 1 2454C,
manufactured per ASTM F949-93a, minimum pipe stiflhess of 50 psi, with no evidence of
splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D24l2 at 60%
flatting and with a double gasket joint.
Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe
with compacted backfill. All poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure
to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall
be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain
aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi l40-N or approved
equal) per the construction detail drawings.
18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the,.num,!;l~r Q,flineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted.
;.
18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above,
which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and
shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain
(specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway,
road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item.
19 STORM SEWERS
All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be" reinforced concrete unless
otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941
of the current FDOT Specifications.
All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi l40N filter fabric or equivalent
(as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit
price for the pipe.
All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty
is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\0008302 I .06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
13
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No
pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and
not simply wedged up. Before fmishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to fmd that
the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout.
19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes,
inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream
manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole
cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter)
19.2 TESTING
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all
conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer
which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration.
The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by
filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the
crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer,
whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or
exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish
all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the
Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own
expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer,
remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No
trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be
acceptable.. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation.
. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the. Engineer on any or all sections of the
line.
19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted,
measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of
storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price
includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap,
labor and incidentals, etc.).
20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS
20.1 MATERIALS
20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON.
Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R.
35. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
14
Section IV - Technical Specifications
and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with
ASTM D 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 12.5 feet.
Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and
fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP
water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline
easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral
connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets
shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41.
20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless
otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile
iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications
for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures
recommendations.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet
radiation shall be rejected.
20.2 INSTAllATION
20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained
in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5.
The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable
width allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench
boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and
compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment.
Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow
preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without
standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to
prevent flotation or misalignment.
Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to
remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm
support of pipe.
Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an
approved water stop around pipe joint entry.
The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is
required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction
inspector the location of all new laterals.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
15
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical
Specifications for water main pipe.
20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings
describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from
the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings
will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main
pipes in manholes.
20.4 TESTING
20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all
conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level
may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying
above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a
hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test
section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the
exfiltra- tion. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter
per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the
amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or
exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to
remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire
length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after
they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation.
The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the
line.
20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS
Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for one hour, as described
in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains.
20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT
20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per
appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for
payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes.
Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline
of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
16
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete
the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering,
backfill and grading.
20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of
these Technical Specifications for water main pipe.
21 DRAINAGE
The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the
progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them.
22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE
22.1 BASE
This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall
refer to Section IV, Article 1 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications fOr additional
roadway base and subgrade items.
Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or
directed by the Engineer. The sub grade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a
minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor
and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing
laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the
limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract
Specifications.will apply.
Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs
required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done
to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can
commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material
shall be included in the bid item for base.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base
and subgrade placement or reworking.
The following base materials are acceptable:
1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913
of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted
thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the
prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base.
2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections
200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a
minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
17
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item
price for base.
3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in
accordance with Sections 204 and 901 ofFDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition),
and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed .
concrete material shall be FDOT approved. . The Contractor shall provide certified
laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms
to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation
tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous
operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City
Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price
for base.
4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed
in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have
a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane
Interlayer (ARM!) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise
noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARM! layer shall be overlaid with
asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for
the work.
The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered
Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design
shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall
be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer.
The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use
of a spreader bar for spreading c~ment will not .be allowed. The applying of the cement
shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests
(Le. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be
at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil
cement design.
5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with
Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum
compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and
compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in
the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item
price for asphalt or base.
6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the
finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless
otherwise shown on the planS or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in
accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The
density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 6
of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements
are per Section 330-11, and for soil cement per Section 270-5 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
18
Section N -Technical SDecifications
July 2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
22.1.1
BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND R~WORKED BASE
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as
called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (V2"). Areas
deficient.in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if
so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be
made for such deficient areas that are left in place.
22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, prime, base, sub grade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item),
stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to
complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt
unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
22.2 SUBGRADE
All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of
FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall
have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by
the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of
the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract
Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in
accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing,
grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to
prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or
subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value
after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade.
22.2.1
BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place
and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth
shall be per Section 161-6.4 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values
shall be per FDOT Section 160-7.2. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be
corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the
City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas
that are left in place (latest edition).
22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for sub grade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in
the bid item for base.
TBE Grouo. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
19
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS
This specification is for the preparation and application of all S- Type Marshall Mix Design
asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted.
23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
23.1.1 AGGREGATE
All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections
901 through 919 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS,
EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE
The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous
materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications
(latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality controVassurance
procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing
laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all
materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons
include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to
determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along
with the tests. or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable
specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and
accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such. independent
testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract
documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of
removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the
Contractor.
Pavment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined bv the following:
1. Density per Section 330-11 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of W' or greater shall be
corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness
for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the
Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330-15.2.3 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (2000 edition). In addition, for excesses of W' or greater, the Engineer will
determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\SectionIV .doc
20
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness
specified in the contract.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the
placement of all asphalt.
23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES
All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's
2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR
to the commencement of the paving operation. NO RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT
(RAP) MATERIAL SHALL BE ALLOWED IN THE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIXES.
23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS
All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements:
Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction)
COURSE LAYER THICKNESS (Inches)
THICKNESS
(Inches) Type S-I Type S-I with Type S-III FC-3 Type S-III Type S-I
Type S-III with FC-3 with FC-3
Top Layer Top Layer Top Layer
1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd
1 1 1
lY2 lY2
2 1~ % * 1 1
2Y2 1~ 1~ lY2 1 lY2 1
3 lY2 lY2 2 1 2 1
* At the Engineer's discretion, 2" ofS-III is acceptable for use on residential streets
Additional Notes:
1. Type S-III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only).
2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of sections 331 and 337
of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement
design detail.
5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S-III per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000
Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed
TBE GroDD. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
21
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000,
and all residential streets.
6. An FC-3 friction course per section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall
be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of
3000 or greater.
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of
operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture,
surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with
Section 330 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION
23.6.1 CRACKS
Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by
the following steps:
1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method.
2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as
appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the
level of the surrounding roadway surface.
3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks
are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking.
4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
23.6.2 POTHOLES
Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps:
1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method.
2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole.
3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted.
4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall
be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each
item.
The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions:
The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements.
The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum
requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel
adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or
THE GrouD. Ine.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\SectionN . doc
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
22
Section IV - Technical Specifications
fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per
manufacturers specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each
riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring
section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original
casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that
the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are
thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to. installation of each
riser.
If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of
pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and
compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is
acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable.
All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final
asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving
operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On
arterial roadways, the rims manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period
between initial adjustment and fmal resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve
boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be
included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure
that they are not paved over, It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all
utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the
scheduled paving.
23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS
1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer or Project Inspector, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item
for asphalt. .
2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the
road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans.
3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely
manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements.
4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. The Broom
Tractor way of sweeping will not be permitted. Prior to paving, all construction areas
shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that
picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water
supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off
of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site.
5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's
discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest
edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost
(including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for
asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the
plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
23
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless
otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336
of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the fmal compacted asphalt shall be y.." above the lip
or face of said curb per City Index 1 0 1.
23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in
Sections A through H above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic
concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition).
2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to
Sections 901 and 902 ofFDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition).
3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PO 67-22 unless otherwise
specified in the Scope of Work.
4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition).
5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition).
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and
accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used.
23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and
measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack
and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching,
filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and
incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and
specifications.
24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT
When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in
accordance with the following provisions:
1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price
Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening.
2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT
shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet
site. The address is: http://wwwll.myflorida.com.Itis under the section "Doing Business
TBE GroDD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
24
Section IV - Technical Specifications
with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index". For
additional information, call FDOT @ 850-414-4000.
3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be
used for the initial determination of the asphalt price.
4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt
will be used for payment calculation.
5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period
for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index.
6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat.
7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made
for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time.
8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt.
25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS
25.1 IRRIGATION
25.1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic
underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials,
equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the
underground sprinlder irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or
specified. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay
item.
B. The irrigation plans are schematic ill nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the
turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be
sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of
the Engineer.
25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation
subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope,
mainline, system pressure, controls, etc.
B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all
applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work
shall apply.
C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with
the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject
material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall
be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the
Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of
three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information:
1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour
emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and
address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where
replacement equipment can be purchased.
2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract.
3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment.
4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and
"hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the
Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered.
a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Dtip Emitter equipment operation and
maintenance.
b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and
maintenance.
25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground
improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting
requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of
main lines.
B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials.
C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until
final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen,
or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the
contractor.
D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to
the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to
comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the
public.
25.1.1.3 WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory
service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City
of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or
faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
26
Section IV - Technical Specifications
25.1.2 PRODUCTS
25.1.2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations
from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted.
25.1.2.2 PIPING
A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and
tested in accordance with these specifications.
B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40,
conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785.
C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the
mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80.
25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS
A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or
trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval.
The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with
threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples.
25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER
A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as
recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end.
B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings haS been cut and cleaned. The
Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe.
25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant.
25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES
25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 21N. AND SMALLER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve
2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals
3. Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors
4. Non-Shock Safe- T-Shear Stem
5. Safe- T-Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing
Company, Sylmer, California, or approved equal.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionlV.doc
27
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2%" IN. AND LARGER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. AWWA-C-509
2. 200 lb. O.W.G
.3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B
4. Deep socket joints
5. Rising stem
6. Bolted bonnet
7. Double disc
8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle
B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5'
long with a 2" square operating nut.
25.1.2.7 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater)
25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-the
diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a
pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (pSI). The valve pressure rating
shall not be less than 150 psi.
B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic,
stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece
diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice.
C. The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip
inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections.
D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable
from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation.
E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California, or approved equal.
F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings.
25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES
A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36
concrete value box with #36- T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal.
B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10") circular valve box with #181015
cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6") economy turf box with # 182002
cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
TBE Grouo. IDe.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\SectionN .doc
Section IV -Technical Snecifications
July 2007
28
Section IV - Technical Specifications
25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION
25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION
A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density linear
polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning,
integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be
brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside
diameter (J.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded
to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers
shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self-
flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper.
25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION
A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet
pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (pSI), at a constant flow and
with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating
pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9
gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure
compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The
drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be
available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified.
Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum
system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius
shall be 7".
B. For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be
installed 3' -5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction.
25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES
. A. The sub-surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each
independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning
of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect
directly to the dripline.
25.1.2.10.4 AIRNACUUM RELIEF VALVE
A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an AirNacuum Relief Valve at its high
point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi.
25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds
per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating
accuracy shall be within =/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high-
impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed
stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the
water passage.
TBE GrauD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
29
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
25.1.2.1 0.6 FILTERS
A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial
size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be
constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance.
25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS
A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings
and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the
integrity of the subsurface irrigation system.
25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER
A. The irrigation controller ( control module) shall be programmable by a separate
transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from
the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type
which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function
normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall
function if submerged in water.
B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to
insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for
screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box.
C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless
of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either
sequentially or independently.
D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station
run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a
seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed
on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to
the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of
manual single station or manual program operation.
E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California USA.
25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER
A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field
Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an
infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS
plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall
operate on one 9V alkaline battery.
B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad.
A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after
one minute when not in use.
C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK
Control Modules.
TBE Grouo. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
30
Section N - Technical Specifications
D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID
A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing
installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, ofEFB series
valve.
B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
25.1.3 EXECUTION
25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general
details of the work.
B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced.
C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary
shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed,
except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor
in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given
to the Contractor.
D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by
outside authorities.
E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically
mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions.
F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific
interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or
clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the
decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall
be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost.
G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of
sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other
underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract
Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the
manner by which it relates to the installation.
H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that
obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or
specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be
brought to the attention of the Engineer.
I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving
prior to roadway base.
TBE GrauD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
31
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL
A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches.
Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on
Drawings.
B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all
lines of other trades.
C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind.
D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45
degrees to 90 degrees.
E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities.
25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING
A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe.
B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter
larger than ~ in.
C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 ofFDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition.
D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil.
E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs.
F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per
AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed
95% of maximum density.
G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand
tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more
than six (6") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall
have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to
prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities.
25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING:
A. Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on
Drawings.
B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines.
1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations.
2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated.
C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure
supply line.
D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between
site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original
Drawings, and without additional cost.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaspecs\SectionIV .doc
32
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of
approved layout.
25.1.3.3 INSTAllATION
25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY
A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the
Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost
to the Owner.
25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES
A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install
lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings.
B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own
outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly.
C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical
Special Provisions.
D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the
male threads only.
25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER)
A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway,
utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies.
25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE
A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent.
1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling.
2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water
pressure is on.
3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for
solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent
manufacturer.
c. Curing
1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24
hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure.
D. Flushing the system:
1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control
valves and flush out the system with a full head of water.
E. Installing piping under existing pavement:
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
33
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
IiI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
,I
I
I
I
I
'.~
,.
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring.
2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing
pavement.. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be
accomplished at no additional cost.
25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS
A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans.
1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior
to installation.
25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the
top of the valve to finish grade.
B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other
equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer
than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways.
C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for
each sprinkler zone.
25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES
A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper
maintenance.
B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill.
25.2 LANDSCAPE
25.2.1 GENERAL
25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal,
Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and
Special Conditions when required.
25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory
agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and
environmental matters.
B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the
contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having
jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the
Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
34
Section IV - Technical Specifications
25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to
the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and
incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans,
Schedules, Notes and as specified herein.
B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to
prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish
grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish,
plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to
execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans.
C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to
prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will
appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the
landscape drawings.
D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document.
25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who
shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors
under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work,
shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their
commencement of work on the project.
B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices.
C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the
Contractor's convenie.n.ce; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predom.iruite over the
Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate
and be considered the controlling document.
D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among
persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety
and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape
Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting
from compliance or non-compliance with these standards.
E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is
built into or affects the work in this Section.
F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to
excavation. Call "One Call" at 1-800-432-4770.
G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the
work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in
conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
35
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
:1
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance
period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established
by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year.
B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all
specified work.
25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS
A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor
must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of
bidding.
B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of
the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void.
C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any
substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without
approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk.
D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions
and warranties stated herein.
25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS
o.A. or HI'.:
The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of
the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
c.T.:
Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with
no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or
similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds.
c.w:
Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf
sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms
or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the
fronds.
SPR.:
Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not
including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
ST. TR.:
Straight trunk.
MIN.:
Minimum.
GAL.:
Gallon container size, Le., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
36
Section IV - Technical Specifications
a.c.:
On center, distance between plant centers.
DIA.:
Diameter.
LVS.:
Leaves.
D.B.H:
Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above
grade.
CAL. :
Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade,
larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade.
B&B:
Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American
Association of Nurserymen.
PPP:
Plants per pot.
FG:
Field grown.
STD.:
Standard, single, straight trunk.
Owner:
To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work
is performed.
Owner 3' Representative:
Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of qwintity and quality of
materials specified and execution of installation.
Contractor:
Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor.
Landscape Architect:
This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the
landscape Plans and Specifications.
25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS
A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune
prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark,
break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If
plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
37
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
,I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
a
Section N - Technical Specifications
B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected
from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have
been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be
pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time.
C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with fIrm, natural, balls of soil, not less than
1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less
than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall
have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch.
D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root
pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the fIeld and planting at
the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except
plastic shrink wrap for transport only.
E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches
of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a
minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling.
Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be
removed from trunk unless otherwise specifIed. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of
delivery.
F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant
immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs
in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots
moist.
G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof
tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after
stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing
in a shaded area
25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS
25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS.
A. The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions
under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project
Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of
conditions and full responsibility for the completed work.
B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become
available, working within the seasona1limitations for each kind of landscape work and
following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape
Architect for adjustments to the Schedule.
C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting
procedures.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
38
Section IV - Technical Specifications
D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage
conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing
prior to planting.
E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns,
protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations.
25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon
award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy
to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The
Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule.
B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order
to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the
progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to
the Owner.
C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written
request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend
delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the
Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any
additional costs which may result from work stoppage.
25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities.
Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities.
Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties
concerned.
25.2.2 PRODUCTS
25.2.2.1 MATERIALS
25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE
A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material
Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of
Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint
Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names
accepted in the nursery trade.
25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in
the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the
species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, . plant
diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in
leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
39
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Wi
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant
materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided
tree species that have a single main trunk (centra1leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees
that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable.
C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida # I or better as to shape and quality
for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II,
Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition).
D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at
the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with
requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area.
E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by
governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that
are applicable to landscape materials.
F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit
Landscape Architect proof of it being non-available. In such event, if the Landscape
Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source.
When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by
adjustment to Contract amount.
G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall
be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This
measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be
taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to
measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger
than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with
no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery.
H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where
symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible.
I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter
and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the
plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen.
Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B
procedures.
J. Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa
provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect
approves the substitution.
K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but
not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root . bound
condition exists.
25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED
A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of
even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed
before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionN .doc
40
Section N - Technical Soecifications
July 2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
hDurS befDre laying and it must be grDwn in sDil cDmpatible to. that in which it will be
installed. SDd must be kept mDist priDr to. and after installatiDn.
B. Seed shall be delivered to. the site in unDpened bags with certificatiDn tags in place.
Purity, germinatiDn and weed cDntent shall be as certificatiDn requirements.
25.2.2.1.4 MULCH
A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade "B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thDrDughly mixed with a
pre-emergence weed killer accDrding to. the label directiDns as specified Dn the plan.
B. Install mulch to. an even depth Df3" befDre cDmpactiDn.
25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER
A. Granular fertilizer shall be unifDrm in cDmpDsitiDn; free flDwing and suitable fDr
applicatiDn with apprDved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unDpened bags
bearing the name, trade name Dr trademark and warranty Df the prDducer; fully
CDnfDrming to' State Df FIDrida fertilizer laws.
B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement Df analysis and shall cDntain the
apprDpriate minimum amDunts Df elements fDr the type Df use specified herein.
C. AgrifDrm 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets Dr apprDved equal, shall be placed in planting pit fDr
all plant materials at time Df installatiDn and priDr to. cDmpletiDn Df pit backfilling.
D. GrDund CDver and annual areas shall receive fertilizatiDn with OsmDcote Time Release
Fertilizer accDrding to' product instructiDns and rate.
E. FDr SDd and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer o.n Bahia and St.
Augustine grass at the rate Df Dne (1) pound DfnitrDgen per Dne thousand (1,000) square
feet. Fertilizer shall be cDmmercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% Df the
nitrDgen being in SIDW Dr cDntrDlled release fDrm. The ratio. Df nitrDgen to' pDtash will be
1: 1 Dr 2: 1 fDr cDmplete fertilizer fDrmulatiDns. PhDSphDrus shall be no. mDre than Y-t the
nitrDgen level. They shall alSo. cDntain magnesium and micronutrients (Le. manganese,
irDn, zinc, CDpper, etc.).
25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS
A. FDr trees, apprDved plastic Dr rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree
trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall nDt be used.
B. Stakes shall be cut frDm 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stDck fDr trees o.ver 2" caliper.
Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stDck fDr trees 2" caliper and under. A
minimum Df 2 stakes per tree Dr an DptiDnal 3 stakes per tree shall be used.
C. FDr single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut frDm 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stDck, with
a minimum Df 3 stakes per palm. Batten cDnsisting Df 5 layers Df burlap and 5 - 2" x 4"
by 16" WDDd cDnnected with two' - %" steel bands shall be used arDund the palm trunk.s
D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if apprDved.
THE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionN .doc
41
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
!I
:1
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
,I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL
A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and
loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test,
prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be
unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to
the Landscape Architect immediately in writing.
B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist
of 1/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over 1".
C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil.
There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 - 6.5 pH) with no excess of
calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps,
roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or
a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily
organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt.
D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of
Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width
of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil.
25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Terra-Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting
soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's
recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans.
25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION
A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" .pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal
members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade. shall be placed
so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree
within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at
breast height DBH at 4 - ~ feet above grade.
25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM
A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for
protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install
as directed by the manufacturer.
25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS
A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of
manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the
site.
25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES
A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's
directions.
TBE Group. IDe.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV -Technical Soecifications
July 2007
42
Section N - Technical Specifications
25.2.3 EXECUTION
25.2.3.1 PREPARATION
25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities,
irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work.
B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation
of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a
relocated position for any materials necessary.
25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS
A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's
specifications.
B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been
achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting
bed.
C. Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round-Up" or
"Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect.
D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals,
the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
R Any l].ecessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades. shall bea~complished by the
Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish
grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will
conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface
drainage without puddling.
F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - ~ inches in any
dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated
material off the site.
25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING
A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of
Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the
full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8
inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface
drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release
fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
43
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS
A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's
Specifications.
B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub-
grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum. depth of 4 inches.
C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth,
even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf
flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing
yard drains.
D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1)
pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be. commercial grade, mixed
granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form.
Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil.
E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and
allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil
condition.
25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION
25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED)
A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated.
Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction.
B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper
drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect.
C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well-
drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 -
6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction.
25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans
by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as
the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent
blockage of signage, etc.
B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material
schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the
normally accepted spacing for each species.
C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of
installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant
sJ.zes.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
44
Section IV - Technical Specifications
D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the
Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as
possible to the intent of the plans.
25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES
A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides
and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball.
B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after
settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground
surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain
conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root
ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade.
C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved
equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting
tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the
middle and the bottom of the root mass.
Application rate:
1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet
3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet
5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet
7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet
Trees 3 tablets each ~"(12 millimeters) caliper
Palms 7- 21 gram tablets
D. Native soil shall be used in.back-filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers.
E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the
base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the
sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all
tie-down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of
the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade
Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in
among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection.
F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of
the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball.
Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly
water-in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade.
G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each
variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to
straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant
a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant.
H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free
Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree
angles in a triangular pattern.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
45
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
l
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved.
25.2.3.2.4 SODDING
A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the
soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut.
B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made
to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen
per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place.
C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface
edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub
areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying
sod.
D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water
shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50
millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the
application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will
prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to
keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade.
E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other
approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and
. insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of
sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall
be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated.
F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean
silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the' entire surface to be
leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas.
G. On slopes steeper than 2: 1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable
wooden pins or by other approved method.
25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING
A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of
Transportation. See plan for type of seed.
25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING
A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound
nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum
of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used.
Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved
plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake
above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade.
B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be
used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5..; 2 inch x 4 inch x
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionN .doc
Section IV -Technical Specifications
July 2007
46
Section N - Technical Specifications
16 inch wood connected with two % inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a
minimwn of 5 feet of stake above grade.
C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months
after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work.
D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plwnb position or are in potentially
hazardous areas.
25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING
A. All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching.
B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied
mulch.
C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before
compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified
on the Plans or General Notes.
D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of
buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a
minimwn 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings.
E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch Wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed
in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched
clearance from the outside edge of ann~s.
25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING
A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape
and form of the plant.
B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches,
and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree.
25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP
A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job,
keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess
soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition.
C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying,
staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications.
25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on,
about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards.
B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionN.doc
47
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
;1
I
I
I
I
I
:1
I
I
-J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
:1
Section IV - Technical Specifications
C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to
landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms
as specified.
25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES
E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials,
property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage.
F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees
to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be
done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the
Contractor who is responsible for the damage.
25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the
beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance.
B. Operations:
1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds,
mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control,
replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections,
replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out
repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural
practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under
the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the
University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service.
2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance
practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy,
vigorous growth of the landscape.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of
water for all planted materials before leaving the site.
25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE
25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's
Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the
installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic
inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor.
25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any
part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set
forth in Plans and Specifications.
TBE Group. IDe.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOOSpecs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
48
Section IV - Technical Specifications
B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape
Architect that the correction has been made.
25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE
A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of
all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in
writing.
B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the
terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty
period.
C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the
Owner.
1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in
performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment
sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such
claim.
2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or
in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species
specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract
price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative.
3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to
request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to
compensate for the value not received from the under-specified plant materials. No
additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that
exceed specifications.
25.2.3.5 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a
period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is
either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no
charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation
during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper
materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same
with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant
shall be given the equal amount of warranty.
26 HOPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING
26.1 INTENT
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12"
sanitary sewers by the inst8.J.lation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold. and
form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic
sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and
functioning installation.
TBE GrouD, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
49
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
,I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding
contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the
fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for
prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the
installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system
has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The
installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system.
The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the
liner system and the installer.
26.3 MATERIALS
Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell
classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to
ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer,
from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material
shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum
property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements:
Material Prooerty ASTM Method Value
HDPE Tensile Strength D638 3,300 psi
Elasticity Modulus E=1l3,000 psi
Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-lb/in
Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi
Expansion Coeff. c=0.009 in/in/deg F
At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in
accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be
homogeneous throughout, uniform. in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or
deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by
the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the appIlcable
requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field
samples to the above requirements.
Liner shall be. marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the
manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded.
Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design
calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading,
water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural
strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications
of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or
approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal
THE Grouo. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
50
Section N - Technical Specifications
system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system
approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving
bids.
26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the
sewer from damage.
All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal
in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to
control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the
City's treatment plants.
26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is
completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color
television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television
system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of
the entire periphery of the pipe.
26.6 LINER INSTAllATION
Liner shall be sized to field measmements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the
full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner
product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods
approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe,
pressme and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately
notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place dming the insertion operation.
Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or
problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of
irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other d~fects in the liner
shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
OSHA requirements for installation procedmes, in particular, confined spaces are to be met.
26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer.
TBE GrauD. IDe.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
51
I
I
I
I
I
;1
I
I
I
\1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be
resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected
unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect
any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local
system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of
door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project.
26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage
backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and
property damage costs and claims.
26.9 PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation,
bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials; operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully
completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center
of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems.
27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS
New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the
pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be
constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the
exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified
for the street paving.
When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replace ment shall be of like material: Payment
shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways.
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted.
27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above,
which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications
and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the
work.
28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS
The State of Florida has imposed strict requirements on Solid Wastes Handlers to decrease the
generation of solid waste products and in particular to increase the amount of recycle products.
In this regard, the City is required to determine the monthly total tonnage of all construction
debris which is recycled in this contract. A recycled material is any material reused in any
manner which diverts its alternative disposal to a publicly assessable landfill or by incineration.
TBE GraDD. IDe.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionN.doc
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
52
Section IV - Technical Specifications
If a material, such as clean earth, is not normally disposed to a landfill or incineration, then it is
not to be considered a recyclable material. The Contractor is required to include in each request
fQr payment the total tonnage of materials which were recycled by the contractor during the
contract period for which the payment request is made. Any cost to the contractor for the
development and submittal of this information is to be included in the contract items provided in
the original contract proposal.
29 CONCRETE CURBS
Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans.
Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a
minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to
exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition,
all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the
Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs.
29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted.
29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for
all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all
materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS
30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans
or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh
reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise
specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete
sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings
where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh
reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be
positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the
welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not
more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted sub grade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8
shall also. apply.
30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS
Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6)
inches in thickness with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal
distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The
welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No
compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
53
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8
shall also apply.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the
placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways.
30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete
sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted.
30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price
shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the
specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where
required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
31 SODDING
Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at
the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FOOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and
excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and
structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform
finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be
graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod
that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in
advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall
continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure,
soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract.
Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor
at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be
determined by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials,
placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these
associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly
placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor,
equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the
basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the
Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass.
32 SEEDING
Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The
seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to
be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic
conformance with the latest edition of FOOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982
and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
54
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye
Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required
that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured.
When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment
(including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in
place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such
work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work.
33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER
STORM STRUCTURES
For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to
235.
When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans
and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the
Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other
causes until acceptance of the work.
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index
Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape
conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a
smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be
made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of
concrete base.
The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of the manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course.
In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a
concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer.
33.2 PRECAST TYPE
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to
secure proper seating and bearing.
Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and
junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets
will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be
in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option.
Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or
outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of
TBE GraDO. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionlV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
55
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be
provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using 0 ring between precast sections will not be
acceptable for storm structures.
33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis.
34 MATERIAL USED
All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all
materials.
35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Whenever a conflict appears between the plans and specifications, the more stringent
requirement shall apply. If a conflict is of such a nature as to require a decision, then a written
request for clarification must be made prior to starting that phase of construction.
36 STREET SIGNS
The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROIDBITED.
All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division
in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest
edition).
The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in
advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal.
37 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREAS
37.1 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREA SHALL BE PREPARED
BY THE CITY
This project will not require the preparation of an audio/video tape of work areas by the
Contractor.
37.2 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF ALL WORK AREAS SHALL BE
PREPARED BY THE CONTRACTOR
37.2.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO TAPE
Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video tape
recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets,
easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve
as a record of a pre-construction conditions.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section N -Technical Specifications
July 2007
S6
Section IV - Technical Specifications
37.2.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO TAPE
The video recordings shall not be made more than 21 days prior to construction in any area.
37.2.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS
The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio
videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial fIrm known to be skilled and regularly
engaged in the business of pre-construction color audio-video tape documentation.
37.2.4 EQUIPMENT
All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the
Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with
accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection.
The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with
proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio
videotape coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles.
Such coverage shall be obtained by walking.
37.2.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO
Each tape shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general
location, Le., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each
videotape shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio
recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in
viewer orientation and in any needed identifIcation, differentiation, clarifIcation, or objective
description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio
recording shall also be free from any conversations.
37.2.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO
All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the
date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time
information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be
displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name,
contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall
appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom
out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during
videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens
focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be
properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation
shall be recorded in SP mode.
37.2.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION
The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end,
overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas
where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer,
highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly
indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
57
Section IV -Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the
ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the
camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture.
37.2.8 LIGHTING
All taping shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during
precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to
properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of
those subjects.
37.2.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL
The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional
to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of
influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping
shall not exceed 44 feet per minute.
37.2.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX
All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number
and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall
describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of
the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video
unit counter numbers, engineering surveyor coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the
date.
37.2.11 AREA OF COVERAGE
Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of
construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be
limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features,
mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc.
within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults,
fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or
right of way at anyone time.
37.2.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES
The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items
provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work.
38 EROSION AND SilTATION CONTROL
38.1 STABiliZATION OF DENUDED AREAS
No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise
authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by
mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent
vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a
THE GrauD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
58
Section IV - Technical Specifications
project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization
measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping.
38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES
Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent
erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required,
depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In
no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days.
38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS
During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by
sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and
modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer
before installation.
38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES
Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative
buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment
onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the
case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration
process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other
disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters,
dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one
week of installation.
38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS
Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive
remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans.
During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided
they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City.
The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during
construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before
installing any permanent subdrainpipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally
cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty
period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of
contain-ing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area
tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular
removal of sediment from the basin.
38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES
Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent
waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and
the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel
work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\OO083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
59
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area
are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after
the in channel work is completed.
Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of
the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream
crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and
removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a
condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity.
38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS
All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of
excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to
issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy.
38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance
with the following standards:
a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at anyone time;
b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast
to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of
any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway.
38.9 MAINTENANCE
All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall
and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required.
38.10 COMPLIANCE
Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more
stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order".
City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 607 are examples of accepted methods that
may be used or required to control erosion and siltation.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
60
Section N -Technical Soecifications
July 2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
City of Clearwater - Erosion Control
This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible
for soil erosion control on their site.
The City of Clearwater Public Works Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount
of soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways.
The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site
creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and
subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms
redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways.
When erosion takes place, a Planning & Development Services Inspector or a Public Works
Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows:
1 st occurrence Warning
2nd occurrence $32 reinspection fee
3rd occurrence $80 reinspection fee
4th occurrence Stop work order
Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Public Works Administration Department
may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly.
The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to
support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on
an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check.
If the contractor would like to meet with a Public Works inspector on any particular site, please
contact Construction at 462-6126 or Planning & Development Services at 562-4741.
Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on
all land development projects.
Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result
in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder.
Contact Public Works Administration with specific questions at 562-4750.
TBE GrouD. IDe.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionN .doc
61
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
- - - - - - - -.. - - - - - - ,- - --
Section N- Technical Specifications
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NOTICE OF
EROSION VIOLATION
UNDER SECTION 3-701" (DIVISION 7 - EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL) OF THE CITY OF CLEARWATER CODE OF
ORDINANCES, THIS SITE HAS BEEN FOUND IN VIOLATION. THIS SITE MUST BE RESTORED TO AN EROSION
CONTROLLED SITE PRIOR TO ANY FURTHER DEVELOPMENT TO CONTINUE.
Warning
$32.00 Reinspection Fee
$80.00 Reinspection Fee
Stop Work Order.
CITY OF CLEARWATER
PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 727 562-4741
&
PUBLIC SERVICES/CONSTRUCTION 727 462-6126
DATE POSTED:
Inspector's Name:
Received by:
(Signature indicates only a copy of this notice has been
received and does not in any way indicate admission of guilt
or concurrence with findings of the inspector.)
Inspector's Signature:
IT IS A VIOLATION TO REMOVE TmS NOTICE
ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON REMOVING TmS SIGN WILL BE PROSECUTED
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionN .doc
Section N -Technical Snecifications
62
July 2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING
The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on
the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb
of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals
cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to
service connection.
Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by
the American Public Works Association as follows:
SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission
Municipal Electric Systems
HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission
Oil Distribution and Transmission
Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines
SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems
Police and Fire Communications
Cable Television
SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines
SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems
Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension
perpendicular to the flow' line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall
be 6" x 3" and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall
be 4" X 2" and be placed on the curb face.
40 AWARD OF CONTRACT. WORK SCHEDULE AND
GUARANTEE
It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the
Engineer gives written notice to proceed, which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 -
General Conditions.
It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within
consecutive calendar days. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the
Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount
stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The
work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes
necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of
Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Assistant Public Services Director, will
require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the
amount of Three Hundred Twenty Dollars ($320.00) per eight-hour day for each Inspector given
such assignment.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
63
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
"I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage
to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final
acceptance.
41 WATER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES
41.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in
connection with the construction of water mains and appurtenances including clearing,
excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up.
41.2 MATERIALS
41.2.1 GENERAL
Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall
be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of
workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modem design and
engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment
and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation,
except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings
and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects
during shipment and construction.
41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS
41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSIIAWWA CI51/A21.5181 or latest revision.
Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table:
Size Class Thickness Rated Water Working Pressure
(In.) (pSI)
4" 51 0.26 350
6" 50 0.25 350
8" 50 0.27 350
12" 50 0.31 350
The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to
centerline of pipe.
Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSII A WWA C 151/ A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with
approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSIIAWWA CI04/A21.4 80 or latest
revision.
TBE Grano. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\SectionIV.doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
64
Section IV - Technical Specifications
41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4" through 8" shall be in accordance withANSIIAWWA C900 81
or latest revision and the American Society. for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and
PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784.
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be
compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings.
Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table:
Size Dimension Ratio Rated Water Working Pressure Laying Length
(ODlThick.) (PSI) (Ft)
4 18 150 20
6 18 150 20
8 18 150 20
Pipe larger than 8" shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of
ductile iron in sizes 4" through 8" when needed due to laying conditions or usage.
The bell of 4" and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross
section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869.
Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling,
storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe
material for potable water service.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with an insulated 12 gauge A.W.o. solid strand copper
wire wound around the pipe forming one complete spiral per joint of pipe. This wire is to be
continuous with splices made only by methods approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be
secured to all valves, tees and elbows.
41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS
Fitting from 4" through 16" in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with
ANSIIAWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in
accordance with requirements of ANSIIAWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall
be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require
requirements of ANSIIAWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands, shall be ductile iron in
accordance with ANSVAWWA Cl11/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSIIAWWA
Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic
(USA) manufacture will be acceptable.
41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT
Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved
mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants
shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on
TBE GroDD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
65
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint
connectors.
41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING
All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining
gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed.
41.2.3 GATE VALVES
Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with
respect to the vertical. Valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall
be handwheel operated. Valves three inches and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with 2
inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for
the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left
(counter clockwise).
Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be
rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock.
The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body.
Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines
shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves.
Smaller than two inch: Gate valves less than two inches in diameter shall be of brass and shall
conform to Federal Specification WW V 54, Type 1 or 11 with screwed joints. Valves for interior
piping shall be Type 11, wedge disc, rising stem, inside screw type.
Valves for buried service shall be Type 1, wedge disc, nonrising stem.
Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16 inch diameter, inclusive, shall be
resilient seated gate valves in conformance with ANSI! A. W. W.A. Standard Specification C509
80 or latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-80,
full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal
parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistent
bronze nonrising stem with 0 ring bonnet seal and internal cast iron parts coated with corrosion
resistent coating.
Larger than sixteen inch: Gate valves larger than 16" shall be suitable for the service intended
and shall be iron body, bronze mounted, double disc type with 0 ring seals. All valves shall be
equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks
and scrapers and valved by pass.
41.2.4 VALVE BOXES
Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast
iron. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The
valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the
bid price for valyes.
TBE Group. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
66
Section IV - Technical Specifications
41.2.5 HYDRANTS
Fire hydrants used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater water system shall be
the following hydrants:
· Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant,
· Mueller Centurion Fire Hydrant Catalog Number A 423
. U.S. Pipe Metropolitan
No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater.
Above fire hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C
502 and include the following modifications:
1. Basic design will be the dry barrel type which prevents the operating threads from
coming in contact with the service water. It will be of the compression type, opening
against the pressure and closing with the pressure.
2. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and
bottom with an "0" ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil.
3. Hydrant barrel will be of the "Breakable Type" made in two sections with the flange or
break feature located approximately 2" above the ground line.
4. Main valve opening of the hydrant will be not less than 5 1/4".
5. Hydrant nozzles will consist of two 2 1/2" hose nozzles and one 4 1/2" pump nozzle.
Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread
Specifications.
6. The hydrant will be so designed to permit the removal of all working parts from the
hydrant up through the barrel without disturbing the earth around the hydrant or
disassembling the barrel.
7. Main valve seat will be made of bronze and threaded into a bronze retaining ring. Or it
may be threaded into a heavy bronze bushing in the hydrant base.
8. Hydrant will be designed with an anti friction bearing so located that it will reduce the
torque required to operate the hydrant.
9. There will be a minimum of two bronze or brass drain outlets.
10. Hydrants shall be painted with one coat of primer and one coat of yellow paint at the
factory and one finish coat of yellow paint after installation. All paints shall comply with
AWWA Standard C502-85 or its latest revision.
11. The main valve stem will be made in two sections with a breakable coupling.
12. Hydrants shall be left open (counter clockwise) and shall have a National Standard 11/2"
pentagon operating nut.
13. Hydrant base outlet will be 6" and will be mechanical joint with fittings.
All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
67
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from
the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent
movement of the hydrant.
All fire hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant
may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system.
41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES
Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4" P.V.C. water main. The largest service
connection allowable on 4" main shall be 1 1/2". Service saddles shall be used on all 2" service
connections to 6" and larger mains. Service saddles shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy
or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps.
41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS
1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA
Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the
tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials.
2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery;
and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or
unsatisfactory material shall be used.
3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects
shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site.
4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in
handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The
Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
Backtlow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery
(service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 78 or its
latest revision.
Two (2) different types of backtlow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when
required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from
possible backtlow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed
are:
1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting,
approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the
assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve.
2. Reduced pressure principle backtlow prevention device a device containing a minimum
of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically
operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit
must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each
device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks.
TBE GraDD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionN .doc
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
68
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Since installed devices must be tested annually and may be maintained by the City of Clearwater,
following are the approved models of devices allowed for installation by customers of the City of
Clearwater Water Distributi"on system:
DOUBLE CHECK VALVE
2" and Smaller Lar2er than 2"
Conbraco 40 I 00 Conbraco 40100
Hersev Beeco Model FDC Hersev Beeco No.2
Watts Model 709 or 007 Watts Model 709 or 007
FEBCO Model 805Y
Ames 2000 SS
REDUCED PRESSURE TYPE
2" and Smaller Lar2er than 2"
Ames 5000 SS
Conbraco 40200 Conbraco 40200
Hersev Beeco Model FRP II Hersev Beeco Model6CM
FEBCO Model 825Y
Watts Model 909 or 009 Watts Model 909 or 009
41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES
Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412; Clow Corporation 3460; or
equal. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body,
stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4" bronze test plug.
41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS
Blow offs shall be box hydrants having a 2" main valve, closing with the water pressure. These
flush mounted hydrants shall have a 2" FIP inlet, with the outlet being a 2 1/2" bronze male
nozzle. With all working parts also of bronze, these hydrants will open to the left and have a
removable bronze seat, which seals against a seat rubber of no less durometer than 85. All
hydrants shall be as manufactured by Kupferle Foundry, S1. Louis, Mo., Model #35B or
approved equal.
41.3 CONSTRUCTION
MATERIAL HANDLING
41.3.1
1.
Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting
with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall
such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not.be skidded rolled against
pipe already on the ground.
2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any
part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his
expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite
or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench.
TBE Group. Inc.
] :\OO083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
69
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
41.3.2 PIPE LAYING
41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE
The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and
hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems
plumb.
The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30" and a maximum of 42" below
finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions.
Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work
and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have
the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with
the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions.
41.3.2.2 INSTAllATION
Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used
by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves
and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick,
ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials
and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or
dumped in the trench.
If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage
shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective
repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended
above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined
with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe
or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs
or rejection.
All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each
pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped
clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is
being placed in the line. If the pipelaying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place
without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the
trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there
until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools,
clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the
pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with
approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to
prevent dirt from entering the joint space.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
70
Section IV - Technical Specifications
At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a
watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer.
The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and
workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth
end at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the
Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at
bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade.
Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal
plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the
amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of
ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions.
No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable.
41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS
41.3.3.1 GENERAL
Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified
above for installation of pipe.
41.3.3.2 VALVES
Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended
unless shown otherwise on the plans.
The valve box shall not transmit shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb
over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished
pavement or such other level as may be directed. ..,
41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS
Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and
minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians.
All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the
curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with
nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer.
Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6 inch ductile iron branch controlled by an
independent 6 inch gate valve.
41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE
Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by
attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers
recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining
mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use
of hydrant connecting swivel joints.
THE Grouo. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
71
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown
on the plans or specified in the field by the Engineer.
41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES
Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this
contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made
until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met
and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer.
Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be
made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the
actual conditions. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision
of the City of Clearwater Water Division.
41.4 TESTS
41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS
After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service
taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds
per square inch for a period of one hour.
The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner
satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together
with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense.
The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water
for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line.
41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST
The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater Water Division 48 hours advance notice of the
time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing.
41.5 STERiliZATION
Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new
construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized.
41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT
The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to
Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or
"Perchloron" .
41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM
Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing
shall continue until a clean, clear water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not
available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the closest point available to the
ends of the lines.
TBE GraDO. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
72
Section IV - Technical Specifications
41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE
All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a
minimwn chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then
remain in the distribution system for a minimwn contact period of eight hours before it is flushed
out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the
contact period.
41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS
After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free
residual chlorine tests not less than 0..2 ppm nor more than 3.0. ppm. Residual chlorine test shall
be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set.
41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS
After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of
Clearwater Water Division personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the
distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to the
Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination. If tests of such samples indicate the
presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined abov~ shall be repeated until tests
indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before
the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the
sterilization as outlined above.
If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in
accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall
have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of
samples shall be secured from the Florida State Board of Health prior to sterilization and shall be
followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure final approval of the bacterial
samples from the Florida State Board of Health before the water distribution system is put into'
operation.
41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
41.6.1 GENERAL
1. Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid
Form.
2. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lwnp
swn payment. for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute
full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work.
3. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall
be included in the applicable pay items of work:
a) Clearing and grubbing
b) Excavation, including necessary pavement removal
c) Shoring and/or dewatering
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
73
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
d) Structural fill
e) Backfill
t) Grading
g) Tracer wire
h) Refill materials
i) Joints materials
j) Tests and sterilization
k) Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system.
41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS
41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type
satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line,
including the length of valves and fittings.
41.6.2.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation.
41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS
41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron
fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped
on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more
than the tolerances permitted in ANSIJAWWA CII0/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case,
the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance.
41.6.3.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings.
41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES
AND COVERS
41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished
and installed.
TBE Group. IDe.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionN .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
74
Section N - Technical Specifications
41.6.4.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all
plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover.
41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS
41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and
installed.
41.6.5.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust
anchorage, 6 inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the
hydrant lead.
42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
This article not applicable.
43 TENNIS COURTS
43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS
43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS
All soil und~r courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per
1,000 squareJoot.
Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned
into the Engineer's Office.
43.1.2 BASE COURSE
Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the
same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical
Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required.
Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to
applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer.
43.1.3 PRIME COAT
The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250 and shall
conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction".
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
75
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE
A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S- III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in
Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification Oatest edition). The Leveling Course shall be
constructed running East and West.
Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot
straight edge. If a deficiency of more than W' exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface
should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE
Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section
331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed
running North and South.
Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 1 0 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface
shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as
approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will
be approved. If a deficiency of more than W' exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface
should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
43.1.6 COLOR COAT
43.1.6.1 MATERIALS
Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured
specifically for Tennis Court Application.
All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for
approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for
approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and
date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material.
43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION
43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials.
Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor
depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the
Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations for use.
After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a
deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled
or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications
of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the
Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not
TBE Grouo. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
76
Section IV - Technical Specifications
require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and
rough or isponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix.
No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured.
43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE
The fInish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required.
Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play.
The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for
all other others.
The fInished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks.
43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES
Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines
shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint.
43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be
conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50
Degree's F and rising.
NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of
all base and asphalt related work.
43.2 Cl-AYTENNIS COURTS
43.2.1 GENERAL
43.2.1.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of
clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifIcations and lor the construction drawings. The
scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with
sub-surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal.
43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the
Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and
data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if
the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such
Bidder is properly qualifIed to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work
contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the
Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub-surface irrigation clay tennis court
installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionlV .doc
77
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
The Owner desires to award this contract to fIrms that have been in business for a minimum of
five (5) years. The qualifIcations and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a
determining factor in the award of the Bid.
43.2.1.3 STANDARDS
The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to
standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn)
Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The
Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment.
43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES
The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will
waive all permit fees.
43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT
The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The
Contractor shall locate the four comers of each battery and shall layout the courts in
conformance with the specifIcations and drawings.
43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an
area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within
fIfty (50) feet of the site shall be provided.
43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE
The Owner desires to award the contract to fIrms who will complete this project in a reasonable
time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to fIrms who may commence and
complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner,. in its
sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the ''Notice to
Proceed. "
43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION
43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY
The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts.
43.2.2.2
DEMOLITION
The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence
surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction
area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The
existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the
proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub-grade material beneath the existing
tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub-grade
material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionlV.doc
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
78
Section IV - Technical Specifications
COurtS shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide
documentation of any recycled materials.
43.2.2.3 SUB-GRADE
The sub-grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub-grade
elevation. The sub-grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of
the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The Contractor
shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner.
43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE
The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded
to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage
away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a
density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is
required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner.
43.2.3 SLOPE
43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS
Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in
one plane, as indicated on the drawings.
43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION
43.2.4.1 LINER
Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a
minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are.resistant to
deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows:
a Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade.
43.2.4.2
BASE COURSE
The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality
Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it
shall be within one-quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade.
43.2.4.3
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
Perforated. pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on
four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be
two and one-quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the
pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five
(5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control
wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface irrigation system.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
79
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING
43.2.5.1 CURB
Brick cmb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of
one-quarter (1/4) to one-half(1/2) inch above the finished screening comse elevation.
43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE
43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE
A smface comse of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be
installed over the screening comse to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The AqualHydroblend
material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by
rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished smface shall not vary
from specified grade by more than one-eighth (1/8) inch.
43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER
Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the
outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating
buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub-smface base comse of the clay tennis
courts.
43.2.8 FENCING
43.2.8.1 DESIGN
The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and
described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design
Ameristar HT-25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published
specification.
43.2.8.2 POSTS
All posts shall be a minimum 2-1/2" Ameristar HT-25 pipe; top rails 1-5/8" Ameristar HT-25
pipe with manufactmers standard "Permacoat" color system.
43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC
Fence Fabric shall be 1-3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactmes standard galvanized wire
with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages.
43.2.8.4 GATES
Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically
engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for
double gates consisting of a mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and
designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger-bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes
as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock.
Provide latch, fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with
padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges - Size and material to suit gate size,
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
80
Section IV - Technical Specifications
non-lift-off type, and offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide one and one-half (1-1/2)
pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height.
43.2.9 WINDSCREENS
The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing.
Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman; Black high-
density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12)
inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties.
43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT
43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS
Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in
width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance
between posts of forty-two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles
court.
43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES
Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven-
eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel fInish and shall be equipped with a
reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support
the net a height of forty-two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be
Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation.
43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR
A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA.
43.2.10.4 NET
A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall
have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the
exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic
material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel
cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length
between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic
material at each comer. Basis of Design - Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc.
43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP
Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide
buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to
the center strap anchor.
43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES
Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be fIrmly
secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 - 1/2) inches.
Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA.
TBE GrOUD. Ine.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
81
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT.
Deliver the following equipment to the owner:
1. Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-I Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse
transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine.
2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4-1/2" synthetic bristles;
Proline.
3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline.
4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle
brush; with fence hook cast aluminum.
5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline.
6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction" Scrusher" exact installation
location by Owner.
7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels.
8. Court Rake (1 each) - six-foot length aluminum.
43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE
Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana
Bench 8" - 8'long x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation.
Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture.
43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable)
The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) f~et of the courts with 50 pounds per
square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30
gallons of water per minute for each court. . .
43.2.13 CONCRETE
Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33,
and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., I-inch maximum size
aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump.
43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING
43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional
electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis court sport
lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all
necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating
system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the
maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play.
Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionN .doc
Section IV -Technical SDecifications
July 2007
82
Section IV - Technical Specifications
43.2.14.2 RE-LAMP
The Contractor shall re-lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the
light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps.
43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT
The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development
Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works.
43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES
The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures.
The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any
other miscellaneous hems required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by
the Contractor.
Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight-(8) tennis
courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite
#104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A.
Stewart~
Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information:
Pole T1 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5
Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole T5
Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5
Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole T5 new pole w/existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2
circuits
Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5
Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5
Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5
Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles.
Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall
plan relocation light poles accordingly.
43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS
Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the
Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits.
New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include
the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
83
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
43.2.15 WATER COOLER
43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area
of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation
Department for approval.
43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN
Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series - water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal.
43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION
Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment.
43.2.17 WARRANTY
43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all
equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project.
43.2.17.2 WARRANTY
The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against
defective materials and lor workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of
completion.
43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts fora period of
two years from the day of completion.
44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC
CONTROL
The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone
traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization,
hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be
necessary at outlying points.
44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to. accomplish the level of
performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction
permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the
Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for
Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident
Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the
TBE GrOUD. IDe.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionlV .doc
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
84
Section IV - Technical Specifications
u.s. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of
Transportation, or most recent addition.
44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY
The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians,
bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective
may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives:
. Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones.
. Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he
proceeds through or around the work zone.
. Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle.
. Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material.
. Promote speedy completion ofprojects (including thorough cleanup of the site).
. Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices.
. Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or
maintenance work zones.
The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600
"When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone,
accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only
approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control
zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall
be provided by appropriate signs".
2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction
102-5 Traffic Control: 102-5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum
standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans .--.,.,
44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES
Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local
Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of
requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting
business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but
local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the
designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer.
44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS
Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways.
Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards.
44.3.1.1
PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected
by the construction process.
TBE Group, Ine.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
85
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS
Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options.
Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary.
44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Message Board Display, Minimum of 7 -day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer
for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor.
44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS
44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
C- View Release
44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS
44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
News Release
The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days.
44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a
specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the
Office of the Traffic Engineer, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue,
telephone 562-4772, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic
control plan.
44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION
The Office of the Traffic Engineer may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic
control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may
make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The
Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector.
44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the
construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in
the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone
Traffic Control in the proposal form.
44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
SUPERVISOR
The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on
the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control
Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic
TBE Grouo. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionN .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
86
Section N - Technici1l Specifications
Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of
Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or
sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the
Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review
the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The
Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain
traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure
that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24-hour period.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification
of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control
or to provide alternate traffic arrangements.
Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may .
be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a
designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in
temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities
deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety.
45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING
45.1 INTENT
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer
and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin
impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand
exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a
complete, fully restored and functioning installation. _ _ '._.
45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding
contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the
liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval
for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed
liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and
successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified
by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and
complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the
installer.
45.3 MATERIALS
The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type
and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following
properties:
Tensile Strength
Flexural Strength
ASTM D638
ASTM D790
3,000 psi
4,500 psi
TBE Group. Inc.
I :\OO083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
87
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Flexural Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D790 300,000 psi
Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D2290 150,000 psi
Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved
by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested,
complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20
traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no
structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures
specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box
181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach
Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be
approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor
prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later
than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids.
45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the
sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's
responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The
Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid
heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants.
45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is
completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color
television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television
system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of
the entire periphery of the pipe.
45.6 liNER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on
the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by
the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of
laterals.
The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place
during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass
pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes
shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots,
excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be
removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
TBE Grouo. Inc.
J :\00083\OOO83021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
88
Section IV - Technical Specifications
45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to
manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered
during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City.
The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a
later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be
available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information
regarding the construction project.
45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage
backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and
property damage costs and claims.
45.9 PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation,
bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to
provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of
manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for
storm systems.
46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING
46.1 MATERIALS
46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight,
high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc.,
Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or
approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D
3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall
be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene cOlnpound having a cell classification equal to
or exceeding the compound used in the pipe.
To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall
be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied.
46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL
The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus
maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\OO083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
89
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from
the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks,
holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density,
melt index, and other physical properties.
The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in
plant blending is not acceptable.
The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the
pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from
manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineerthat do not meet appropriate ASTM
standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the
testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at
selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM
D 3350, 10.1.9.
46.1.3 SAMPLES
The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical
properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and
have them tested by an independent laboratory.
46.1.4 REJECTION
Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this
specification.
46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS
Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless
otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as
specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work.
46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES
46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE
Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If
the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that
it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment.
46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS
Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should
be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt
fusion joining method.
46.3.3 PIPE JOINING
Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above
ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the
TBE Grouo. Inc.
J :\00083\OO083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionN .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
90
Section N - Technical Specifications
manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's
recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of
meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to,
temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures.
46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE
Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. . When lifting fused
sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred.
Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid
cutting or gouging the pipe.
46.4 SLlPLINING PROCEDURE
46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS
The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes:
I2-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into IS-inch existing sewer.
I6-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into I8-inch existing sewer.
I8-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 2 I-inch existing sewer.
21 ~-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24-inch existing sewer.
28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 3D-inch existing sewer.
34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36-inch existing sewer.
42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48-inch existing sewer.
46.4.2 CkEA~INGAND INSPECTION
The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or
insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a
bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will
be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to
inserting the liner.
46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS
All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by
the specifying engineer or his representative.
Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall
be determined by the engineer.
An entry slope grade of 2 1/2: 1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the
polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of
the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times
the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible.
The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and
the water table.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
91
Section IV -Technical Specifications
. July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER
After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and
removed for the full length of the access shaft.
A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be
connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer.
Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to
the project requirements.
Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion.
Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours
shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow
the liner pipe to stress relieve itself.
The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it
terminates.
After the l2-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner
shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from
forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric
properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer.
The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs
or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement.
The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of
access to the area, and the working space available.
46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES
The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and
installation of the liner.
46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED
After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe
connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe.
Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A
neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water
seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel
bands.
46.4.7 BACKFilliNG
All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost
for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid
for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose,
it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to
determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide
TBE GraDD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
92
Section IV - Technical Specifications
adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage
areas will be arranged for by the contractor.
46.4.8 POINT REPAIR
The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has
been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be
made for each repair.
The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top
of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing
pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner.
46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS
All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor.
Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right-of-ways, the surface shall be
graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in
street right-of-ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer.
47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE
47.1 SCOPE
This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm
water.
47.2 MATERIALS
All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification' for "Poly
(Vmyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter".
The pipe and fittings shall be made ofPVC plastic.
47.3 PIPE
The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be
factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification.
Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not
more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths.
47.4 JOINING SYSTEM
Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to
manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt
tight joint.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\OOO83\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
93
Section IV -Technical Specifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
47.5 FITTINGS
All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or
approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe.
48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT
Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the
ratio of 1.5 (one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1 (one) cubic foot
(7.50 gal.) of water. lbis mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide
penetration in the operator's judgment.
Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society
for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C 150 for Portland
Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot.
Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali,
vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per
gallon.
Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing
adequate pressure to penetrate the area
All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer.
48.2 REHABiliTATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH
GUNITE
Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and
Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit,
Michigan, except as modified by those specifications.
Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent,
set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications.
The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified
strength.
48.3 COMPOSITION
Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to
produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application.
48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS
Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete
which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall
have a minimum 28-day strength of 4,000 psi.
TBE GroDo. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\SectionN .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
94
Section N - Technical Specifications
48.5 MATERIALS
Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the
American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C150
for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds
per cubic foot.
Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong,
durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing
Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates.
Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture.
Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fme to coarse and shall be within the following
limits:
Passing No. 3/8 Sieve
Passing No.4 Sieve
Passing No.8 Sieve
Passing No. 16 Sieve
Passing No. 30 Sieve
Passing No. 50 Sieve
Passing No. 100 Sieve
100%
95% to 100%
80% to 100%
50% to 85%
25% to60%
10% to 30%
2% to 10%
48.6 WATER
Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil,
acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing
. 8.33 pounds per gallon.
48.7 REINFORCEMENT
Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming
to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for
Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn
steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial
Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7.
48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It
shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each
shipment.
Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the
inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionlV.doc
95
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION
Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and
inlets, shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all
cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45
degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive
pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets
to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping
shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement
gun shall not be less than 50 psi.
Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to
remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by a air/water blast to remove
all particles from the cleaning operation.
To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water
prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running
water exists.
48.10 PROPORTIONING
Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a
ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior
experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be
required.
If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of
all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring
materials shall be subject to approval.
48.11 MIXING
Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all
large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to
become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer
should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes
and from the drum at regular intervals.
Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of
water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as
required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of
cement, including the water contained in the aggregate.
Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without
being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused.
48.12 APPLICATION
Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be
placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below
32 degrees, Fahrenheit.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionN .doc
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
96
Section N - Technical Specifications
Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed.
Comers shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the
surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in
confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or
wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty
conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses.
Gunitingshwlbesuspendedif
1. Air velocity separates. the cement from the sand at the nozzle.
2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected.
Gunite shwl be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the
area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless other wise specified. All
cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to originw lines by use of
gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh
shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shwl wire mesh be placed behind
existing reinforcement.
The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be
sufficient to allow initial but not fmal set to develop. At the time the initiw set is developing, the
surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond
with succeeding applications.
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Construction joints or day's work joints shwl be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge,
preferably at a 45-degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and
adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air
jet.
48.14 SURFACE FINISH
Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed comers by working up to
ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal.
After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove
high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shwl be properly filled with concrete to insure a true,
flat surface.
After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shwl be given a flashcoat fmish
except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings.
48.15 CURING
Curing shwl be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7. 1 (d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77
depending upon atmospheric condition.
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION
During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which
may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be
TBE Group. Ine.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
97
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
,
1\
I
I
i
I
I
I
1\
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scrapmg,
brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit.
48.17 INSPECTION
Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual
inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and
replaced with sound material.
48.18 EQUIPMENT
Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber
type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize
the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized
mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of
sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the
delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall
have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall
by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled
by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The. interior of
drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour
shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts.
Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle.
The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150
feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air
pressure measured at the cement gun is mcreased to maintai.tiproper velocity. The following
table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of
material hose:
Compo Cap Max. Hose Dia. Max. Size Nozzle Min. Air Press.
( efm.) (In.) (In.) (psi)
365 1 5/8 1 5/8 60
600 2 2 80
750 21/2 21/2 90
For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be
increased by 5 psi.
Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient
capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the
longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made
for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses.
Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer
capable of producing the required material velocities.
TBE Group. Inc.
1 :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionlV .doc
Section N -Technical Soecifications
July 2007
98
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the
operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line
water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line.
The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating).
49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION
49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT
It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of
manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to
these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations for work. Purpose. of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion
protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular
system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All
OSHA regulations shall be met.
49.2 PAYMENT
Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the
installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate
payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the
pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation,
including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and
compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions
and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or
shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as
required for a complete and operable system.
49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS
49.3.1 MATERIALS
49.3.1.1 LINERS
Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound
vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise
stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The
contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is
solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory
certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D
3753.
49.3.1.2 MORTAR
Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts
clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No.8 sieve.
TBE Group, Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
99
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
I
I
I
'I
I
,
II
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
(I
I
I
1\
I
I
I
I'
il
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
49.3.1.3 GROUTING
Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cuHic yard of
clean, well graded sand.
49.3.2 INSTAllATION AND EXECUTION
Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the
removal of the manhole ring and corbel section.
Remove the frame and cover and corbel secti<?n without damaging the existing manhole walls.
Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole.
Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the
manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner.
If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar.
Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing
inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts.
Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout.
Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the
outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically
as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular
void to insure an adequate bottom seal.
Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the
existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to
seal the area around the manhole liner and piping.
Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with
grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure.
Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed.
Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage.
Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing
sod.
Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness
and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type II
surface.
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM
This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious
liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong
Seal MS 2 product.
Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The
applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory
training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying
the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural
cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
100
Section IV - Technical Specifications
application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and with the following specifications which includes:
1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application.
2. The removal of any loose and unsound material.
3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2
coat application.
49.4.1 MATERIALS
49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX
Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations
and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-I09) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi
2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi
3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi
4. Cement Sulfate resistant
5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pef
49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL
Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's
recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-I09) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs.
2. Bond (ASTM C-952)- 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs.
49.6 GROUTING MIX
Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according
to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum
28 day compressive strength of250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi.
49.7 LINER MIX
Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole
surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi
2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi
3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi
4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H.
5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi
6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
101
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I:
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight
shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot.
Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to
5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a
lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight.
Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according
to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide
conditions.
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site.
Bag weight shall be 50-51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per
cubic foot.
Cement content must be 65%-75% of total weight of bag.
One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108
pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume.
Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater
than 5/8" in height.
Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for
any heavy metal.
Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process.
A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough
troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray
applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively
smooth finish.
49.8 WATER
Shall be clean and potable.
49.9 OTHER MATERIALS
No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or
recommendation from the manufacturer.
49.10 EQUIPMENT
A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of
producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles
with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete
with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered.
Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete
with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power
the hydraulic system and air compressor.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
102
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
49.11 INSTAllATION AND EXECUTION
49.11.1 PREPARATION
1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines
and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole.
2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high
pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and
concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any
large voids with quick setting patching mix.
3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to
the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the
infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the
quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present,
drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout.
Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required.
4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting
mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations.
5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material.
49.11.2 MIXING
For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using
the Spray Mate Mode135C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have
been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another
batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption
until each application is complete.
49.11.3 SPRAYING
The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running
water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all
cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light
troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the
bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface
sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second
application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then
troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the
surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel
marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have
elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is
sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at
the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to
a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The fmal application shall have a
minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
Section IV -Technical Specifications
July 2007
103
I
I
I
-I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
il
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
il
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING
At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or
from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or
Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109.
49.11.5 CURING
Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is
imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been
completed.
49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60)
seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and
ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT
SYSTEM
49.12.1 SCOPE
Materials and application procedures for manhole. rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring
structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of:
1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume
infiltration
2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows:
a. Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or
b. Hydrophilic gel-injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks
3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing)
4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of /2 inch
5. Epoxy coating, minimum of30 dry mils
49.12.2 MATERIALS
49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT
A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to
instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The
TBE Grouo. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc .
Section N -Technical Soecifications
July 2007
104
Section IV - Technical Specifications
repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall
have the following properties:
Set Time
Tensile Strength
ASTM C 307
Compressive Strength
ASTM -C 109
1-3 minutes
I day 510 psi
3 days 745 psi
28 days 855 psi
1 day 3,125 psi
7 days 7,808 psi
28 days 9,543 psi
1 day 410 psi
3 days 855 psi
28 days 1,245 psi
Flexural Strength ASTM C 78
49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING
Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either
one or both of the following materials:
1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in
and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows:
Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86
Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574-86
Bonding Strength 250-300 psi
2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent
seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior
of manhole. Physical properties are as follows:
Density 8.75-9.17Ibs/gal
Tensile Strength 150 psi
Elongation 250%
Shrinkage Less than 4%
Toxicity Non Toxic
ASTM D-3574
ASTM D- 412
ASTM D-3574
ASTM D-1042
49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING
A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system
combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to
seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three
components-two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the
substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks
the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for
approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are
as follows:
Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement
ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionlV.doc
105
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
il
I'
I
I
I
I
r
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
380 psi (2.62 MPa)
325 psi (2.24 MPa)
at 100% RH
at 50% RH
Tensile Strength
(7 day cure)
ASTMC 190
Permeability
(3 day cure)
CRD 48 55
49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING
A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and
provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following
properties:
8.1x10 llcm/sec to
7.6x10 cm/sec
Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days
AstIn C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000
AstIn C 293 Flexuml Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000
AstIn C 596 Shrinkage At 9()01o Humidity - <0.04 <0.06 <0.08
AstIn C 666 Freeze- Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage
AstIn C 990 Pull- Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile
AstIn C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3%
AstIn C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4 - 5%
Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 !Irs moist curing at 68 F.
The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C
1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture
shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will
have a dark grey color.
49.12.2.5 EPOXY COATING
A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This
epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including
excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be
applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its
uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the
following properties at 75 degrees F:
Mixing Ratio (parts A:B), by volume
Color (other colors available on request)
Pot Life, hrs
Tensile Strength, psi, min
Tensile Elongation, %
Water Extractable Substances, mg.lsq. in., max
Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi
1:1
Light Gray
1
2,000
10 -20
5
1,800
TBE GrouD. IDe.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
106
Section N - Technical Specifications
49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK,
Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Com Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin
Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others.
49.12.3 INSTAllATION AND EXECUTION
49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW
Work shall proceed as follows:
1. Remove rungs ( steps), if desired by client.
2. Clean manhole and remove debris.
a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris.
b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease.
c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure.
d. Remove debris from work area.
3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement.
(Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as
required by client.
4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration.
5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as
needed.
6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces.
7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces.
NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step
6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to
cement lining.
49.12.3.2 PREPARATION
An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the
rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to
remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from
entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective
screens.
49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR
Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill
cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying
waterproofing/crystallization.
TBE Group. Inc.
J:\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionlV.doc
107
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
I
I
I,
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
49.12.3.4 INFilTRATION CONTROL
Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam.
1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface.
2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Inject material until water flow stops.
4. Remove fittings (if necessary).
49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS
1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiflbmsh, forming an undercoat.
2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand.
3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal
forming process.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks.
5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat
6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining.
49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING
1. Dampen surface.
2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application.
3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches)
has been achieved.
4.. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole.
5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish.
6. Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating.
NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing
times.
49.12.3.7 EPOXY COATING
Spray apply epoxy coating using air1ess spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a
thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6)
hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours.
49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP
The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area.
49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
THE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV -Technical Soecifications
July 2007
108
Section IV - Technical Specifications
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60)
seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and
ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction offue Project Engineer.
49.12.3.10 WARRANTY
All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years,
provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used.
50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
50.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE
The City desires to inform the general public on the City's use and expenditure of public funding
for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the
Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full
course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at alllocation(s) of active work.
50.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE
Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended
locations or various locations. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and
management of project sign(s) shall be lump sum for the entire project. The number of and type
of signs will be stated in the Scope of the Work section of the contract documents. Lump sum
item will be included in the bid proposal for signs. The particular wording to be used on the signs
will be determined after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the
wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference.
50.3 FIXED SIGN
Fixed sign shall be 4' by 8' in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same
size and a minimum thickness of 1/2". Sign shall be attached to a minimum of three pressure
treated 411 by 4" below grade pressure treated wooden posts and braced as necessary for high
winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign
must be a minimum of 24" above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to
fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on
both sides with exterior rated paint.
50.4 PORTABLE SIGNS
Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24" by 30" in size and will be attached to a standard sized
portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080" or thicker, background of
white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two
signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
109
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
50.5 SIGN COLORING
Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other
lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional
to the sign itself.
50.6 SIGN PLACEMENT
Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the
project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either
pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the City's right-of-way, the
signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the City's right-of-way,
the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of
active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in
several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and
will remain in place until the request for final payment.
50.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE
The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement,
removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The
Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs
are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced.
50.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN
PROJECT NAME
A CITY OF CLEARWATER ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT PROJECT
FUNDING:
CONTRACTOR:
CONSTRUCTION COMPLETION:
CITY PROJECT MANAGER: PHONE
51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM
51.1 SCOPE
1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over
recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the
site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex
System.
2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a
satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface.
3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution.
4. Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System
TBE GraDO. IDe.
J :\OO083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionN .doc
110
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
. 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer
. 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave
. 2 Coats of Plexiflor
. Plexicolor Line Paint
51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS
51.2.1 ASPHALT
Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths,
cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California
Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to
indentation).
51.2.2 CONCRETE
Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL
FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the
concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer
according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and
other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification
Section 10.14.
51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX
Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder
1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement.
51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT
1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level
surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to
California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix:
Acrylic Resurfacer 55 gallons
Water (Clean and Potable) 20-40 gallons
Sand (60-80 mesh) 600-900 pounds
Liquid Yield 112-138 gallons
2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending
on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat.
3. Non-coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with
California Ti-Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix
must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still
tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate
of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat.
TBE GraDO. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV -Technical Soecifications
July 2007
111
I
I
I
I
Ii
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE
After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted
rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix:
Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons
Plexichrome 20 gallons
Water 20 gallons
51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION
1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be
diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and
provide uniform application.
2. Apply two coats ofPlexiflor at a rate of .04-.05 gallons per square yard per coat.
3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with
sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light
pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee.
Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action.
4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to
application of subsequent coats.
51.6 PLAYING LINES
Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately
located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line
Hockey Association.
51.7 GENERAL
1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion
of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner.
Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local,
State and Federal regulations.
2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed,
property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled
with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner
will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site.
Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified.
51.8 LIMITATIONS
1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 500F or more than 1 40oF.
2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent.
3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water.
4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings.
5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOaspecs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
112
Section IV - Technical Specifications
6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use.
7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring.
8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates.
9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78
10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 700P with 60% relative
humidity.
11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery.
In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear.
52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION
52.1 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CITY
See below for Resident Notification performed by the Contractor.
52.2 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CONTRACTOR
The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route with a printed door hanger
notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the
Contractor performing the work: City . seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of
construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events;
possibility of water service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts;
Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number;
Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or
other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other
language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed
language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be
printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4 ~ by 11 inches
in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected
by the Contractor's activities no later than 7 days prior to the start of construction activity.
Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including
staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property,
etc. Contractor cannot start without proper 7 day notice period to residents. Contractor is
required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and
to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business
hours.
Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items
provided in the contract proposal.
THE Group. Ine.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
113
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
/
Section N - Technical Specifications
EXAMPLE
CITY SEAL
Of
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION
TODAY'S DATE: / /
---
PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE
We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater
in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property.
This notice is placed a minimum of 7 days in advance of construction to notifY property owners
of the pending start of construction.
(Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners)
The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way.
Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the
contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks
will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for
the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors,
textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or
structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will
not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property
owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within
the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere.
We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or
any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Superintendent
at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you.
Construction is anticipated to begin on:
Company Name
Company Address
Contractor Phone Number
53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES
53.1 MATERIAL
53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL
53.1.1.1
PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES
Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a
double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of
a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge
12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal
Specifications QQ-W-461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Fi~sh 5,
Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating
TBE Group. IDe.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\SectionN.doc
Section IV -Technical Soecifications
July 2007
114
Section IV - Technical Specifications
shall be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or
Special High Grade~ as prescribed in ASTM B-6~ Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or
exceed four I-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A-239.
The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC
coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3
1/4 inches by 4 ~ inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC
coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire
core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall
diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire
shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in
diameter (approx. US gauge 13 ~), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized
wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be
permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge
joint with a strength of 1200 Ibs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed
condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a
minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger- Tite
Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener
shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A-313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal.
All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with
ASTMA-641.
53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING
The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not
less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist
deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show
any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to
attack from acids and resistant to abrasion.
1. Specific Gravity:
a. According to ASTM D-2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34.
2. Tensile Strength:
a. According to ASTM D-142; not less than 2980 psi.
3. Modulus of Elasticity:
a. According to ASTM D-412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain.
4. Resistance to Abrasion:
a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B).
5. Brittleness Temperature:
a. According to ASTM D-746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade
below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but
not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade.
6. Hardness:
a. According to ASTM D-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
115
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
7. Creeping Corrosion:
a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall
not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a
50% SOLUTION HCl (hydrochloric acid 12 Be).
53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS
Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is
submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests:
1. Salt Spray Test:
a. According to ASTM B-117
b. Period of test = 3000 hours.
2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays:
a. According to ASTM 0-1499 and ASTM 0-23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test =
3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade.
3. Exposure to high temperature:
a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with
ASTM 0- 1203 andASTM 0-2287.
53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS
After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit
the following properties:
1. Appearance:
a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable
change in color.
2. Specific Gravity:
a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value.
3. Ourometer Hardness:
a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value.
4. Tensile Strength:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
5. Elongation:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
6. Modulus of Elasticity:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
7. Resistance to Abrasion:
a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value.
TBE Group. Inc.
I :\00083\OO083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
116
Section IV - Technical Specifications
8. Brittleness Temperature:
a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade.
b. Cold Flex Temperature - Shall not be higher than + 18 degrees centigrade.
53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL:
The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is
started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or
supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific
gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure.
The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote
deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be
retained in the gabion or mattress baskets.
The stone shall meet the following physical requirements:
. Absorption, maximum 5%
· Los Angeles Abrasion (pM 10T096), maximum loss 45%
· Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM I-TI04), maximum loss 12%
· Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest
dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight.
All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical
diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by
weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening.
53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE
Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows:
1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866
inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A
641, Table 3.
2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of
the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs.lsq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and
lacing and 0.80 ozs.lsq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge.
3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being Wrapped in a close
helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel
having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is
completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or .flaking of the zinc coating to such
an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fmgers.
53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D-2, and FDOT Standard
Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\0008302 I .06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
117
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
53.2 PERFORMANCE
Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such
a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into
rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses
shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a
single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a
manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the
mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width,
they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall
be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no
additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not
ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections
forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut.
Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The
binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single .
and double loops are alternated.
A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and
binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical
reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled
line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back.
To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended.
Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions
shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to
opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full
and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one
two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top.
Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses.
Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the
cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or
cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against
movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be
replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work
shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the
manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less.
54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
54.1 SCOPE
To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of
plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems;
ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
118
Section IV - Technical Specifications
at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance
activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone.
The Contractor(s)will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street
medians including:
· Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic;
· Trash and debris removal from the job site;
· Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces;
· Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms;
· Proper fertilization and pest control oflandscape and palms (may be subcontracted);
. Irrigation service and repair;
. Mulch replacement;
· Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the
· Reporting of irregularities at the job site.
54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
The Contractor( s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract
between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed
holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract
maintenance at other hours.
All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc.,
be completed before leaving the job site.
54.3 WORK METHODS
54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING
The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service).
Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in
writing by an authorized representative of the other party.
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT
The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated
location:
54.4 LITTER
Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and
debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes,
tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor
should "report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the
extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
119
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
54.5 VISUAL CHECK
The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or
damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours
after providing the service.
54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING
All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature
size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants
in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while
maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants
shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope.
Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following
flower formation, according to the following specifications:
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY
DATE, ETC.)
Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to
remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded
heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation;
such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the
trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed
on palms.
54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL
All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the
contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion.
54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL
Proper and. safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the
contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications.
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY
Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park
users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high
pedestrian use areas.
54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION
All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur
coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in
mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and
amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials.
TBE GraDO. Ine.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionN .doc
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
120
Section N - Technical Specifications
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA
Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable.
Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied
by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor
at his/her expense.
54.13 MULCH CONDITION
Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil
moisture, usually 3 inches.
54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR
Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing
should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and
operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled
system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in
advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to
the monthly maintenance fee.
54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL
Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a
less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be
replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on
City properties.
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION
Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across
the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February.
54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION
The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost
sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet
to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the
sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's
directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City
will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to
protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it
to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or
remain in placed as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11 :00 a.m. about
removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may
cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day
(5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site
work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for
the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate
per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations
TBE Group. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionN.doc
121
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform
remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City.
54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE
This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7
working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no
further than ten calendar days apart.
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK
Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to
monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a
phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between
6:30 a.m. - 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. - 3:00 p.m.
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL
Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the
following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City
shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be
given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been
completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed.
54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month
period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate
irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the
landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm
heads/fronds as he feels appropriate.
2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates.
3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with
trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature
caused by the Contractor or hislher employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing
of the specific nature of the dall1age and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option,
invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next
regular payment to the Contractor.
5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked
vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular
schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall
schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining
circumstances are relieved.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionN .doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
122
Section IV - Technical Specifications
55 MilliNG OPERATIONS
55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE
Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be
performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition).
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
milling.
55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS
1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible
to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal
environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment.
2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless
otherwise noted in the contract documents.
3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of
the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt (the Broom
Tractor way of sweeping is not be permitted). The sweeper must be equipped with its
own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep
debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving
the job site.
4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled
to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the contract surface.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line
and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this
removal shall be included in the bid item for milling.
6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling.
7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the
road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000
Standard Specifications for S-Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for
superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for
asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed
. that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a
failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and
at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City
approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for
milling.
9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after
the milling operation is complete.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
123
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS
All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the
City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-4950 to
schedule delivery of material.
55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS
All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory
requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City.
55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND lOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTiliTIES
All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their
owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners
the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility
adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing
operations.
55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTiliTY MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances
shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's
Technical Specifications.
55.7 TYPES OF MilliNG
There are two types of milling used by the City:
A. Wedge - This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the
pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height
and pavement cross section.
B. Full Width - This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of
pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry
shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer.
55.8 MilliNG OF INTERSECTIONS
Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to
restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend
approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale.
55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical SDecifications
July 2007
124
Section IV. - Technical Specifications
55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and
stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of
radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's
discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals
necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications.
56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures,
appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles,
posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through
the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction.
Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the
Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in
accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements.
56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and
grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer.
56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and
structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape
trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
57 RIPRAP
The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble
riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (lastest edition).
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand-
cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble.
57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling,
equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and
shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill,
dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
125
I
il
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY
This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants
(WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs.
58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL
The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water
reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and
ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include:
. An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns
to the skin and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided
with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response
Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the
contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of
these documents.
58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING
Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding
employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must
include:
. Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training
in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around
gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas.
. The date of the training, and
. The means used to verify that the employee understood the training.
59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (Sections 603 through 690), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents
and plans.
This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment,
materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit,
signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power
service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors,
pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, and
removal of existing traffic signal equipment.
All mast arms signal installations shall meet the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly
standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of
Florida All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and
sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm poles shall be
chestnut bronze, with the color approved by the City prior to placement.
All traffic signal indicators shall be LED's, approved by both the City and FDOT.
TBE Group. IDe.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV.doc
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
126
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the
City's Traffic Engineering Division. '
59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to
complete the workper the plans.
60 SIGNING AND MARKING
All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's. Standard
Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and
markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular
delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972).
The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or
markings shall be "blacked-out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No
payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked-out" areas. Omissions in striping or
markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made.
60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the
work per the plans.
61 ROADWAY LIGHTING
All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work
per the plans.
62 TREE PROTECTION
62.1 TREE BARRICADES
A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land
preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all
staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows:
1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms.
2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer
speCIes.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
127
Section N -Technical Soecifications
July 2007
I
:1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
3. At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species
4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand.
B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch lumber for upright posts.
Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in
the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart.
Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber and
shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative
must approve any variation from the above requirements.
C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is
terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during
construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall
remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor
utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative.
D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or
debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier
no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No
equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be. placed within such
protective barriers.
E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any
protected tree or palm.
F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this
section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees.
62.2 ROOT PRUNING
A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical
root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society
of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce
the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to
any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean
pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be
pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand
digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment
designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is
strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will he impacted by
construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade
or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. run Kurtz,
Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Public Works projects for root
Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction inspector
assigned to the project.
B. Root pruning shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International
Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arOOrist.
C. Any. proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (Le. staked or painted)
inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning.
TBE GroDD. IDe.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV -Technical Soecifications
July 2007
128
Section N - Technical Specifications
D. Root pruning shall be preformed as far in advance of other construction activities as is
feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated
tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning.
E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any
root pruning activities.
F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum often inches per one inch of the trunk diameter
from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said
root pruning.
G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be
done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less
than 18".
H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent.
Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to
any work adjacent to trees to be preserved.
I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any
excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected.
J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree
roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled
around to prevent damage to the root.
K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or
burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established.
L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may
require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root
pruned trees.
M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root
pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional
boring as opposed to open trenching.
62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING
A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be preformed by or
under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified
arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations - Tree, Shrub and
other Woody Plant Maintenance - Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300.
B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts
(pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree)
are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be
recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require
replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances.
C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
129
Section IV-Technical Specifications
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I"
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been
improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing
condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and
Ordinances.
E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage
trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been
damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy
growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and
Ordinances.
63 PROJECT WEB PAGES
63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN
If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the
current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project
information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project
Contacts.
Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer
shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the
Project Web Pages.
63.2 WEB ACCESSIBiliTY GUIDELINES
Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section
508 guidelines whenever possible:
http://www.w3 .orgfTR/1999/WAI- WEBCONTENT-19990505/
http://www.section508.gov/
In particular, use of variable-width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for
images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics.
63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES lOGO AND ITS USE
The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic
material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising~vehicles,
apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion
shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to
fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside
vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public
Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public
Communications. This is for internal use only.
63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS
Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics
should be posted to the Project Web Pages.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
130
Section IV-Technical Soecifications
July 2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS
The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back
to the City regarding the Project.
63.6 POSTING
The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web
Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved,
should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity
Issues.
63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES
Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages
up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's
Webmaster for posting.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectionIV .doc
Section IV -Technical Specifications
July 2007
131
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION IV-A
SUPPLEMENTAL
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICA TIONS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
00800
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
General Conditions of the Construction Contract are a part of this contract.
The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the General Conditions of the
Construction Contract. Where any article of the General Conditions is modified or any
paragraph, subparagraph or clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the
unaltered provisions of that article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause shall remain in effect.
MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION III
2.0 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.3 COMMENCMENT OF CONTRACT TIME; NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING
THE PROJECT
2.3.1 The work required in the Contract for Pump Station 16 relocation shall be
substantially complete no later than 180 calendar days after the date when the Contract
Time commences to run.
2.3.2 Substantial completion is defined as having all components installed and ready for
daily operation. Substantial completion includes start-up, operation, testing,
manufacturers checks and services, operator training, and similar items. The following
items need not be completed for Substantial Completion:
a. Finish paving
b. Final clean-up and restoration
c. Final application for payment and final acceptance
2.3.3 All work in the Contract shall be completed and ready for final payment within
210 calendar days after the date when the Contract Time commences to run.
Should the City award the Alternate Bid portion of the contract, for the demolition
and site restoration of existing pump station 16, the contract time will be extended
60 days for a total contract time of270 days.
4.0 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
REFERENCE POINTS.
4.2 Investigations and reports:
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\OO800.doc
00800
SGC-l
SupplementarY General Conditions
July 2007
4.2.1 The Engineer has relied upon the following information. Interested Bidders are
advised that the Reports are for general information purposes only. Copies. of the
reports will be available for purchase from Rose Burt, c/o TBE Group, Inc., 380
Park Place Boulevard, Suite 300, Clearwater, Florida 33759, 727/531-3505.
Copies of the reports may be purchased at a non-refundable reproduction cost of
$75.00 per set. One set includes the following:
Asbestos Investigation Report:
Report of the NESHAP demolition survey, sampling and evaluation of
asbestos-containing materials at Pump Station 16
Dated: January 5,2005
By: Greenfield Environmental, Inc.
Report of the NESHAP demolition survey, sampling and evaluation of
asbestos-containing materials at Pump Station 16
Dated: January 10, 2007
By: Greenfield Environmental, Inc.
Geotechnical Investigation report:
Report of the geotechnical Investigation Pump Station No. 16 Relocation
Dated: October 20, 2003
By: Driggers Engineering Services, Inc.
Results of supplemental test borings Pump Station No. 16 Relocation
Dated: April 1 , 2005
By: Driggers Engineering Services, Inc.
5.0 - BONDS AND INSURANCE
5.2 Insurance: Include as an additional insured the Owner's Engineering Consultant:
TBE Group, Inc.
380 Park Place Boulevard, Suite 300
Clearwater, Florida 33759
6.0 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
6.8 PERMITS
6.8.1 The Contractor shall be required to pay all connection and impact fees.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\00800.doc
00800
SGC-2
Supplementary General Conditions
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION
6.9.1 The Contractor shall provide the City with a Hurricane Preparation Plan.
14.0 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
14.1.1 The City shall provide a disk with the Pay Application Format to the
Contractor at the Preconstruction Meeting.
MODIFICATIONS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
12.0 DEWATERING
12.1 A Generic Groundwater Discharge Permit is required for discharging drainage
water into the City's storm system or bodies of water. Groundwater samples shall
be taken and tested by a laboratory before the permit is issued.
12.2 Dewatering Control
The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic
Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater From Any Non-Contaminated
Site Activity prior to dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers
or waterways.
Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor
must collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable
discharge limits. The following document has been incorporated into this section
for reference:
GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER
FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY
City Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of
Clearwater Environmental Department with the following information
prior to beginning dewatering activities:
1) A copy of all groundwater laboratory results
2) A copy of the FDEP Notification
TBE Group. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\OO800.doc
00800
SGC-3
SUPDlementarv General Conditions
July 2007
Failure to follow the above procedure will result in a Violation and a Stop Work
Order will be placed on the project.
Depending on the severity of the Violation, the City's Engineering Department
may be required to notify the Department of Environmental Protection for
enforcement action.
The following procedure will be followed:
1 st occurrence - Stop Work Order
2nd occurrence - Notification to FDEP
It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental
staff if you have any questions. You may contact Brett Gardner at (727) 562-
4759 or Kanna Killian at (727) 562-4745 for direction or further assistance.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\00800.doc
00800
SGC4
Supolementarv General Conditions
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
STATE OF FLORIDA
DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER
FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINA TED SITE ACTIVITY
The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non-contaminated site activity which
discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62-620, F.A.C., only if the
reported values for the parameters listed in Table 1 do not exceed any of the listed screening values. Before
discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites, analytical tests on samples of the proposed
untreated discharge water shall be performed to determine if contamination exists.
Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be sampled
before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement of discharge, and
then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued coverage under this generic
permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit shall be taken prior to actual
discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The effluent shall be sampled for the parameters listed in
Table 1.
TABLE 1
Parameter
Total Or anic Carbon TOC
PH, standard units
Total Recoverable Mercury- by Method 1631E
Total Recoverable Cadmium
Total Recoverable Copper
Total Recoverable Lead
Total Recoverable Zinc
Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.)
Benzene
Naphthalene
Screenin Values for Dischar es into:
Fresh Waters Coastal Waters
10.0 mil 0.0 m I
6.0-8.5 6.5-8.5
0.012 I 0.025
9.3 9.3
2.9 2.9
0.03 mg/l 5.6
86.0 86.0
11.0 50.0
1~ 1~
100.0 100.0
If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the discharge
is not authorized by this permit or bv the City of Clearwater.
(a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which may be caused by
naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds, the permittee may request to be
exempted from the TOC requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit
additional information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the method
used to deteqnine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The Department shall grant the
exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates that the TOC values are caused by naturally
occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds.
(b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty (30) days prior to
discharge, and contain the following information:
1. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued to;
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\00800.doc
00800
SGC-5
SUDDlementarv General Conditions
July 2007
2. the name and address of the facility, including county location;
3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s);
4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and longitude);
5. the name of the receiving water; and
6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit.
(c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the Department.
For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0 units for
fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless the permittee
submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of this range. If natural
background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5
units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural background or vary more than one (1) unit
above natural background for fresh and coastal waters. If natural background of the receiving water is
determined to be higher than 8.5 units, the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than
one (1) unit below natural background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural
background pH of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of
this permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration of
less than 1500 mg/l, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or greater than
1500 mg/l.
In accordance with Rule 62-302.500(1)(a-c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from floating
solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on surface waters.
If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph (2), the
discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an individual wastewater
permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface waters of the State is expected, or, if
applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other applicable Department generic permit. No
discharge is pennissible without an effective permit.
If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any source, the
facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having to submit an NOI
request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed activity and copy of the
analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office within one (1) week after
discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during discharge and made available to the
Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge Monitoring Report forms are required to be
submitted to the Department.
All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62-621.250, F.A.C., are applicable to this Generic Permit.
There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\00800.doc
00800
SGC-6
Supolementarv General Conditions
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
20.0 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS
20.1 MATERIALS
20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
PVC pipe shall meet the requirements of A WW A C-900, polyvinyl chloride
(PVC). The push-on joints shall have an elastomeric-gasket conforming to
ASTM D3139 for a watertight seal. PVC pipe 4 inches through 12 inches shall be
class 150, DR 18. PVC pipe 14 inches and larger shall meet the requirements of
A WW A Standard C-905 PVC and shall be CL 235, DR 18. All pipe shall be
color coded green and continually marked.
20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Force main pipe and fittings shall be ductile iron as follows:
a. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with
ANSIIAWWA C-1511A21.51 and shall be Class 51 or greater. Ductile
iron pipe and fittings for water mains shall have an asphaltic outside
coating and a cement lining inside in accordance with ANSII A WW A
CI04/A21.4. Ductile iron pipe and fittings for sanitary sewer force main
shall have a PROTECTO 401 ceramic epoxy interior lining with a
minimum dry film thickness of 40 mils. All fittings shall be restrained
joint. All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured by American, McWane,
U.S. Pipe, or approved equal.
b. Bell Restraint: Ductile iron pipe bell restraint shall consist of a wedge
action restraint ring on the spigot joined to a split ductile iron ring behind
the bell. The restraint ring shall have individually actuated wedges that
increase their resistance to pullout as pressure or external forces increase.
The restraint ring and its wedging components shall conform to ASTM
A536. The wedges shall be heat treated to a minimum hardness of 370
BHN. Torque limiting twist off nuts shall be used to insure proper
actuation of the restraining wedges. The split ring shall conform to ASTM
A 536. The connecting tie rods that join the tow rings shall be make of
low alloy steel that conforms to one safety factor, of350 psi in sizes 16-
inch and below and 250 psi in sizes 18-inch through 36-inch. The product
shall be the series 1700 Megalug restraint harness manufactured by EBAA
Iron or approved equal.
c. Mechanical Joint Restraint: Gland body and restraint components shall be
made from ductile iron and can be used with the standardized mechanical
joint bell conforming to ANSIIAWWA Cll/A21.11 and ANSIIAWWA
CI53/A21.53 of the latest version. Restraint assembly shall be capable of
full deflection both during and after assembly. The restraint shall be
Series 1100 Megalug as produced by EBBA Iron or approved equal.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\00800.doc
00800
SGC-7
SupplementarY General Conditions
July 2007
d. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be polyethylene encased (minimum
8 mil thick and color coded) in accordance with ANSI! A WW A
A21.5/C105 and ASTM A 674. Polyethylene encasement shall be green
in color for sanitary sewer mains and blue for potable water mains.
25.0 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS
25.1 IRRIGATION
The following is a list of components to be used in all irrigation applications done for Parks and
Beautification.
1. Rotor Heads: Hunter PGP ( Hunter I 20 on Athletic Fields)
2. Spray Heads: Rainbird 1800 series. 1806 for 6" and 1812 for 12" depending on
spray height required.
3. Drip Irrigation: Netafim TLDL9.012 (used in landscape beds)
4. Clocks/Timers: Rainbird ESP 4 (4 station with additional modules as needed) or ESP LX
(Rainbird RC 4,7,12 on Athletic Fields) or Hunter ICC 800 PL (with additional modules
as needed)
5. Valves: Irritrol200 Series (205 TF - 1",216 - 1.5",217 - 2")
6. Bubblers: Rainbird 1300 A-F
7. Remote Technology Permanent Connect and Commander (control unit)
Irrigation System Design
1. The application rate must not exceed the ability of the soil to absorb and retain the
water applied during anyone application.
2. The design operating pressure must not be greater than the available source pressure.
3. The design operating pressure must account for peak use times and supply line
pressures at final build out for the entire system.
4. Distribution devices and pipes should be designed for optimum uniform coverage.
The first and last distribution device should have no more than a 10% difference in
flow rate, This usually corresponds to about a 20% difference in pressure.
5. "Head to head" placement of sprinklers to achieve 100% coverage.
6. Flexibility must exist to meet a site's peak water requirements and allow for the
modification of the system's operation to meet seasonal irrigation changes or local
restrictions.
7. Distribution equipment (such as pop-ups, rotors, bubblers and drip) in a given zone
must have the same precipitation rate.
8. Turf and landscape areas should be zoned separately based on plant water
requirements. Bubblers, drip, rotors and pop-ups will all be on separate zones.
9. The design package should inc1udea general irrigation schedule with
recommendations and instructions on modifying the schedule for local climatic and
growing conditions.
TBE Group. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\00800.doc
00800
SGC-8
Supplementary General Conditions
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
10. If required by plant species, the design should account for the need to leach out salt
. buildup from poor quality water.
11. Water supply systems (such as wells and pipelines) should be designed for varying
control devices, and backflow prevention.
12. Water conveyance systems should be designed with thrust blocks and air release
valves, such that flow velocity is 5 feet per second or less.
13. Pipelines should be designed to provide the system with the appropriate pressure
required for maximum irrigation uniformity.
14. Pressure regulating or compensating equipment must be used where the system
pressure exceeds the manufacturer's recommendations.
15. Equipment with check valves must be used in low areas to prevent low head drainage.
16. A rain sensing device must be used to automatically shut off system when raining.
17. Nonplanted areas, including impervious surfaces and underneath roof overhangs,
should not be irrigated.
18. The City of Clearwater, Parks and Beautification must approve irrigation plan before
irrigation construction begins.
Irrigation System Installation
1. Only qualified specialists under the direct supervision of a "Certified Irrigation
Designer" or a "Certified Irrigation Contractor" should install the irrigation system.
Certifications are through "The Irrigation Association".
2. The construction must be consistent with the design.
3. The designer must approve any design changes before construction.
4. Construction and materials should meet existing standards and criteria.
5. Acceptable safety practices must be followed during construction.
6. All underground cables, pipes and other obstacles should be identified and their
locations flagged.
7. Obtain all permits before construction.
8. Always give the owner a copy of the as-built plans, operating manuals, warranties
and written instructions on how to change the irrigation system's
timers/clock/controllers.
9. At the end of construction the site must be cleaned of all construction materials.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\OOO83021.06\DOC\Specs\00800.doc
00800
SGC-9
SUDDlementarv General Conditions
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The work covered by these specifications comprises, in general, the furnishing of
all labor, equipment, materials. The work shall include the performing of all
operations to relocate Pump Station 16 for the City of Clearwater as described and
specified further in these Technical Specifications, and as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
B. Pump Station 16 will be relocated and the existing PS 16 structure may be
demolished as described on the attached drawings.
C. Pump Station 16 will receive new pumps, piping, wet well, force main, electrical,
landscaping and irrigation as described on the attached plans and specified herein.
D. Except as specifically noted, the Contractor shall provide and pay for:
1. Labor, materials, tools, construction equipment, and machinery.
2. Water and utilities required for construction.
3. Other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and
completion of the work.
4. Testing lab services.
5. Hiring of Data Flow Systems to evaluate the height and position of the
telemetry antenna.
6. Impact fees, connection fees and permits as required.
E. The Contractor shall comply with all codes, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders
and other legal requirements of the City of Clearwater.
F. The contractor shall attend Progress Meetings, usually every two weeks.
G. The contractor is to deliver an updated Submittal Log and an updated RFI Log at
each Progress Meeting.
H. A Submittal Schedule is to be delivered by the contractor at the Preconstruction
Meeting. It shall list all the required submittals for the project. No additional
contract time will be added due to untimely submission of submittals.
I. An RFI Log shall be maintained by the contractor. No additional contract time
will be added due to the untimely submission of RFIs.
THE Grouo. IDe.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\0 1 0 10.doc
Summary of Work
July 2007
01010-1
J. A Generic Groundwater Discharge Permit is required for discharging drainage water into
the City's storm system or bodies of water. Groundwater samples shall be taken and
tested by a laboratory before the permit is issued.
1.02 COACHMAN PARK WORK SCHEDULE
A. Directional drilling operations and other activities related to the installation and
connection of the force main are forbidden in Coachman Park during scheduled
major events in the park. The Contractor shall schedule all force main work
(directional drill, line stop, connection, grouting, etc) during the following dates:
November 11 through December 31, 2007
May 7 through June 28, 2008
B. All work related to the force main work such as directional drilling, including
mobilization, demobilization, and restoration, shall be completed within the dates
listed above.
C. If the contractor is unable to schedule the force main work during the dates
specified, he shall request from the City additional dates during which the force
main work may be performed.
1.03 CONSTRUCTION SURVEY AND RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all construction stakes required to
complete the work. Construction stakes shall be provided by a survey crew
working under the direction of a surveyor registered in the State of Florida, and
qualified to perform the type of survey stakeout required by the plans and details.
All work items shall be staked, flagged and marked in such manner to afford easy
identification by the Contractor and the Owner's Representative. Whenever
stakes are lost, they shall be replaced before continuing with the work.
B. The Contractor shall provide four sets of certified record drawings, signed and
sealed by a surveyor registered in the state of Florida and an AutoCad file. The
record drawings shall show final grades, locations and elevations of all
equipment and utilities. All grades, locations and elevations shall be determined
by the surveyor. All valves, fittings and other appurtenances shall be shown.
Information shall be presented as x, y data in the State Plane coordinates utilizing
the 1983/90 horizontal NAD and the 1988 vertical NGVD.
C. At the completion of the work, the record drawings shall be delivered to the
Engineer for review and approval prior to requesting final payment. If there are
any discrepancies noted on the record drawings, they will be returned to the
Contractor for checking and correction of work as determined by the Engineer.
THE Group, Inc.
J:\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\01 0 I O.doc
01010-2
Summary of Work
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.04 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall implement erosion and sediment control practices that will
prevent the introduction of pollutants into the storm water system. Erosion and
sediment controls shall include both stabilization practices and structural
practices.
B. The Contractor shall take adequate precautions to prevent siltation and bank
erosion in discharging well point systems or during other construction activities.
This includes the placement of erosion control devices, such as silt barriers or
settling basins, when necessary to prevent silt from entering the drainage system.
Whenever traffic will be leaving a construction site and moves directly onto a
public road or other paved area, a temporary gravel construction entrance, per
City of Clearwater Standards, shall be installed to reduce the amount of sediment
transported onto public roads by motor vehicles or runoff. The entrance shall be
maintained in a condition that will prevent tracking or flow of sediments onto
public rights-of way. All materials spilled, dropped, washed, or tracked from
vehicles onto roadways or into storm drains must be removed immediately. The
road or paved area must be swept daily for sediments and stones.
C. All erosion and sediment control devices shall be checked daily or immediately
after a storm event and shall be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. All
erosion and sediment control methods shall be in accordance with F.D.O.T. Index
No. 102 and shall comply with all state and local water quality standards. The
City Engineer or the appointed City personnel has the right to enforce immediate
cleanup and maintenance of any and all sediments on or off site.
D. If required, the Contractor shall obtain an Environmental Resource Permit for
groundwater discharge.
1.04 HOUSEKEEPING BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES
A. A construction site management plan shall be developed by the Contractor to
prevent pollutants from entering the storm water system. Pollutants include but
are not limited to oils, grease, paints, gasoline, concrete truck washdown,
solvents, litter, debris and sanitary waste.
B. The construction site management plan shall designate areas for equipment
maintenance and repair; shall provide waste receptacles at convenient locations
and shall provide regular collection of wastes; shall locate equipment washdown
areas on site and shall provide appropriate control of washwaters; shall provide
protected storage areas for chemicals, paints, solvents fertilizers and other
potentially toxic materials; and shall provide adequately maintained sanitary
facilities
TBE GrouD. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\0 1 0 1 O.doc
01010-3
Summary of Work
July 2007
1.05 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A. The Contractor shall furnish suitable storage facilities. All materials, supplies and
equipment intended for use in the work shall be suitably stored by the Contractor
to prevent damage from exposure, admixture with foreign substances, or
vandalism or other cause. The Engineer will refuse to accept, or sample for
testing, materials, supplies or equipment that have been improperly st~red, as
determined by the Engineer.
B. Materials found unfit for use shall not be incorporated in the work and shall
immediately be removed from the construction or storage site. Delivered
materials shall be stored in a manner acceptable to the Engineer before any
payment for same will be made. Materials strung out along the line of
construction will not be allowed unless the materials will be installed within one
week from the time of unloading and stringing out.
1.06 PRESERVATION OF PROPERTY
A. The Contractor shall preserve from damage all property along the line of the
work, or which is in the vicinity of or is in any way affected by. the work, the
removal or destruction of which is not called for by the plans. Wherever such
property is damaged due to the activities of the Contractor, it shall be immediately
restored to its original condition by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
B. In case of failure on the part of the Contractor to restore such property, or to make
good such damage for injury, the Owner may, after 48 hours notice to the
Contractor, proceed to repair, rebuild or otherwise restore such property as may
be deemed necessary, and the cost thereof will be deducted from any monies due,
or which may become due, the Contractor under this contract.
1.07 CLEAN UP
A. The Contractor shall keep the construction site free of rubbish and other materials
and restore to their original conditions those portions of the site not designated for
the alteration by the Contract Documents. Clean up and restoration shall be
accomplished on a continuing basis throughout the contract period and in such a
manner as to maintain a minimum of nuisance and interference to the general
public and residents in the vicinity of the work.
B. The Contractor shall also remove, when no longer needed, all temporary
structures and equipment used in his operation. It is the intent of this
specification that the construction areas and those other areas not designated for
alteration by the Contract Documents shall be immediately restored to original
condition upon completion of the project.
THE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\0 I 0 I O.doc
01010-4
Summary of Work
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. The submitted construction schedule shall indicate this construction sequence:
. Debris piles shall be removed within 5 consecutive calendar days.
. Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within 10 consecutive
calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times.
. All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP.
. Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a
sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed 15
consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained
at all times.
Sod must be restored within 10 days of a successful pressure test. It must be
watered for a period of 30 days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control
of denuded areas must be maintained at all times.
1.08 PUBLIC SAFETY AND CONVENIENCE
A. The Contractor shall at all times so conduct his work as to ensure the least
possible obstruction to traffic, or inconvenience to the general public and
residents in the vicinity of the work. No road or street shall be closed to the
public, except with the permission of the Engineer and other jurisdictional
governmental authority, if any. Fire hydrants on or adjacent to the work shall be
kept accessible. Provisions shall be made by the Contractor to ensure public
access to sidewalks, public telephones, and the proper functioning of all gutters,
sewer inlets, drainage ditches, and irrigation ditches. No open excavation shall be
left overnight except during road closing. All open excavation within the
roadway shall be backfilled and a temporary asphalt patch applied prior to
darkness each day. A cold asphalt patch is acceptable.
1.09 SAFETY AND OSHA COMPLIANCE
A. The Contractor shall comply in all respects with all Federal, State and Local safety
and health regulations. Copies of the Federal regulations may be obtained from
the U.S. Department of Labor, Occupation Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA), Washington, DC 20210 or their regional offices. .
B. The Contractor shall comply in all respects with the applicable Workman's
Compensation Law.
1.10 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES
A. Coordinate the use of premises under direction of Engineer.
B. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of equipment and
materials stored on the site.
C. Move any stored Products, under Contractor's control, which interfere with
operations of the Owner or separate Contractor.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\OOO83021.06\DOaSpecs\0 1 0 1 O.doc
Summarv of Work
July 2007
01010-5
D. Maintain access to existing Pump Station 16 at all times until new Pump Station
16 has been substantially completed and is pumping wastewater.
END OF SECTION
THE Group. Inc.
J :\OO083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\O 1 0 1 O.doc
01010-6
Summary of Work
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01025
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 EXPLANATION AND DEFINITIONS
A. The following explanation of the Measurement and Payment for the bid form
items is made for information and guidance. The omission of reference to any
item in this description shall not, however, alter the intent of the bid form or
relieve the Contractor of the necessity of furnishing such as part of the Contract.
1.02 PAYMENT
A.
Payment shall be made for the items listed on the Bid Form on the basis of the
work actually performed and completed. Such work shall include, but is not
limited to, the furnishing of all necessary labor, materials, tools, equipment,
transportation, clean up, and all other incidentals and appurtenances to complete
the construction and installation of the work, to the configuration and extent as
shown on the drawings, and described in the specifications.
B.
It is intended that all mobilization, insurance, bond, license and other
miscellaneous administrative costs, and all other costs to the Contractor not
specifically identified in the following item description be distributed among and
included in the unit prices stated. No additional payment shall be made for
transportation, communications, office maintenance, project signs, and other
incidental work or services, and no further payment shall be made for
remobilization unless all of the work is suspended by the Engineer for a period in
excess of three months and through no fault of the Contractor.
C.
All required manufacturer testing and certification should be included in the unit
prices shown in the Proposal and Contract. All other testing shall be paid for by
the Contractor.
PART 2
MATERIALS
NOT USED
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 MOBILIZATION - BID ITEM NO.1
A. Payment for mobilization will include documented and justified costs associated
with preparatory work and operations necessary to begin work on the Project,
including but not limited to those operations necessary for the movement of
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\O I025.doc
01025-1
Measurement and Payment
July 2007
personnel, equipment supplies, and incidentals to the Project site(s), and for
payment of impact fees, permits, the establishment of temporary offices, project
signs, erosion control, dewatering, maintenance of traffic, buildings, safety
equipment and first aid supplies, sanitary and other facilities as required by the
Plans and Specifications and all applicable federal, state, and local laws and
regulations.
B. The cost of bonds and any other required insurance and any other pre-construction
expenses necessary for the start of the Work, excluding the cost of construction
materials, shall also be included in this Pay item.
C. The Work specified under this Pay Item will be paid for at the Contract lump sum
price, in accordance with the following schedule:
Percent of Original
Contract Amount Earned
5
10
25
50
Allowable Percent of Lump Sum.
Price for Mobilization
25
50
75
100
3.02 FURNISH AND INSTALL PUMP STATION 16 - BID ITEM NO.2
A. Description: This bid item describes measurement and payment for the
installation of the new Pump Station 16 complete as specified and shown on the
Drawings. This includes the concrete driveway.
B. Measurement: The quantity to be paid for under this Item shall be measured as
one lump sum quantity.
C. Payment: Payment of the lump sum agreed on in the bid form shall be full
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals
required to complete the construction of the relocated Pump Station 16 complete
as shown on the Drawings and specified in these Technical Specifications,
Divisions 1 through 16, excluding those items for which measurement and
payments are separately specified. Payment shall include, but not be limited to,
new wet well and valve vault, maintenance of traffic, air release valve assembly,
concrete driveway and pads, miscellaneous concrete, bypass piping, sheeting,
shoring and bracing, excavation, backfill, erosion and sedimentation control,
protection of existing structures and utilities, linings, coatings, all pumps, guide
rails, piping, fittings, couplings, valves, hatches, pump control panel, electrical,
RTU and telemetry equipment, antenna, electrical appurtenances, electrical
supply, cleaning and testing, all restoration including but not limited to sidewalks,
curbs, asphalt, sod, etc; and all other work required for a full, operable, and
complete installation as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Data
Flow Systems shall be hired to analyze and evaluate the position of the telemetry
TBE Group, Inc.
J:\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\OI025.doc
Measurement and Payment
July 2007
01025-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
antenna.
3.03 FURNISH AND INSTALL 24-INCH BY 12-INCH TAPPING SLEEVES, VALVES,
AND PERFORM WET TAP - BID ITEM NO.3
A. Description: This bid item describes measurement and payment for furnishing
and installing tapping sleeves and gate valves at the connection of the existing
force main and the necessary wet tap.
B. Measurement: The quantity to be paid for under this Item shall be measured as
one lump sum quantity.
C. Payment: The pay quantities for the work specified under this Item shall be the
lump sum price set out in the Proposal, which price and payment constitutes full
compensation for all the work described herein. The lump sum bid price includes
furnishing all materials, tapping sleeves, gate valves, valve boxes, restraints and
wet tap and fittings plus all the work, tools, equipment, materials, and incidentals
required to install the tapping sleeves and valves, and perform the tap into the
existing force main, complete, in place, and accepted. The work includes, but is
not limited to assembling, excavation, backfill, sheeting, shoring, bracing,
dewatering, pumping, erosion and sedimentation control, maintenance of flow,
bypass piping, all restoration including but not limited to sidewalks, curbs,
asphalt, sod, etc; and all incidentals necessary to complete the work except where
such are shown to be paid for under a separate item.
3.04 FURNISH AND INSTALL THRUST COLLAR ASSEMBLY - BID ITEM NO.4
A. Description: This bid item describes measurement and payment for installing
thrust collar assemblies acceptably installed as shown on the drawings or where
directed by the Engineer.
B. Measurement: Measurement will be on an individual basis for thrust collar
acceptably installed.
C. Payment: Payment will be according to the number of thrust collars as set forth in
the proposal. The unit bid price includes furnishing and installing all materials
above or below ground along the pipeline alignment including, but not limited to:
making pipe connections, restraining new and existing pipe, restraining devices,
clearing, sheeting, shoring and bracing, dewatering, excavation, bedding and
backfill, maintenance of flow, by-pass pumping (as required), concrete, forms,
disposal of spoil. Cleaning, erosion control, protection of culverts and drainage
facilities, surface restoration, sodding, concrete curb replacement, concrete
sidewalk replacement, temporary and permanent pavement replacement and all
other related and necessary materials, work and equipment required to construct a
complete operable thrust collar.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\O l025.doc
01025-3
Measurement and Payment
July 2007
3.05 FURNISH AND INSTALL LINE STOP ASSEMBLIES - BID ITEM NO.5
A. Description: This bid item describes measurement and payment for line stop
assemblies installed as shown on the plans and/or as described in the
specifications. The pay quantities for the work specified under this Section shall
be the number of line stop assemblies of the types and sizes of pipe specified in
the applicable pay items, actually constructed and accepted.
B. Measurement: Measurement will be on the actual number on line stop
assemblies.
C. Payment: PaYment will be according to the installed number as set forth on the
proposal. The unit price includes furnishing and installing all pipe and materials
above or below ground. This includes all joints and jointing materials, adapters,
pavement removal, making pipe connections, thrust blocking, restraining new and
existing pipe, clearing; sheeting, shoring and bracing; dewatering, excavation;
locating valve boxes, bedding and backfill; compaction and testing, maintenance
of flow, constructing the specified protection and adjusting of existing above
ground and underground utilities and service connections; disposal of soil;
hydrostatic testing; flushing, pigging, cleaning, erosion control; protection of
culverts and drainage facilities, surface restoration, sodding, concrete curb
replacement, concrete sidewalk replacement, temporary pavement replacement
and all other related and necessary materials, work and equipment required to
construct a complete operable pipe line stop assembly.
3.06 FURNISH AND INSTALL 12-INCH DR 11 IDGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE
(HDPE) PIPELINE BY HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL DRILLING AND OPEN
CUT - BID ITEM NO.6
A. Description: This bid item describes measurement and payment for high density
polyethylene pipe installed by horizontal directional drilling (HDD) and open cut
as shown on the drawings.
B. Measurement: Measurement will be horizontally, above the centerline of the
pipe, and includes the length of any valves or fittings.
C. PaYment: The pay quantities for the work specified under this Section shall be the
number of linear feet of the types and sizes of pipe specified in the applicable pay
items, actually constructed and accepted. The unit bid price includes furnishing
all materials, including HDPE pipe, for the sanitary force main, DI/HDPE
mechanical joint adapters, plus all the work, tools, equipment, materials, and
incidentals required to construct the pipe by HDD, as shown on the plans and/or
as described in the specifications, complete, in place, and accepted. The work
includes, but is not limited to assembling, welding, supporting, stringing, pulling,
testing, #8 tracer wire with polyethelene coating, continuity test, marker poles,
locating station, pigging, flushing, cleaning, making pipe connections, test pits,
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\O 1 025.doc
Measurement and Payment
July 2007
01025-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
excavation, backfill, sheeting, shoring, bracing, dewatering, protection of culverts
and drainage facilities, erosion and sedimentation control, maintenance of flow,
by-pass pumping (as required), all restoration including but not limited to
sidewalks, curbs, asphalt, sod, etc; and all incidentals necessary to complete the
work except where such are shown to be paid for under a separate item.
3.07 FURNISH AND INSTALL DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS"' BID ITEM NO.7
A. Description: This bid item describes measurement and payment for Protecto 40 I
lined ductile iron pipe fittings used in installing joints on ductile iron, HDPE, and
PVC pipe used in the construction of the force main.
B. Measurement: The quantity to be paid for under this item is the weight in tons of
ductile iron pipe fittings acceptably installed as shown on the drawings or where
directed by the Project Representative. This bid item includes, but is not limited
to, wyes, tees, bends, crosses, sleeves, plugs and caps and reducers.
C. Payment: Payment will be according to the weight of each fitting as denoted in
the manufacturers' catalogues. The unit bid price includes furnishing and
installing all fittings and materials above or below ground along the pipeline
alignment; joints, and jointing materials; thrust bracing, shoring, and sheeting;
dewatering, clearing, grubbing, and stripping; trenching, bedding and backfill;
constructing the specified protection and adjusting of existing above ground and
underground utilities and service connections; disposal of spoil; poly wrap;
hydrostatic testing; erosion control maintenance of flow, by-pass pumping (as
required), compaction, surface restoration and all other related and necessary
materials, work and equipment required to construct a complete, operable
restrained joint pipeline.
3.08 FURNISH AND INSTALL 6-FOOT FIBERGLASS MANHOLES - BID ITEM NO.
8
A. Description: This bid item describes measurement and payment for fiberglass
reinforced polyester manholes installed as shown on the drawings.
B. Measurement: Measurement will be the actual number of units measured in place
and accepted.
C. Payment: Payment for Fiberglass Manholes shall be made at the price stated in
the bid schedule. The unit bid price includes furnishing and installing the
manhole, excavation, concrete, ring and covers, dewatering, backfill and
compaction, testing, disposal of spoil, all restoration including but not limited to
sidewalks, curbs, asphalt, sod, etc; and all other related and necessary materials,
work, and equipment required to construct the manholes as specified and shown
on the Drawings.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\O 1 025.doc
Measurement and Payment
July 2007
01025-5
3.09 FURNISH AND INSTALL 12:-INCH DR 18 PVC GRAVITY SEWER _ BID ITEM
NO.9
A. Description: This bid item describes measurement and payment for polyvinyl
chloride gravity sewer pipe installed in open cut trenches. The pay quantities for
the work specified under this Section shall be the number of linear feet of the
types and sizes of pipe specified in the applicable pay items, actually constructed
and accepted.
B. Measurement: Measurement will be horizontally, above the centerline of the
pipe.
c. Payment: Payment will be according to the diameter, thickness class, and type of
joint, as set forth on the proposal. The unit bid price includes furnishing and
installing all pipe by open cut, and materials above or below ground along the
pipeline alignment; joints and jointing materials, restraints, making pipe
connections, clearing; sheeting, shoring and bracing; dewatering; excavation;
bedding and backfill; disposal of spoil; testing; flushing; cleaning; erosion
control; protection of culverts and drainage facilities; all restoration including but
not limited to sidewalks, curbs, asphalt, sod, etc; temporary and permanent
pavement replacement; and all other related and necessary materials, work and
equipment required to construct a complete and operable pipeline.
3.10 FURNISH AND INSTALL, 10-INCH, DR18 PVC PIPE FORCE MAIN VIA OPEN
CUT - BID ITEM NO. 10
A. Description: This bid item describes measurement and payment for high density
polyethylene pipe installed in open cut trenches. The pay quantities for the work
specified under this section shall be the number of linear feet of the types and
sizes of pipe specified in the applicable pay items actually constructed and
accepted.
B. Measurement: Measurement will be horizontally above the centerline of the pipe.
C. Payment: Payment will be according to the diameter, thickness class, and type of
joint, as set forth on the proposal, The unit bid price includes furnishing and
installing all pipe by open cut, and materials above or below ground along the
pipeline alignment; pavement removal and disposal, polyethylene encasement,
joints and jointing materials, making pipe connections, maintenance of flow,
bypass pumping as required, thrust blocking, restraints, clearing; sheeting, shoring
and bracing; dewatering, excavation; bedding and backfill; compaction and
testing; protection and adjusting of existing above ground and under ground
utilities and service connections; disposal of spoil; tracer wire, identification tape,
marker poles and/or locating valve boxes, hydrostatic testing; flushing, pigging,
cleaning, erosion control; protection of culverts and drainage facilities, surface
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\O I 025.doc
. 01025-6
Measurement and Payment
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
restoration, sodding, concrete curb replacement, concrete sidewalk replacement,
temporary pavement replacement and all other related and necessary materials,
work and equipment required to construct a complete and operable pipeline.
3.11 FURNISH ANI) INSTALL BY JACK AND BORE, 54-INCH BY 5/8-INCH
CASING - BID ITEM NO. 11
A. Description: This bid describes measurement and payment for furnishing and
installing the casing by the jack and bore method as shown on the drawings. This
includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to
complete the jack and bore.
B. Measurement: The quantity to be paid for under this item shall be lump sum for
the jack and bore complete, installed as shown on the drawings.
C. Payment: The unit bid price includes, but is not limited to, furnishing and
installing all casings, casing spacers, alignment, thrust bracing, shoring, and
sheeting; dewatering, erosion and sediment control, testing, clearing, grubbing,
and stripping; trenching, bedding and backfill, compaction and testing, protection
and adjusting of existing above ground and underground utilities and service
connections; disposal of spoil; hydrostatic testing; erosion control, maintenance of
flow, by-pass pumping (as required), all restoration including but not limited to
storm pipes and appurtenances, sidewalks, curbs, asphalt, sod, etc; surface
restoration and all other related and necessary materials, work and equipment
required to construct a complete jack and bore. Payment for carrier pipes will be
paid from other applicable unit prices.
3.12 PLACE EXISTING GRAVITY SEWER OUT OF SERVICE - BID ITEM NO. 12
A. Description: This bid item shall be for the Contractor to place existing sewer out
of service. The unit bid price shall include all labor and materials to cut and plug
the existing sewer main and lateral piping and to fill with grout.
B. Measurement: The price shall also include the removal and disposal of the top
five feet of existing manholes to be placed out of service and to fill the remainder
of the manhole and piping with grout. Also included in this price shall be all saw
cutting, capping, clearing, sheeting, shoring and bracing, flushing, dewatering,
excavation, erosion control, all restoration including but not limited to sidewalks,
curbs, asphalt, sod, etc; temporary and permanent pavement replacement and
markings and all other related work and materials required to place the existing
sewer out of service.
C. Payment: Payment for placing sewer out of service shall be on a lump sum basis
at the price bid as set forth in the proposal.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\O I025.doc
Measurement and Payment
July 2007
01025-7
3.13 PLACE EXISTING 24-INCH FORCE MAIN OUT OF SERVICE - BID ITEM NO.
13
A. Description: This bid item shall be for the Contractor to place the existing force
main out of service. The unit bid price shall include all labor and materials to cut
and plug the existing force main and to fill with grout.
B. Measurement: The price shall include the placing of the existing 24-inch force
main out of service and filling the remainder of the piping with grout. Also
included in this price shall be all saw cutting, capping, clearing, sheeting, shoring
and bracing, flushing, dewatering, excavation, erosion control, restoration, all
restoration including but not limited to sidewalks, curbs, asphalt, sod, etc;
temporary and permanent pavement replacement and markings, and all other
related work and materials required to place the existing sewer out of service.
C. Payment: Payment for placing the existing 24-inch force main out of service shall
be on a lump sum basis at the price bid as set forth in the proposal.
3.14 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL - BID ITEM NO. 14
A. Description: The Contractor shall make any additional earth excavation which
may be ordered by the Engineer in writing to remove unsuitable material. All
unsuitable material such as muck, clay, rock, etc., below the earthwork grade (top
of the sub-base grade) must be excavated and removed from the site. The limits
of work will either be shown on the plans or determined by the Engineer in the
field. The work includes all clearing, pavement, sidewalk, curb and curb and
gutter removal, care of structures and adjacent property, placing, maintenance,
and removal of shoring, sheeting, and bracing,. removal of water, backfilling,
disposal of surplus excavated material, temporary restoration of street surfaces
and other appurtenant work as specified and directed.
B. Measurement: The quantity of unsuitable material removal, in cubic yards, to be
measured for payment under this Item will be the total excavation, as ordered and
approved by the Engineer, beyond and outside the established lines and grades
which would have controlled and been maintained had not the additional
excavation been ordered. Additional earth excavation for placement of selected
fill material other than that for pipe bedding or to permit construction of other
types of pipeline foundations will be included for payment under this Item.
Unauthorized additional earth excavation will not be measured or paid for.
C. Payment: Payment for Unsuitable Material Removal ordered in writing by the
Engineer will be made at the unit price per cubic yard for this Item.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\O 1 025.doc
01025-8
Measurement and Payment
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.15 ADDITIONAL SELECT FILL MATERIAL - BID ITEM NO. 15
A. Description: The Contractor shall furnish, from sources other than excavations
made in this Contract, transport, place and compact select fill material as ordered
by the Engineer in writing and not specifically included under other Items. The
work also includes disposal of surplus excavated material and all labor and
equipment. Excavation for placement of select fill will be paid for under other
Bid Items. The work does not include transporting, placing and compacting
approved surplus fill from excavations made in this Contract. The Contractor
shall use all such approved surplus fill available from excavations made in this
Contract prior to supplying select fill from other sources.
B. Measurement: The quantities of Additional Select Fill Material, obtained from
sources other than excavations in this Contract, in cubic yards, to be measured for
payment under this Item will be the actual compacted volume of select sand
placed within the payment limits shown on the Plans or established by the
Engineer. Select fill used to fill voids resulting from unauthorized excavation, or
where required for dewatering, will not be measured for payment even though
their use is ordered by the Engineer. Select fill used for pipe bedding will not be
measured for payment under this Item. Such select fill is included in the various
unit price Items for pipelines.
C. Payment: Payment for Additional Select Fill Material ordered by the Engineer in
writing will be made at the unit price per cubic yard for this Item. No payment
will be made under this Item for approved surplus fill obtained from excavations
made in this Contract.
3.16 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE - BID ITEM NO. 16
A. Description: The Contractor shall furnish and place any miscellaneous concrete
ordered by the Engineer in writing and not specifically included under other
Items. Included in this item are standard non-reinforced pipe cradles,
encasements, and like work not shown on the Plans or specified. The work
includes all materials, mixing, placing, forming, and curing of the concrete, and
work incidental thereto. Excavation for the placement of Miscellaneous Concrete
will be paid for under other Bid Items.
B. Measurement: The quantity of Miscellaneous Concrete, in cubic yards, to be
measured for payment under this Item will be the actual volume of concrete
placed in the work, measured in place, within the lines and grades as ordered. All
concrete placed outside these lines and grades to fill unauthorized excavation, and
all concrete for replacing defective work, shall be at the expense of the
Contractor. Concrete specifically included under other Items will not be
measured, or paid for, under this Item.
C. Payment: Payment for Miscellaneous Concrete will be made at the unit price per
cubic yard for this Item.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\O 1 025.doc
Measurement and Payment
July 2007
01025-9
3.17 FURNISH AND INSTALL BY LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION _ BID ITEM
NO. 17
A. Description: This bid describes measurement and payment for furnishing and
installing the landscaping and irrigation as shown on the drawings. This includes
furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to complete the
work.
B. Measurement: The quantity to be paid for under this item shall be lump sum for
the landscaping and irrigation complete, as shown on the drawings.
C. Payment: The unit bid price includes, but is not limited to, furnishing and
installing all plant materials; reclaimed water tap and pipe installation, clearing,
grubbing, grading, soils, fertilization, mulch, and irrigation system; trenching,
bedding and backfill, compaction and testing, protection and adjusting of existing
above ground and underground utilities and service connections, and all other
related and necessary materials, work and equipment required to construct
complete the landscaping and irrigation as shown.
3.18 CONTINGENCY - BID ITEM NO. 18
A. Description: The work covered by this item consists of unforeseen items of work
not included in other bid items but necessary for accomplishing the work and
shall apply only to extra work or additional items over and above those specified
or shown on the plans. The cost of this additional work shall be agreed upon in
writing and approved by the Director of Utilities Engineering or his authorized
representative prior to starting this additional work, The value of the work shall be
based on unit prices or similar bid items called for in the proposal.
B. Measurement: The quantities of unspecified work to be paid under this item shall
be measured in place, completed and accepted.
C. Payment: The Owner has calculated this item on the Bid Form, and has
established the item total to be used in calculating the total Base Bid. This item
will be treated as a contingency, against which the Owner, at his discretion, may
direct work not shown on the plans, or require other additional work which falls
within the general scope work for the project, as approved in writing from the
Owner. The final project change order shall include all additional costs approved
under the contingency. This item is for contingency if required during the course
of the project to facilitate the project, and will be paid only after written
authorization to include the item in the progress payments.
TBE Group, Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\O l025.doc
01025-10
Measurement and Payment
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.19 ALTERNATE BID - DEMOLITION OF EXISTING PUMP STATION 16AND
SITE RESTORATION- BID ITEM NO. 19 (A. W ARDED AT THE DISCRETION
OF THE CITY)
A. Description: The work consists of furnishing all labor, equipment and materials
for demolition of the existing Pump Station 16.
B. Measurement: The quantity to be paid for under this Item shall be measured as
one lump sum quantity.
C. Payment: Payment of the lump sum agreed on in the bid form shall be full
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals
required to demolish the existing Pump Station 16 and restore the area to match
existing conditions. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, full
compensation for removal of existing pumps, motors, piping, valves, fuel storage
tank, overhead crane, standby generator, air compressor, doors, electrical controls
and conduit and other miscellaneous equipment within the pump station building;
demolition of the building to include clearing and grubbing, sheeting and shoring,
dewatering, sodding and pegging, saw cutting, complete removal and disposal of
all materials to three feet below grade, backfill with clean fill and compaction; all
restoration including but not limited to. sidewalks, curbs, asphalt, sod, etc;
removal of all yard piping and electrical conduit as shown on the plans, and
capping of piping and conduit where cut; and all other work and appurtenances to
complete the demolition and final restoration of ground surfaces to match
existing. Contractor shall coordinate with the city's engineer, the power company
and other utilities.
In addition, materials from the wet well, piping, pumps, motors, etc. shall be
removed and disposed of in accordance with City and State regulations.
The materials survey and laboratory analysis conducted at Pump Station 16
indicated that materials sampled such as the cloth insulation wrapping and flange
gaskets, were found to contain asbestos in amounts exceeding one (1) percent. A
Florida Licensed Asbestos Abatement Contractor must remove and dispose of all
these materials prior to Demolition. A copy of the disposal manuscript shall be
provided to the City.
END OF SECTION
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\O 1 025.doc
Measurement and Payment
July 2007
01025-11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01046
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND
EQUIPMENT
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals
required to modify, alter and/or convert existing structures as shown or specified.
B. Existing structures, piping, and equipment shall be removed and dismantled as
necessary for the installation of the new equipment in accordance with the
requirements herein specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall cut, repair, reuse, excavate, demolish or otherwise remove
parts of the existing structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the Drawings,
herein specified, or necessary to permit completion of the work under this
Contract. He shall dispose of surplus materials resulting from the above work in
an approved manner. The above work shall include the cutting of grooves and
chases in existing masonry to permit the proper bonding of new masonry to old,
repainting of existing masonry, the drilling of holes into existing masonry for the
purpose of setting dowel rods, anchor bolts, or other appurtenances, and the
cutting of holes in masonry for the installation of pipe, conduits, and other
appurtenances. The work shall included all necessary cutting and bending of
reinforcing steel, structural steel, or miscellaneous metal work found embedded in
the existing structures.
B. No existing structure, equipment, or appurtenance shall be shifted, cut, removed,
or otherwise altered except with the express approval of and to the extent
approved by the OwnerlEngineer.
C. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making
openings in walls and partitions, the Contractor shall take all precautions and use
THE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\0008302 t .06\DOC\Specs\0 t 046.doc
Modifications to Existing Structures. Pioimz. and Eauioment
01046-1 July 2007
all necessary barriers and other protective devices so as not to damage the
structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work, not to damage the
structures or contents by falling or flying debris.
D. Materials and equipment removed in the course of making alterations and
additions shall remain the property of the Owner, except that items not
salvageable, as determined by the Engineer and the Owner shall become the
property of the Contractor to be disposed of by him off the site of the work at his
own place of disposal. Operating equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and then
lubricated and greased for protection during prolonged storage.
E. All work of altering existing structures shall be done at such time and in such
manner as will comply with the approved time schedule. So far as possible before
any part of the Work is started, all tools, equipment, and materials shall be
assembled and made ready so that the work can be completed without delay.
F. All workmanship and new materials involved in constructing the alterations shall
conform to the Specifications for the classes of work insofar as such
specifications are applicable.
G. All cutting of existing masonry or other material to provide suitable bonding to
new work shall be done in a manner to meet the requirements of the respective
Section of these Specifications covering the new work. When not covered, the
work shall be carried on in the manner and to extent directed by the
Owner/Engineer.
H. Where holes in existing masonry are required to be sealed, unless otherwise
herein specified, they shall be sealed with cement mortar or concrete. The sides
of the openings shall be provided with keyed joints and shall be suitably
roughened to furnish a good bond and make a watertight joint. All loose or
unsound material adjacent to the opening shall be removed, and if necessary,
replaced with new material. The method of placing the mortar seal shall provide a
suitable means of releasing entrapped air.
I. Surfaces of seals visible in the completed work shall be made to match as nearly
as possible the adjacent surfaces.
J. Nonshrink grout shall be used for setting wall castings, sleeves, doweling anchors
into existing concrete and elsewhere as shown.
3.02 CLEANING EXISTING STRUCTURES
A. Before commencing work on each structure, the Contractor shall remove and
dispose of, away from the site, any sand, sludge, and other solids remaining in
such structures.
END OF SECTION
THE GrouD. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\0 1046.doc
Modifications to Existinl! Structures. Pioinl!:. and Eauioment
01046-2 luly 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01310
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. A color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule is to be delivered at
the Preconstruction Meeting. Since the Notice to Proceed date will be decided at
this meeting, this schedule will be a sequence of events that the NTP date can be
inserted into.
B. Submit revised progress schedules to maintain proposed schedule within 30 days
of work in place.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Conditions of the Contract.
B. Section 01010: Summary of Work.
C. Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Produce Data, and Samples.
1.03 FORM OF SCHEDULES
A. Prepare schedules in the form of:
1. Critical Path Method (CPM)
2. Horizontal Bar Chart.
3. Network Analysis System.
4. Other Method Accepted by Owner.
B. Format of Listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work.
1.04 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES
A. Construction Progress Schedule:
1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity.
2. Show the dates for the beginning, and completion of each major element
of construction. Specifically list:
a) Site clearing.
b) Site utilities.
c) Foundation work.
d) Structural framing.
e) Subcontractor work.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\OOO83021.06\DOC\Specs\0131 O.doc
0131O-}
Construction Schedules
July 2007
f) Equipment installations.
g) Delivery of 0 & M Manuals.
h) Finishings.
i) Start-up
B. Submittals, Schedule for Shop Drawings,. Product Data and Samples. Show:
I. The dates for Contractor's Submittals.
2. The dates revised submittals will be required from the Engineer.
C. Provide sub schedules to defme critical portions of prime schedules.
1.05 PROGRESS REVISIONS
A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission.
B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule:
1. Major changes in scope.
2. Activities modified since previous submission.
3. Revised projections of progress and completion.
4. Other identifiable changes.
C. Provide a narrative report as needed to defme:
I. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule.
2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect.
3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors.
1.06 SUBMISSIONS
A. Submit initial schedules within 10 days after the effective date of the Agreement.
I. Engineer will review schedules and return review copy within 10 days
after receipt.
2. Ifrequired, resubmit within seven days after return of review copy.
B. With each application for payment, submit progress schedule if revised since last
payment request.
C. Submit one reproducible transparency which will be returned to the Contractor,
plus two copies which will be retained by the Engineer.
1.07 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to:
1. Job site file.
2. Subcontractors.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\0 131 O.doc
Construction Schedules
July 2007
01310-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Other concerned parties.
B. Instruct recipients to report promptly to the Contractor, in writing, any problems
anticipated by the projections shown in the schedules.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\0 131 O.doc
Construction Schedules
July 2007
01310-3
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
a
SECTION 01340
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples required by Contract Documents.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Definitions and Additional Responsibilities of Parties: Conditions of the
Contract.
B. Section 01700 Contract Closeout.
1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit detailed and dimensioned working
shop drawings showing the construction of the proposed facility and installation
of all equipment complete in every respect. Each drawing shall be indexed and/or
referenced to the Contract Drawings and Specifications. No work upon the
manufacture or fabrication of any equipment shall be performed until the
Engineer has reviewed and returned the shop drawings marked with "make
corrections as noted or no exceptions taken." The Contractor shall also submit
layout drawings showing exact installation, piping and details for the units being
submitted.
B. The Contractor shall review, approve and sign all shop drawings. Contractor is
responsible for dimensions and field conditions. Any deviations from plans or
specifications shall be clearly shown.
C. Drawings shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner.
D. Details shall be identified by reference of sheet and detail or schedule.
E. Minimum sheet size: 8-1/2 X 11 inches.
1.04 PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation
1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models.
2. Show performance characteristics and capacities.
3. Show dimensions and clearances required.
TBE GrouD. IDe.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\0 I 340.doc
ShOD Drawimzs. Product Data. and SamDles
July 2007
01340-1
4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.
B. Manufacture's standard schematic drawings and diagrams:
1. Modify drawings and diagrams by deleting information which is not
applicable to the work.
2. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically
applicable to the work.
1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples prior to submission.
B. Determine and verify:
1. Field measurements.
2. Field construction criteria.
3. Catalog numbers and similar data.
4. Conformance with specifications.
C. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the Work and of the Contract
Documents.
D. Notify the Engineer in writing, at time of submission, of any deviations in the
submittals from requirements of the contract Documents.
E. Begin no fabrication or work which requires approved submittals until return of
submittals by Engineer
1.06 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make submittals in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work.
B. Number of submittals required:
1. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit four (4) copies.
2. Samples: Submit the quantity stated in each specification section.
C. Submittals shall contain:
1. The date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions.
2. The Project title and number.
3. Contract identification.
4. The names of:
a) Contractor
b) Supplier
c) Manufacturer
S. Identification of the product, with the specification section number.
6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.
7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials.
TBE Group. Inc.
J:\OOO83\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\0 1340.doc
01340-2
Shoo Drawinl!s. Product Data and Samoles
July 2007
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:1
I
I
a
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
t
I
i
I
If
I
I
1-
1.07
1.08
8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers.
9. Identifications of deviations from Contract Documents.
10. . Identification of revisions on resubmittals.
11. An 8-inch X 3.5-inch blank space for Contractor and Engineer stamps.
12. CONTRACTOR'S stamp intitialed or signed, certifying to review of
submittal, verification of products, field measurements and field
construction criteria and coordination of the information within the
submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract Documents.
RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make any corrections or changes in the submittals noted by the Engineer and
resubmit unless otherwise noted.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data:
1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial
submittal.
2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those suggested by
the Engineer.
C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.
ENGINEER'S DUTIES
A. Review submittals within 14 days or in accord with the schedule.
B. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate status of submittal.
C. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or resubmission.
D. Review initial submittals and one resubmittal. Resubmittals that cannot be
approved will be returned. Additional resubmittals will be reviewed by the
Engineer, and costs for time and materials for reviewing resubmittals will be back
charged by the Engineer to the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
THE Group. Inc.
J:\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\0 1340.doc
01340-3
Shoo Drawinl!:s. Product Data. and Samnles
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
j
I
I'
I
I
I'
I
I
SECTION 01370
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Submit to the Engineer a Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of
the Work, within ten days after award of contract.
B. Upon the request of the Engineer, support the values with data which will
substantiate their correctness.
C. The Schedule of Values, unless objected to by the Engineer, shall be used only as
the basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment.
D. Related Requirements in Other Parts of the Contract Documents.
1. Agreement
2. General Conditions
3. Supplementary Conditions
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01600: Material and Equipment.
1.03 FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALVES
A. Type schedule on 8-I/2-inch X II-inch white paper; Contractor's standard forms
and automated printout will be considered for approval by Engineer upon
Contractors request. Identify schedule with:
1. Title of Project, location and (City, County, Owner) Project Number.
2. Engineer and Engineer's Project number.
3. Name and Address of Contractor.
4. Date of Submission.
B. Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the Work, in
sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments
during construction.
C. Follow the table of contents of these Specifications as the format for listing
component items.
1. Identify each line item with the number and title of the respective major
section of the specifications.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\OI370.doc
01370-1
Schedule of Values
July 2007
D. For each major line item list sub-values of:
1. Major products or operations under the item.
2. Contract conditions, such as: bonds, insurance premiums, job
mobilization, construction facilities and temporary controls.
E. For the various portions of the Work:
1. Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor's
overhead and profit.
2. For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored
materials, break down the value into:
a. The cost of the materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid.
b. The total installed value.
F. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Sum.
1.04 SUBSCHEDULE OF UNIT MATERIAL VALUES
A. Submit a sub schedule of unit costs and quantities for:
1. Products specified under a unit cost allowance in Section 01020.
2. Products on which progress payments will be requested for stored
products.
B. The form of submittal shall parallel that of the Schedule of Values, with each item
identified the same as the line item in the Schedule of Values.
C. The unit quantity for bulk materials shall include an allowance for normal waste.
D. The unit values for the materials shall be broken down into:
1. Cost of the material, delivered and unloaded at the site, with taxes paid.
2. Installation costs, including Contractor's overhead and profit.
E. The installed unit value multiplied by the quantity listed shall equal the cost of
that item in the. Schedule of Values.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
TBE Group. Ine.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\O 13 70.doc
Schedule ofVaIues
July 2007
01370-2
I
I
I
I
M
I
I
I
I
,I
I
i
I
I
~-~,
i
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
.1
I
,
I
I
:1
I
.j
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01600
MATERIALAND EQUIPMENT
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Products.
B. Workmanship.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions.
D. Transportation and Handling.
E. Storage and Protection
F. Substitutions and Product Options.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01010: Summary of Work.
B. Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
C. Section 01700: Contract Closeout.
1.03 PRODUCTS
A. Products include material, equipment, and systems.
B. Comply with Specifications and referenced standards as minimum requirements.
C. Components required to be supplied in quantity within a Specification section
shall be the same, and shall be interchangeable.
1.04 WORKMANSIDP
A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances of
specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise
workmanship.
B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship for specified quality.
THE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\0 1600.doc
01600-1
Material and EQuioment
July 2007
C. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to
withstand stresses, vibration, and racking.
1.05
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. When work is specified to comply with manufacturer's instructions, submit copies
as specified in Section 01340, and distribute copies to persons involved, and
maintain one set in field office.
B. Perform work in accordance with details of instructions and specified
requirements. Should a conflict exist between Specifications and instructions,
consult with the Engineer.
1.06
TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle products, including those
provided by Owner, by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or
packaging.
B. Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent scraping,
marring or otherwise damaging products or surrounding surfaces.
C. Handle products by methods to prevent bending or overstressing.
D. Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points.
1.07
STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and
labels intact and legible. Store sensitive Products in weather-tight enclosures and
maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's
instructions.
B. For exterior storage of fabricated Products, place on supports above ground.
Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; and
provide ventilation to avoid condensation.
C. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent
mixing with foreign matter.
D. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure
Products are undamaged, and are maintained under required conditions.
E. After installation, provide coverings to protect Products from damage from traffic
and construction operations. Remove when no longer needed.
THE GrouB. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\0 1600.doc
Material and Eauinment
July 2007
01600-2
I
I
j
~I
I
I
I
,I
,I
I
I-
'k
1-
:1.
i
I
I
,(
1
I
I
'I
I
I
,
'I
t
I
Ii
I
I
'I
I
II
I
I
I
,I
F. During such periods of time that are designated by the United States Weather
Bureau as being a hurricane warning or alert, construction materials or equipment
shall be secured against displacement by wind forces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
THE GrouD. Inc:.
J :\00083\00083021 .06\DOC\Specs\0 1 600.doc
01600-3
Material and EauiDment
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a
I
I
I
a
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01650
STARTING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Provide material and labor required to perform start-up of each respective item of
equipment and system. Start-up shall include: adjustment and balance
procedures.
1. Provide information and assistance required, cooperate with test, adjust
and balance services.
B. Comply strictly with specified procedures in starting up mechanical systems.
C. Provide Factory Service Representative to check equipment and certify to its
proper installation prior to start-up and during start-up and testing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Each Specification Section as Applicable.
1.03 START-UP PROCEDURES
A. Bearings:
1. Inspect for cleanliness, clean and remove foreign materials.
2. Verify alignment.
3. Replace defective bearings, and those which run rough or noisy.
4. Grease as necessary, and in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Drives:
1. Adjust tension in V -belt drives, and adjust varipitch sheaves and drives for
proper equipment speed.
2. Adjust drives for alignment of sheaves and V-belts.
3. Clean, remove foreign materials before starting operation.
C. Motors:
1. Check each motor for amperage comparison to nameplate value.
2. Correct conditions which produce excessive current flow, and which exist
due to equipment malfunction.
D. Pumps:
1. Check mechanical seals for cleanliness and adjustment before running
pump.
THE GrouD. Inc:.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\O I 650.doc
01650-1
Startinl!: of Mechanical Svstems
July 2007
1. Contract Document requirements have been met.
2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.
4. All minor deficiencies have been corrected or completed and the Work is
ready for fmal inspection.
5. Project record documents are complete and submitted.
B. Within a reasonable time upon receipt of such certification, the ENGINEER will
make an inspection to verify the status of completion.
C. Should the ENGINEER determine that the work is incomplete or defective:
1. The ENGINEER will promptly notify the CONTRACTOR in writing,
listing the incomplete or defective work.
2. CONTRACTOR shall remedy the deficiencies in the work and send a
second written certification to the ENGINEER that the Work is complete.
3. Upon receipt of the second certification, the ENGINEER will reinspect the
Work.
D. When the ENGINEER determines that the work is acceptable, under the Contract
Documents, he shall request the CONTRACTOR to make closeout submittals.
1.04 FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute prior to final inspection.
B. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean other surfaces.
C. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the
Project and from the site.
1.05 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents
1. At Contract closeout, submit documents with transmitta1letter containing
date, Project title, CONTRACTOR'S name and address, list of
documents, and signature of CONTRACTOR.
2. Drawings; Legibly marked to record actual construction:
a) Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
Data shall be in State Plane coordinates utilizing the 1983/90
horizontal NAD and the 1988 vertical NGVD.
b) Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a surveyor registered in the
State of Florida.
c) One signed and sealed project set, plus two additional signed and
sealed sets for each permitted utility shall be submitted to the City.
THE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\0 1700.doc
Contract Closeout
July 2007
01700-2
I
I,
I
I
I
I
Ii
~
,I
I
I
V
I
I
I
I
I
il
. '
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I,
I
I,
.1
I
I
I
I
Ii
I
I
O. Vent gases trapped in any part of systems.
1. Verify that liquids are drained from all parts of gas or air systems.
P. Check piping for leaks at every joint, and at every screwed, flanged, or welded
connection, using "Leak- Tek" or other approved compound.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART3- EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
THE Group. Ioe.
J:\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\0 I 650.doc
01650-3
Startine: of Mechanical Systems
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
,I
t
I,
I'
I
I
I
.
I
,
I
I
I
I
d) Record Drawings should also be submitted to the City on disk in
. .dwg (Autodesk AutoCADD Release 14 or later).
3. Specifications and Addenda; Legibly mark each Section to record.
4. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
B. Evidence of payment and Release of Liens.
1.06 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Engineer.
B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum.
1. The original Contract sum.
2. Additions and deductions resulting from:
a) Previous change orders or written amendment.
b) Allowances
c) Unit prices
d) Deductions for uncorrected work.
e) Penalties and bonuses
f) Deductions for liquidated damages
g) Other adjustments
3. Total Contract Sum as adjusted
4. Previous payments
5. Sum remaining due
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
TOE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\0008302l.06\DOC\Specs\0 l700.doc
01700-3
Contract Closeout
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I~
SECTION 01730
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's
maintenance and operations of products specified.
1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as
referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications.
B. Provide Factory Service Representative to instruct Owner's personnel In
maintenance of products and in operation of equipment and systems.
C. Provide Operation and Maintenance Date Sufficient to meet [EP A Operation and
Maintenance Manual Requirements].
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples.
B. Section 01700: Contract Closeout.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preparation of data shall be done by factory personnel:
1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described
products.
2. Familiar with requirements of this Section.
3. Skilled as technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential
data
4. Skilled as draftsman competent to prepare required drawings.
5. Familiar with [EPA] Operation and Maintenance Manual requirements.
1.04 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.
B. Provide three (3) preliminary review copies for Engineer's review and acceptance
per Section 01340. Upon acceptance, submit ten (10) final copies in boxes
indicating contents.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J:\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\O 1730.doc
ODeratinl!: and Maintenance Data
July 2007
01730-1
THE GraDo. Ioc.
J:\OOO83\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\0 1730.doc
01730-2
ODeratin2 and Maintenance Data
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
'I
I
I
il
t
-
I
I
I
C. Format:
1. Size: 8-1/2 inches X 11 inches.
2. Paper: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten:
3. Drawings:
a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text.
b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages.
4. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating
equipment.
a. Provide typed description of product, and major component parts
of equipment.
b. Provide indexed tabs.
5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING
AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS." List:
a. Title and Project.
b. Identity of separate structure as applicable.
c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
D. Binders:
1. Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic
covers.
2. Maximum ring size: Three inch.
3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent
groupings.
1.05 CONTENT OF MANUAL
A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic
order.
1. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the
volume.
2. List, with each product, name, address and telephone number of:
a. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
b. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
3. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as
set forth in Contract Documents.
B. Product Data:
1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.
2. Annotate each sheet to:
a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed.
b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation.
c. Delete references to inapplicable information.
C. Drawings
1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate:
a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
I
I
1/
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. Control of flow diagrams.
D. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures.
Provide logical sequence of instruction for each procedure.
E. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued.
1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel:
a. Proper procedures in event of failure.
b. Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1.06 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
Not Used.
1.07 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Submit ten copies of complete manual in final form.
B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate:
1. Description of unit and component parts.
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable
parts.
2. Operating procedures.
a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency
instructions.
c. Summer and winter operating instructions.
d. Special operating instructions.
3. Maintenance Procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "Trouble-shooting.
c. Disassembly, repair and re-assembly.
d. Alignment, adjusting and checking.
4. Servicing and lubricants required.
a List of lubricants required.
5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer.
7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and
diagrams required for maintenance.
a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear.
b. Items recommended to be stocked as parts.
8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\0 1 730.doc
Ooeratinl!: and Maintenance Data
July 2007
01730-3
C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate:
1. Description of system and component parts.
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable
parts.
2. Circuit directories of panel boards.
a. Electrical service.
b. Controls.
c. Communications.
3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
4. Operating procedures:
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Sequences required.
c. Special operating instructions.
5. Maintenance procedures:
a. Routing operations.
b. Guide to trouble shooting.
c. Disassembly, repair and re-assembly.
d. Adjustment and checking.
6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices,
and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
8. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of Specifications.
D. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent
during instruction of Owner's personriel.
E. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data: Respective Sections
of Specifications.
F. Provide complete information for products specified in:
1. Section 11305: Submersible Sewage Pumps, Controls and Panels.
2. Section 16051: Electrical Work - Sewage Pumping Station.
3. Other items as may be individually specified within the sections.
1.08 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form prior to 50
percent completion of project.
B. Changes and Corrections to approved data due to construction adjustments shall
be submitted prior to substantial completion of the project.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\01730.doc
01730-4
ODeratinl!: and Maintenance Data
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.09 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, provide Factory Representative to fully
instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in operation,
adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems.
B. Operating and Maintenance Manual shall constitute the basis of instruction.
1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all
aspects of operations and maintenance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
THE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\O 1730.doc
Ooeratine: and Maintenance Data
July 2007
01730-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02050
BUILDING DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Demolish designated structures.
B. Remove materials from site.
C. Remove hazardous materials.
D. Remove foundations.
E. Remove underground tanks and piping, unless noted otherwise.
F. Disconnect, cap, remove and identify utilities.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.
B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit demolition and removal procedures and schedule under provisions of
Section 01340.
1.04 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent structures.
B. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.
C. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private thoroughfares.
Maintain protected egress and access at all times.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
THE GrouD. Ine.
J :\00083\0008302] .06\DOC\Specs\02050.doc
02050-1
Buildinl!:. Demolition
July 2007
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATIONS
A. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing and
shoring.
B. Protect existing landscaping materials, appurtenances, structures, which are not to
be demolished.
C. Disconnect, remove and cap designated utility lines within demolition areas.
D. Mark location of disconnected utilities. Identify utilities and indicate capping
locations on Project Record Documents.
E. Drain, flush and clean the wet well.
F. Remove all oils, grease, lubricants, fuels, etc form motors, tanks pumps, etc and
dispose in accordance with applicable laws.
G. Materials from the wet well, piping, pumps, motors, etc. shall be removed and
disposed of in accordance with City and State regulations.
3.02 EXECUTION
A. The materials survey and laboratory analysis conducted at Pump Station 16
indicated that materials sampled such as the cloth insulation wrapping and flange
gaskets, were found to contain asbestos in amounts exceeding one (1) percent. A
Florida Licensed Asbestos Abatement Contractor must remove and dispose of all
these materials prior to Demolition. A copy of the disposal manuscript shall be
provided to the City.
B. Demolish indicated structures and appurtenances in an orderly and careful
manner, and in accordance with staging requirements.
C. Cease operations and notify Engineer immediately if adjacent structures appear to
be endangered. Do not resume operations until corrective measures have been
taken.
D. Except where noted otherwise, immediately remove demolished material from
site.
E. Remove materials to be re-installed or retained in a manner to prevent damage.
TOE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\OOC\Specs\02050.doc
Building Demolition
July 2007
02050-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Store and protect under provisions of Section 01600.
E. Remove and promptly dispose of contaminated, vermin infested, or dangerous
materials encountered.
F. Do not bum or bury materials on site.
G. Remove concrete slabs on grade.
H. Keep work sprinkled to minimize dust. Provide hoses and watermain or hydrant
connections for this purpose.
I. Backfill areas excavated, open pits and holes caused as a result of demolition.
Use backfill specified in Section 02220.
J. Rough grade and compact areas affected by demolition to maintain site grades
and contours.
K. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Leave site in clean
condition.
PART 4 - ASBESTOS
4.01.1 ASBESTO CONTAINING MATERIALS (ACM)
A. Cutting, removing, handling and disposing of ACM shall be in accordance with
applicable laws and ordinances.
B. The Contractor shall employ the services of a subcontractor who is licensed in the
State of Florida, including, but not limited to, licensing under Chapter 455, to
perform asbestos abatement and who has a minimum of five years experience as a
licensed asbestos abatement contractor. Contractor shall verify that the
subcontractor has the appropriate license and experience.
C. Contractor shall ensure that the subcontractor complies with all laws, ordinances,
codes, rules and regulations of local, state and federal authorities including, but
not limited to:
1) Ch. 255, Fla. Stat. (Public Property and Publicly Owned Buildings)
2) Ch. 255, Fla. Stat. (Regulation of Professionals and Occupations)
3) Fla. Admin. Code Ch. 21-25 (Asbestos Consultants)
4) Fla. Admin. Code Ch. 21E-15 (Certification and Registration)
5) Fla. Admin. Code Ch. 21H-28 (Asbestos Consultants)
6) Fla. Admin. Code Ch. 381-40 (Asbestos Management Program
ln1plementation)
7) Fla. Admin. Code Ch. 62-257 (Asbestos Removal)
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\02050.doc
Buildine Demolition
July 2007
02050-3
8) 29 U.S.C. Ch. 15 (Occupational Safety and Health)
9) 29 C.F.R., Part 1910 (Worker Protection Measures)
10) 29 C.F.R., Part 1926 (Safety and Health Regulations for Construction)
11) 32 C.F.R., Part 650, Subpart D (Air Pollution Abatement Standards and
Procedures.
12) 40 C.F.R., Part 61 (National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air
Pollutants)
13) 40. C.F.R., Part 763 (Asbestos) .
14) 40 C.F.R., Parts 171 and 172 (Transportation of Asbestos Containing
Waste Materials)
D. Contractor shall ensure that the subcontractor executes all notifications and
manifest or transfer and disposal, and obtain all applicable permits and licenses
for cutting, removing, handling and disposing of ACM.
END OF SECTION
TBE GrouD. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\02050.doc
Buildinl!: Demolition
Iuly 2007
02050-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02220
STRUCTURE EXCA VA TION AND BACKFILL
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work included under this Section consists of clearing, excavating, backfilling
and grading required for the construction of the structure(s) as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein.
B. Definitions:
1. Maximum Density: Maximum weight in pounds per cubic foot of a
specific material.
2. Optimum Moisture: Percentage of water m a specific material at
maximum density.
3. Rock Excavation: Excavation of any hard natural substance which
required the use of explosives and/or special impact tools such as jack
hammers, sledges, chisels or similar devices specifically designed for use
in cutting or breaking rock, but exclusive of trench excavating machinery.
C. Plan For Excavation: The Contractor shall be responsible for having determined
to his satisfaction, prior to the submission of his bid, the conformation of the
ground, the character and quality of the substrata, the types and quantities of
materials to be encountered, the nature of the groundwater conditions, the
prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions and all other matters
which can in any way affect the work under this Contract. At the pre-construction
conference, the Contractor shall submit a plan of the proposed operations to the
Engineer for approval. The Contractor shall consider, and his plan for excavation
shall reflect, the equipment and methods to be employed in the excavation. The
prices established in the Proposal for the work to be done will reflect all costs
pertaining to the work. No claims for extras based on substrata or groundwater
table conditions will be allowed.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. A Testing Laboratory retained by the Contractor will make such tests as are
deemed advisable. The Contractor shall schedule his work so as to permit a
reasonable time for testing before placing succeeding lifts and shall keep the
laboratory informed of his progress.
THE GrouD. IDe.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\02220.doc
02220-1
Structure Excavation and Backfill
July 2007
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clearing:
1. The construction site shall be cleared of all obstructions and vegetation~
including large roots and undergrowth, within IO-feet of the lines of
excavation.
2. Strip and stockpile topsoil.
B. Removals: Complete all removals within the lines of excavation pnor to
beginning excavation.
3.02 PERFORMANCE
A. Excavation:
The Contractor shall perform all excavation of every description and of whatever
substances encountered, to the dimensions required for construction and as
specified herein. All excavations shall be made by open cut.
Walls of the excavation shall be kept vertical and, if required to protect the safety
of workmen, the general public, this or other work or structures, or excavation
walls, the excavation shall be properly sheeted and braced. Excavation for the
structures shall be sufficient to provide a clearance between their outer surfaces
and the face of the excavation, sheeting, or bracing, of not less than 2-feet.
Materials encountered in the excavation which have a tendency to slough or flow
into the excavation, undermine the banks, weaken the overlying strata, or are
otherwise rendered unstable by the excavation operation shall be retained by
sheeting, stabilization, grouting or other approved methods. Excavation for
precast or prefabricated structures will not be required to be dewatered.
Excavation for the precast or prefabricated structures shall be carried to an
elevation I-foot lower than the proposed outside bottom of the structure to
provide space for the select backfill material. Prior to placing the select backfill,
the excavation shall be sounded, if not dewatered, using a rigid pole to indicate to
the satisfaction of the Engineer that the excavation has been carried to the proper
depth and is reasonably uniform over the area to be occupied by the structure.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\o.o.o.83\o.o.o.83o.21.o.6\DOaSpecs\o.2220.doc
Structure Excavation and Backfill
July 20.0.7
02220-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Excavation for structures constructed or cast in place in dewatered excavations
shall be carried down to the bottom of the structure where dewatering methods are
such that a dry excavation bottom is exposed and the naturally occurring material
at this elevation leveled and left ready to receive construction. Material disturbed
below the founding elevation in dewatered excavations shall be replaced with
Class B concrete.
Footings: Cast-in-place concrete footing sides shall be formed immediately after
excavation. Forming for footing sides is specified elsewhere.
B. Dewatering (When Required): Any water which accumulates in the excavations
for cast-in-place concrete structures shall be removed promptly by well point
system or by other means satisfactory to the Engineer in such a manner as to not
create a nuisance to adjacent property or public thoroughfare. Pumps and engines
for well point systems shall be operated with mufflers and at a minimum noise
level suitable to a residential area. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
nuisance created due to the disposal of water from his drainage system.
C. Stockpiled Materials: Materials removed from the excavation shall be stored and
disposed of in a manner which will not interfere with traffic at the site. Material
suitable for backfill not needed for backfill at the structure, but needed elsewhere
shall be stockpiled until moved and used elsewhere. Material unsuitable for use
in backfill shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed and
disposed of by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense immediately after
backfill is placed.
D. Backfill:
1. Below Precast or Prefabricated Structures: The space between the
proposed outside bottom of the structure, and the bottom of the excavation
shall be backfilled with graded limerock and screeded level to receive the
proposed structure. If the excavation is not dewatered, after placing and
screeding, the backfill will be sounded with a rigid pole and attached 6-
inch diameter foot piece to indicate, to the satisfaction of the Engineer,
that the backfill has been placed to the proper elevation, is level
throughout and is ready to receive the structure. This fInal sounding of the
material shall immediately precede setting of the structure.
2. Remainder of Backfill: Selected material from the excavation shall be
used for backfilling around the structure. Trash shall not be allowed to
accumulate in spaces to be backfilled. Backfill around the structure shall
be placed in uniform layers to the level of the water table. Above the
water table, backfill material shall be placed in 8-inch layers and
compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of maximum density as
determined by AASHTO Designation T 180. Backfilling shall be carried
to the fInished grades shown on the Drawings.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\0008302 I .06\DOC\Specs\02220.doc
02220-3
Structure Excavation and Backfill
July 2007
~. ~.".:" ....~
E. Foundation Preparation: Slabs On Grade: Sub grades for concrete slabs shall be
cut, filled and compacted to the required grade. The top 8-inches of concrete slab
subgrade in cut sections and all fill material shall be compacted to a density of not
less than 95 percent of its maximum density as determined by AASHTO
Designation T 180.
END OF SECTION
THE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\02220.doc
Structure Excavation and Backfill
July 2007
02220-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02221
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Excavate for all underground piping.
B. Place and compact granular beds and fills over pipelines to rough grade
elevations.
C. Dewater excavations as required.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. 15050 Piping, Fittings, Valves, and Accessories
1.03 SITE COMPACTION TESTING
A. Testing of compacted fill materials will be performed m accordance with
F.D.O.T. and A.A.S.H.T.O. specifications.
B. If, during progress of Work, tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet
specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest as directed by
ENGINEER.
C. Ensure compacted fills are tested before proceeding with placement of surface
materials.
1.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawn, areas to receive planting, rock outcropping and other features
remaining as part of final landscaping.
B. Protect benchmarks and existing structures, roads, sidewalks, paving and curbs against
damage from vehicular or foot traffic. Install and maintain proper bridging and planking
to provide access to buildings.
C. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling underpinning, or by other methods,
as required to prevent cave-ins or loose dirt from falling into excavations in accordance
with Trench Safety Act.
D. Underpin or otherwise support adjacent structure(s) which may be damaged by
excavation work. This includes other utility lines and pipe runs.
THE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\OOO83021.06\DOaSpecs\02221.doc
Trenchinl!. Backfillinl!:. and ComDactinl!:
July 2007
02221-1
E. Notify ENGINEER of any unexpected sub-surface conditions. Discontinue work in the
area until ENGINEER provides notification to resume work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Bedding Materials: Pipe shall be placed on dry, undisturbed earth.
B. Selected Backfill: After pipe joints have been inspected and given preliminary approval,
and sufficient time has elapsed for setting of joints if necessary, backfilling shall be
performed, together with tamping until fill has progressed to an elevation at least one
foot above the top of the pipe bell. During this initial stage of backfilling, approved
granular materials or loose soil free from lumps, clods, or stones shall be deposited in
layers approximately 6-inches thick and compacted by manually operated machine
tampers actuated by compressed air, or other suitable means. Tampers and machines
shall be suitable for the work, and subject to approval by ENGINEER.
C.. Backfill Material: Excavated material, free from roots, rocks larger than 3Y2 inches in
size and building debris.
D. Fill under landscaped areas: Free from alkali, salt, and petroleum products. Use
sub-soil excavated from site only if conforming to specified requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION AND LAYOUT
A. Establish extent of excavation by area and elevation. Designate and identify datum
elevation.
B. Set required lines and levels.
C. Maintain benchmarks, monuments and other reference points.
3.02 UTILITIES
A. Before starting excavation, establish the location and extent of underground utilities
occurring in the work area.
B. Notify ENGINEER if utility lines which are in the way of excavation are uncovered.
C. Protect active utility services uncovered by excavation.
D. Remove abandoned utility service lines from areas of excavation. Cap, plug or seal such
lines and identify at grade.
E. Accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility lines re-routed or extended on
Project Record Documents.
THE GroDD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\02221.doc
Trenchin2. Backfillin2. and Compactin2
July 2007
02221-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.03 TRENCIDNG
A. Ensure trenching does not interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of any
foundation.
B. Excavate in accordance with lines and grades.
C. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable proper installation of pipe and to allow for
inspection. Trim and shape trench bottom and leave free of irregularities, lumps and
projections.
D. Do not disturb soil within branch spread of existing trees or shrubs that are to remain. If
it is necessary to excavate through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with a
sharp axe.
E. When complete, request ENGINEER to inspect excavations. Correct unauthorized
excavation as directed, at no cost to OWNER.
F. Remove excess or unsuitable excavated sub-soil from site.
3.04 DEWATERING
A. Keep trenches dry. Provide necessary equipment including pumps, piping and
temporary drains.
B. Do not discharge drainage water into municipal sewers without municipal approval.
Ensure water discharge does not contain silt held in suspension.
C. A Generic Groundwater Discharge Permit is required for discharging drainage water
into the City's storm system or bodies of water. Groundwater samples shall be taken
and tested by a laboratory before the permit is issued.
D. Direct surface drainage away from excavated areas.
E. Control the grading in and adjacent to excavations to prevent water running into
excavated areas or onto adjacent properties or public thoroughfares.
F. Furnish and operate suitable pumps on a 24 hour basis to keep excavations free of water
until piping has been placed and backfilling has been completed.
G. No water shall be allowed to rise over masonry or mortar until the concrete or mortar has
set at least 24 hours.
3.05 BACKFILLING
A. Do not start backfilling until piping has been inspected.
B. Ensure trenches are free of building debris, wood, rocks over 3Y2 inches in diameter and
water.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021. 06\DOC\Specs\02221.doc
02221-3
TrenchinlZ. BackfillinlZ. and ComDactinlZ
July 2007
C. Backfill systematically and as early as possible to allow maximum time for natural
settlement and compaction.
D. After backfill has reached a point one foot above the top of the pipe, a variation in the
procedure as to manner of placing and amount of compaction to fill will be allowed,
depending upon the location of the work and danger from subsequent settlement, as
follows:
1. For backfilling in unimproved areas (along utility easements and in parkway strip
beyond the edge of driveways and graveled parking areas), from an elevation of
one foot above top of pipe to the surface of the ground, backfill may be deposited
by equipment. Depositing in layers, or tamping will not be required. Sufficient
surplus excavated material shall be neatly rounded over the trench, to compensate
for settlement. All surplus excavated materials beyond that indicated above shall
be disposed of by Contractor.
2. For backfilling beneath driveways and parking areas, alleys, and streets where
non-rigid type surfacing is to be replaced. This shall also include dirt, gravel or
asphalt driveways and alleys.
a. The backfill material shall be carefully deposited in uniform layers not to
exceed 12-inches in thickness and each layer shall be compacted to 98% of
maximum density in accordance with AASHTO T -180 with manually
operated machine tampers.
b. In lieu of the foregoing compaction method, the backfill material and
procedure used may be that as specified under Method 3, below.
3. For backfilling across and beneath driveways, sidewalks, parking areas or streets
where a rigid type paving is to be replaced (concrete and asphaltic concrete and
brick surfaces).
a. All backfill material shall be approved granular material of high weight and
density. The material shall be carefully deposited in uniform layers not to
exceed 12-inches thick (loose measure), and each layer shall be compacted
by ramming or tamping with tools approved by ENGINEER in a manner
that does not disturb the pipe. Where necessary, granular base material of
the type and thickness specified shall be used for the last layer prior to
surfacing.
END OF SECTION
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\02221.doc
Trenchin2. BackfillinlZ. and Comoactin2
July 2007
02221-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
,
I,
1\
I
.
I
I,
I
i
SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Substantial Completion
B. Final inspection after completion
C. Final cleaning
D. Contractor's closeout submittals
E. Final adjustment of accounts
1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. When CONTRACTOR considers work has reached substantial completion, he
shall submit to the ENGINEER the following:
1. Written notice that the work is substantially complete in accordance with
Contract Documents.
2. A list of items yet to be completed or corrected and explanations thereof.
B. Within a reasonable time upon receipt of such notice, the ENGINEER will make
an inspection, if necessary, to determine the status of completion.
C. Should the ENGINEER determine that the work is not substantially complete:
1. The ENGINEER will promptly notify the CONTRACTOR in writing,
giving the reasons thereof.
2. CONTRACTOR shall remedy the deficiencies in the work and send a
second written notice of Substantial Completion to the ENGINEER.
3. Upon receipt of the second notice, the ENGINEER will reinspect the
Work.
D. When the ENGINEER finds that the Work is substantially complete he will issue
a Certificate of Substantial Completion with a tentative list of items to be
completed or corrected before final inspection.
1.03 FINAL INSPECTION AFTER COMPLETION
A. When CONTRACTOR considers the Work is complete with all minor
deficiencies completed or corrected, he shall submit written certification that:
TOE GrouD. IDC.
J:\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\0 1700.doc
Contract Closeout
July 2007
01700-1
1. Contract Document requirements have been met.
2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.
4. All minor deficiencies have been corrected or completed and the Work is
ready for final inspection.
5. Project record documents are complete and submitted.
B. Within a reasonable time upon receipt of such certification, the ENGINEER will
make an inspection to verify the status of completion.
C. Should the ENGINEER determine that the work is incomplete or defective:
1. The ENGINEER will promptly notify the CONTRACTOR in writing,
listing the incomplete or defective work.
2. CONTRACTOR shall remedy the deficiencies in the work and send a
second written certification to the ENGINEER that the Work is complete.
3. Upon receipt of the second certification, the ENGINEER will reinspect the
Work.
D. When the ENGINEER determines that the work is acceptable, under the Contract
Documents, he shall request the CONTRACTOR to make closeout submittals.
1.04 FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute prior to final inspection.
B. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean other surfaces.
C. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the
Project and from the site.
1.05 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents
1. At Contract closeout, submit documents with transmittal letter containing
date, Project title, CONTRACTOR'S name and address, list of
documents, and signature of CONTRACTOR.
2. Drawings; Legibly marked to record actual construction:
a) Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
Data shall be in State Plane coordinates utilizing the 1983/90
horizontal NAD and the 1988 vertical NGVD.
b) Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a surveyor registered in the
State of Florida.
c) One signed and sealed project set, plus two additional signed and
sealed sets for each permitted utility shall be submitted to the City.
THE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\0 1700.doc
Contract Closeout
July 2007
01700-2
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'l~
-
I
I
,
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02413
HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL DRILLING
PARTI-GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and materials necessary to
install pipelines by horizontal directional drilling (HOD) at the locations shown
on the plans.
B. The work of this Section includes all labor, machinery, construction equipment
and appliances required to perform in a good workmanlike manner all directional
boring and HOPE carrier pipe installations for the following work::
1. Wastewater force main drill, approximately 1,200 linear feet of 12-inch,
DRll, HDPE pipe.
C. The directional boring scope shall include, but not be limited to steerable
directional boring equipment, operator control cabin, mud plant, entry and exit
pits, pumps, hoses, and other equipment, sheeting, location signs as required,
miscellaneous appurtenances to complete the entire WORK as shown on the
CONTRACT DRA WINGS, and restoration, including irrigation system
replacement. Directional boring operations shall be performed as shown on the
DRAWINGS.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 02594 - High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Annular Space: The space between the excavated HOD fmal reamed bore
diameter and the product pipe or cable.
B. Bent Sub: A bent sub is a section of drill pipe behind the cutting tools that is
inclined at an angle of one to three degrees from the axis of the bore in the desired
direction of steering. The bent sub allows steering while rotating the cutting
tools.
C. Horizontal Directional Drilling: Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD) is a
surface-launched, guided, steerable drilling system used for the trenchless
installation of pipes, conduits, and cables. A pilot bore path is excavated in a
TBE Group, Inc.
J:\00083\OOO83021.06\DOaSpecs\2413.doc
02413-1
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
shallow arc from a surface-launched drill rig. Excavation takes place with fluid
assisted cutting from a drilling tool on the drill string. The pilot bore is directed
by the positioning of a bent sub. Tracking of the drill string is achieved by using
a downhole wireline survey tool which may be augmented by using an energized
wire grid at the surface. The bore is filled with drilling mud/fluid for
stabilization, to cool the cutting tools, and to mix the cuttings into a slurry, which
is circulated to the entry point where solids are removed before the drilling fluids
are returned to the bore. The bore path is enlarged with subsequent reaming
passes until the desired diameter is achieved. The product pipe, conduit, or cable
is then pulled into the fluid-stabilized bore hole.
D. Drilling Fluid/Mud: A mixture of water, bentonite, and/or polymers continuously
pumped to the drilling tools to facilitate the removal of soil cuttings, and
stabilization of the bore. These fluids also cool the cutting tools and lubricate the
drill pipe and product pipe string.
E. Pilot Bore: The action of creating the first guided pass of the HDD process which
is then reamed in one or more passes to the size required to allow pullback of the
pipe or casing.
F. Drilling TooVBit: Any tool or system of tools which excavates at the face of a
bore.
G. Pullback: That part of a horizontal directional drilling process in which the drill
pipe, swivel, and product pipe or cable is pulled back through the bore to the
entry .
H. Pullback Loads: The loads (forces) applied to a drill string and product pipe
during the pullback process. In addition to the tensile pullback loads, bending,
buckling and combination loads must be considered in design.
I. Obstruction: Any hard object lying completely or partially within the design
pathway of the bore and pipeline that prevents further advancement of the drill
pipe, pre-reamer, reamer, and/or pipe, after all reasonable Contractor attempts to
advance past the object or re-drill around the object have failed.
J. Settlement Point: A point with elevation and spatial location established by
survey prior to construction. The point is re-surveyed periodically to monitor
ground movements. The point may be a nail, pin, subsurface settlement rod,
borehole extensometer, or other device that can be readily located and surveyed.
K. Geotechnical Reports
L. Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD) Work Plan: Written descriptions, together
with sketches, drawings, schedules, and other documents defining Contractor's
plans and procedures for horizontal directional drilling.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\2413 .doc
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
02413-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.04 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Installation of Pipelines by Horizontal Directional Drilling, Pipeline Research
Committee, American Gas Association, PR-227-9424, April 1995.
B. Horizontal Directional Drilling Good Practices Guidelines, 2001, HOD Industry
Consortiurnn,300pp.
C. API Bulletin 13D, 1985. Bulletin on the Rheology of Oil-Well Drilling Fluids,
Second Edition, Dallas, Texas, American Petroleum Institute.
D. API Recommended Practice 13B-I, 1990. Standard Procedures for Field Testing
Water-Based Drilling Fluids, First Edition, Dallas, Texas, American Petroleum
Institute.
E. Installation of Pipelines Beneath Levees Using Horizontal Directional Drilling,
US Army Corps of Engineers, Waterways Experiment Station, Final Report,
CPAR-GL-98-1, April 1998.
F. API Specification 13A, 1993. Specification for Drilling Fluid Materials, Fifteenth
Edition, Dallas, Texas. American Petroleum Institute.
G. IADC Drilling Manual, 1992. Eleventh Edition, Houston, Texas, International
Associated of Drilling Contractors.
H. Pressure Pipeline Design for Water and Wastewater, American Society for Civil
Engineers, 2nd ed., 1992.
I. Tables for Hydraulic Design of Pipes and Sewers, American Society for Civil
Engineers, 5th ed., 1990.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Following is the summary of submittals required for the HOD work:
I. Noise reduction plan, stamped by Florida P .E.
2. Sheeting, shoring and dewatering, stamped by Florida P. E.
3. Pullback load calculation (p.E. stamp - optional)
4. Pipe stress calculation (P .E. stamp - optional)
5. Maximum allowable drilling fluid pressure calculation (P.E. stamp -
optional)
6. IIDD work plan, including pilot hole drilling, reaming, and pullback
procedures and rates; calculation of maximurnn drilling speed compatible
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\2413.doc
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
02413-3
with pump capacity and soil conditions; solid control plans; equipment
and pipe layout areas; etc.
7. Contingency plans for remediation of potential problems that may be
encountered during drilling operation
8. Description of pipe internal cleaning, internal gauging, hydrostatic test,
tracer wire test, etc.
9. Qualifications of superintendent and key personnel along with
Florida/OSHA certification for Site Safety Representative
10. Daily logs and records
11. Shop drawings
12. Construction activity schedules
13. Procedures and data records of downhole survey tool and tracking system
14. As-built pilot bore profile
15. Pipe filling and testing during pullback
16. Frac-out and surface spill contingency plan, which shall be reviewed by
the Florida Department of Environmental Protection
17. Details of soil separation plan along with disposal of spoils and drilling
fluids
18. Details for the protection of adjacent utilities, structures and facilities
19. Safety plan
B. In addition to other requirements indicated throughout this specification, the
following sections describe the submittals in more detail. Submittals shall be in
accordance with the requirements of special provisions of the specifications,
providing sufficient detail to allow the Engineer to judge whether or not the
proposed equipment, materials, and procedures will meet the Contract
requirements. The Engineer's review of submitted details and data will be based
on consideration of requirements for the completed work, utilities, and the
possibility of unnecessary delays in the execution of the work to be constructed
under this Contract. Review and acceptance of the Contractor's SUBMITTALS
by the Engineer shall not be construed in any way as relieving the Contractor of
its responsibilities under this Contract.
C. The Contractor shall prepare a plan to be submitted for City approval which
describes the noise reduction program.
D. Contingency Plans for Potential Problems: The Contractor shall submit
contingency plans for remediation of potential problems that may be encountered
during the drilling operations. The contingency plans shall address the
observations that would lead to the discovery of the problem and the methods that
TBE Group, IDe.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\2413 .doc
02413-4
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
would be used to mitigate the problem. Potential problems that shall be addressed
include:
1. Loss of retumslloss of circulation of drilling fluid.
2. Inadvertent returnslhydrofracture or surface spills resulting in drilling
fluids entering water or reaching the surface. Stand-by equipment shall be
provided by the Contractor to recover fluids from the water from both the
shore via truck and from the waterway via boat. Floating turbidity barriers
shall be part of the stand-by equipment to minimize dispersion in the event
that drilling fluids reach the waterway.
3. Encountering obstruction during pilot bore or reaming/pul~back.
4. Drill pipe or product pipe cannot be advanced.
5. Deviations from design line and grade exceed allowable tolerances.
6. Drill pipe or product pipe broken off in borehole.
7. Product pipe collapse or excessive deformation,
8. The contingency plan for inadvertent retums/hdyrofracture shall be
reviewed by the Florida Department of Environmental Protection prior to
construction.
9. Utility strike.
10. Deviation from planned bore path.
11. Hydrolock occurs or is suspected.
12. Excessive ground settlement or heave.
E. Horizontal Directional Drilling Work Plan: Submit an HDD Work Plan complete
with drawings and written description identifying details of the proposed method
of construction and the sequence of operations to be performed during
construction. The HDD Work Plan shall explicitly address annular space and
contact grouting, as required in Section 3.05 J. of this specification and in
specification 03360 - Annular Space and Contact Grouting and shall satisfy all
permit requirements.
1. The plan shall include a detailed plan and profile of the bores showing any
proposed deviations from the drawings included in design documents and
plotted at a scale no smaller than one inch equals 20 feet horizontal and
one inch equals 10 feet vertical.
F. Qualifications: Submit written documentation of HDD superintendent and key
personnel experience in accordance with Sections 1.07.A and 1.07.B. Submit
evidence of Florida/OSHA certification for the Site Safety Representative.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\OO083021.06\DOC\Specs\2413.doc
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
02413-5
G. Daily Logs: The Contractor shall submit daily logs and records in accordance
with Section 1.7.C. Da,ily logs and records shall be provided to the Engineer by
noon on the day following the shift for which the data or records were taken.
H. The Contractor shall provide at least 72 hours written notice of the planned
inception of drilling activities as described in Section 1.6.D.
I. Shop Drawings:
1. The Contractor shall submit all shop Drawings to the Engineer. All shop
drawings shall have been reviewed and accepted by the Engineer prior to
Contractor~ s mobilization. All Drawings shall be legible with dimensions
accurately shown and clearly marked in English.
2. Drawings and photographs transmitted by a facsimile will not be accepted.
The Drawings shall include the planned equipment~ equipment setup
areas, pipe layout areas, any excavations or mud recirculating pits.
J. Schedule: At least fifteen (IS) days prior to mobilization, the Contractor shall
submit a detailed schedule for each HDD installation showing all major
construction activities and durations, with beginning and completion dates shown.
The schedule shall be updated at least every two weeks or more frequently, as
directed by the Engineer, and shall include:
1. "One call" utility locate requests and visual confirmation of all crossing
utilities and all parallel utilities within ten (10) feet laterally of the bore
centerline.
2. Rig mobilization and setup.
3. Pilot bore drilling.
4. Pre-reaming and reaming.
5. Layout and thermal butt-fusing of pipe.
6. Pressure testing of pipe prior to pullback.
7. Final reaming and pullback of pipe.
8. Pressure testing of pipe after installation.
9. Annulus grouting after installation
10. MandreVpig test to confirm deformations of pipe are within allowable
tolerances
11. Cleanup, surface restoration, and demobilization.
K. Description of Methods, Equipment and Materials: The Contractor shall submit
detailed descriptions of methods, equipment, and materials to be used for the
pipeline installation. Descriptions of drilling fluid additives shall be accompanied
TBE Group~ Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\2413 .doc
02413-6
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
by Materials Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and manufacturers' descriptions and
warranties. Descriptions of equipment shall include manufacturers ~
specifications, calibrations, appropriate drawings, photographs, and descriptions
of any modifications since manufacture.
L. Surveying, Equipment and Procedures: The Contractor shall submit records of
equipment calibrations and certifications for all equipment used for downhole
surveys and tracking of the drill head. Procedures for operating the downhole
survey tools shall be described, including measures to verify the accuracy of the
equipment readings.
M. Pipe Filling Methods: The Contractor shall submit methods and procedures for
filling the pipe with fluid during pull back, testing, and annular space grouting.
N. Equipment Layout: The Contractor shall submit sketches depicting the layout and
locations of equipment within the rig side work area and pipe side work area,
including any proposed drilling fluid containment and recirculation pits. The
Contractor shall confirm that all operations shall be completely contained within
the temporary construction easement shown on the Plans.
O. Calculations for Pullback: The Contractor shall submit calculations for pullback
loads for the conditions and operating practices anticipated. These calculations
shall be made and stamped by a licensed professional Engineer registered in the
State of Florida.
P. Pipe Stress Calculations: The Contractor shall submit calculations for pipe
stresses expected to result from the pullback, bending, fluid buckling loads, earth
loads, groundwater loads, and any other installation and service loads expected to
be exerted on the pipe. All assumptions used in the calculations, including the
radius of curvature, assumed drilling fluid weights, whether pipe is assumed to be
filled or empty during pullback, and temperature shall be provided. These
calculations shall be made and stamped by a licensed Professional Engineer
registered in the State of Florida
Q. Calculations of Maximum Allowable Drilling Fluid Pressure: The Contractor
shall submit calculations identifying the critical downhole pressure that would
cause hydrofracture or inadvertent drilling fluid returns. The calculations shall
identify the critical points in the alignment beneath the channel and near the exit
point where the soil cover above the bore is low. The calculations shall identify
all parameters used and state all assumptions made in the calculations. The
calculations shall be sealed and stamped by a licensed Professional Engineer
registered in the State of Florida.
R. Frac-Out and Surface Spill Contingency Plan: A Frac-out and Surface Spill
Contingency Plan shall be prepared for the installation of pipelines using HDD.
This plan shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to construction. The Contractor
THE Group, Inc.
J:\00083\OO083021.06\DOaSpecs\2413.doc
02413-7
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
shall submit a letter signed by an authorized representative of Contractor,
confirming that the plan will be followed.
S. Rig Capacity: The Contractor shall submit details on the capacity of the drill rig
verifying that the pullback capacity is greater than the required pullback
calculated and submitted by the Contractor.
T. Soil Separation Plant: The Contractor shall submit details on the pump and
cleaning plant. Include dimensions, manufacturer's specifications, pump
capacity, noise rating, and soundproofing details on the system.
1. Pump capacity should be specified for water at sea level elevation, and
adjusted for actual elevation and fluid viscosity.
2. Provide details on the generator, including dimensions, noise ratings at
twenty-five (25) feet, and soundproofing. Confirm that the generator and
other on-site equipment can be operated without exceeding the maximum
allowable noise tolerances specified in permit.
U. Radius of Curvature: The Contractor shall confirm that the bore can be
completed using the radius of curvature and geometry shown on the drawings
along with calculations showing that installation stresses do not exceed allowable
pipe stresses.
v. Plans for Disposal of Spoils and Drilling Fluids: The Contractor shall submit
plans for disposal of waste materials resulting from the pipeline construction,
including drilling fluids, cuttings, waste oil, fuel, discharge water, etc. The
Contractor shall identify the disposal site and submit a letter indicating
willingness and legal authority to accept the described and anticipated waste
products.
w. Annular Space and Contact Grouting: The Contractor shall submit descriptions of
methods, equipment, and materials to be used for annular space and contact
grouting any areas where over-excavation, aborted bores, voids, or cavities are
created or encoUhtered.
x. Protection of Adjacent Structures and Facilities: Provide details on measures to
be taken to monitor and protect adjacent utilities, structures, railroad tracks, and
roadways, and provide details on monitoring equipment and provisions, including
the layout of all settlement points and other monitoring points. Provide two (2)
copies of pre-construction survey of adjacent structures and photographs with
captions to document conditions prior to beginning HDD construction.
Y. Safety Plan: The Contractor shall submit a Safety Plan, including the name of the
Contractor's Site Safety Representative, emergency telephone numbers for
medical facilities, and precautions for handling and disposal of any hazardous or
TBE Group, Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\2413 .doc
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
02413-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
flammable materials. The Safety Plan shall include a code of safe practices and
an emergency plan in accordance with OSHA and Florida/OSHA requirements.
Z. The following shall be submitted as construction progresses and at the completion
of construction.
1. Daily Logs and Records: The Contractor shall submit complete, legible,
written daily logs and records as called for in Section 1.07.C of this
specification and as directed by the Engineer, by noon of the following
day to which the records correspond.
2. Variations in Plan and Profile: The Contractor shall document any
variations between the actual plan and profile of the bore path and the
location shown on the plans. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer
immediately upon discovery of any deviations.
3. Mud Weights: The Contractor shall submit measured mud and/or drilling
fluid weights used during pilot boring and reaming of the bore measured at
a minimum of twice per shift or at least once per 200 feet of drilled or
reamed length, whichever is more frequent.
4. Submit maximum drilling and reaming rates for pilot bore and each
reaming pass and confirm that pump capacity is adequate for these
anticipated drilling rates for the drilling fluid weights and viscosities .
anticipated.
5. Pressure Test Records: The Contractor shall submit all pressure test
records for both the pre-installation and post-installation tests.
6. Pilot Bore As-Built Profile: The Contractor shall submit an as-built
profile of the pilot bore within 24 hours of completion of the pilot bore.
1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment: The Contractor shall provide all equipment, materials, and personnel
necessary for completing the installation as shown on the plans and specified
herein. The equipment and materials shall include but are not limited to:
1. Directional drilling rig with all ancillary equipment, including drill pipe,
drilling fluid, cutting tools, reaming bits, swivels, expanders, motors,
pumps, hoses, mixing equipment, drilling fluid processing equipment
(cuttings separation equipment), downhole survey equipment, energized
surface grid tracking system, fluid pressure and flow rate monitoring equipment, spare parts, pipe handling equipment, crane, backhoe, roller,
side boom tractors, control cabin, control equipment, and office
equipment.
2. Drilling fluids, water, fuel, lubricant, polymers, or other additives.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\2413 .doc
02413-9
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
3. Any other expendable or reusable materials, supplies, and equipment
needed for the installation.
B. The drilling equipment shall be capable of advancing through the geologic
conditions to be encountered at the site, as described in the geotechnical reports,
and as anticipated by the Contractor.
C. The drilling fluid shall be designed for the geologic conditions to be encountered
at the site, as described in the geotechnical reports and as anticipated by the
Contractor.
D. The drilling system shall include a fluid pump and separation plant that can
achieve the rates of drilling fluid pumping, spoil separation, and slurry cleaning
required by the Contractor to achieve planned production rates for the soils
described in the geotechnical reports, and as anticipated by the Contractor.
Shaker screens and hydrocyc1ones may be required for efficient separa~on of
spoils. The Contractor is advised that the separation plant must fit within the
allowable work areas shown on the plans.
E. All spoil and slurry must be contained in trucks, tanks, approved. recirculation
pits, or other containers at all times. Dumping of spoil or sl1ll1j on the ground,
discharge into sewers, or discharge into the water bodies will not be permitted.
All spoils will be transported and disposed of off-site at an approved disposal
facility that meets all State of Florida and local requirements.
F. Perform all work within work areas shown on the Plans.
G. The pipeline shall be installed using the radii of curvatures and entry and exit
angles shown on the. drawings, unless deviations are approved in writing by the
Engineer.
H. Pipe rollers and lifters will be required to help the transition of the carrier pipe
into the bore. The number of pipe rollers and lifters shall be determined by the
Contractor and submitted as part of the work plan.
I. Surface settlement or heave of utilities and other features above the HDD
centerlines and within the zone influenced by the HDD construction shall be
limited to values that avoid damage. The Contractor shall repair any damage
resulting from settlement or heave caused by HDD activities at no additional cost
to the Owner. The Contractor shall grout any voids caused by or encountered
during drilling as specified in this section and in accordance with Section 03360-
Annular Space and Contact Grouting.
J. Safety: It shall be the Contractor's sole responsibility that all work is done in
conformance with all applicable federal, state, and local safety requirements.
TBE Group, Inc.
I :\00083\00083021. 06\DOC\Specs\2413 .doc
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
02413-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Required safety equipment and procedures shall be employed by the Contractor at
all times. All materials and methods of construction shall meet the applicable
requirements of the County of Pinellas and the City of Clearwater Standard
Specifications and Special Provisions, and the applicable requirements of the
State of Florida Administrative Code. Particular attention is called to Subpart S
of the Standards (29 CFR 1926/1920, published as U.S. Department of Labor
Publication 207, revised October 1, 1979, and August 1, 1989. See Federal
Register dated June 2, 1989, for the revised standard and commentary). These
Special Provisions shall supercede any conflicting requirements of the County of
Pinellas and the City of Clearwater Standard Specifications.
K. Pipe: The pipe will be certified by the Contractor as meeting all requirements of
the specifications. The fabricated pipe will be pressure-tested by the Contractor
prior to pullback and after installation is completed, in accordance with
requirements specified in Section 02594 - High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
Pipe.
L. The Contractor shall allow access to the Engineer and shall furnish necessary
assistance and cooperation to aid the Engineer in observations and data and
sample collection, including, but not limited to the following:
1. The Owner and/or Engineer shall have full access to the operator control
container prior to, during, and following all HDD operations. This shall
include, but not be limited to, providing visual access to real-time operator
control screens, gauges, and indicators.
2. The Owner and/or Engineer shall have full access to the slurry separation
plant prior to, during, and following all HDD operations. This shall
include, but not be limited to, full access to shaker screens, hydrocyclones,
conveyor belts, and slurry and spoil holding tanks. The Engineer shall be
allowed to collect soil samples from the shaker screens and/or spoil
holding tanks on the slurry separation plant a minimum of once per
installed pipe section, and whenever changes in conditions are observed or
suspected.
M. Sound levels measured by the Engineer or Engineer's consultant shall not exceed
65 dBA 6PM to 7 AM or 80 dBA 7 AM to 6PM, within five feet of the nearest
occupied building. Contractor shall comply with all local noise ordinances if the
local requirements are more stringent. Sound levels in excess of these values are
sufficient cause to have the work halted until equipment can be quieted to these
levels. Work stoppage by the City for excessive noise shall not relieve the
Contractor of the other portions of this specification including, but not limited to
completion of all work within specified contract time and contract price. The
contractor shall submit a plan prior to construction identifying all noise
reduction/abatement procedures. The plan will be reviewed by the Engineer prior
to construction.
THE Group, Inc.
J :\OOO83\OO083021.06\DOC\Specs\2413 .doc
02413-11
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
1. If mufflers cannot achieve the necessary noise reduction, noise abatement
shall be accomplished by the Contractor's installation of baffles (or other
acceptable means) positioned to break line-of-sight from the noise source
to affected residences and/or commercial structures. Minimum noise
abatement measures shall consist of equipping all engines with hospital
grade mufflers or silencers.
1.07 Quality Assurance
A. Contractor Qualifications and Experience: The Contractor shall have at least five
(5) years of demonstrated successful experience installing pipelines using the
horizontal directional drilling process on at least five (5) projects with similar
diameters, installation lengths, and ground and groundwater conditions. At least
three (3) of the projects must include twenty-four inch outer diameter or larger
and at least one project must include 3~-inch outer diameter or larger pipeline
installations. These projects shall include individual bore lengths of at least 1,000
feet under similar soil conditions. The Contractor shall demonstrate successful
completion of at least three (3) projects where HDPE pipe was installed with
horizontal directional drilling techniques. The Contractor shall furnish evidence
of successful experience, including project owner, project name, location,
diameter, length, depth, ground conditions, any problems encountered and how
resolved, and any claims and how resolved. Owner's representative with address
and telephone number shall be provided. Alternatively, the Contractor shall
provide copy of a letter from the Owner, confirming that Contractor has met pre-
responsibility criteria determination for this project.
B. Qualifications and Experience of Contractor Personnel: The Contractor shall
employ skilled, experienced superintendent(s) and personnel. The
superintendent(s) shall have at least three (3) years of successful experience using
the HDD process, on at least five (5) projects with similar diameters, pullback
length, and ground conditions. The projects should include individual bores of at
least 1,000 feet in length. The Contractor shall furnish resumes of the
superintendent(s) and key personnel. Personnel experience records should
include project names, locations, pullback lengths, ground conditions, pipe
materials, project description, project oWner, Engineer, and references with
names, addresses, and telephone numbers. The superintendent listed in the
submittal shall be on site during all construction related activities required for the
HDD installation.
C. Daily Logs and Records: Daily logs and records shall be maintained by the
Contractor and shall include drilling lengths, location of drill head, drilling fluid
pressures and flow rates, drilling fluid losses, inadvertent returns, drilling times
required for each pipe joint, any instances of retraction and re-drilling of the pilot
bore or segments thereof, and any other relevant observations, including any
observed settlement, heave, frac-outs, or surface spills. The drilling fluid
TBE Group, Inc.
I :\00083\0008302 1.06\DOC\Specs\24 13.doc
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
02413-12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
pressures shall be measured at the entry point and recorded at least once per drill
pipe length. These records shall be maintained and provided daily to the
Engineer. The position of the drill head shall be continuously tracked and
recorded by a downhole wireline tracking locator system, and shall be
supplemented by a "TruTracker" or equivalent tracking system installed between
the entry point and the exit point. The coordinates of the surface wire grid system
shall be surveyed and recorded. A plot of actual locations of the bore path shall be
maintained and updated daily, or more frequently, as directed by the Engineer.
D. Advance Notice and Inspections: The Contractor shall provide at least 72 hours
advance written notice to the Engineer of the planned inception of major drilling
activities, including pilot bore launch, pre-reaming, reaming, and pipe pullback.
The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer, in writing, when any
significant problems are encountered or if ground conditions are considered by
the Contractor to be materially and significantly different than those represented
within the Contract Documents. All work by the Contractor shall be performed in
the presence of the Engineer, unless Engineer grants prior written approval to
perform such work in Engineer's absence.
E. Surveying Equipment and Procedures: All surveying equipment used for
downhole surveying and tracking of the bore path and drill head shall be
inspected and calibrated by the equipment manufacturer prior to use. Proof of this
inspection and calibration shall be provided to the Engineer prior to the
commencement of drilling operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE
A. As described in Paragraph 1.I.A., the Contractor shall provide and install HDPE
pipe in accordance with Section 02594 - High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
Pipe.
B. The pipe thickness must conform to the most conservative design with respect to
design calculations for the critical combination of internal and external pressure,
pullback, and bending. The HDPE pipe dimension ratio (DR) shall not be greater
than nine (9) in any case.
2.02 WATER
A. The Contractor shall secure a suitable source of water, and shall be responsible for
transporting, storing, and disposing of any water required.
2.03 DRILLING FLUIDS
THE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\OO083021.06\DOC\Specs\2413.doc
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
02413-13
A. The Contractor shall select drilling fluid mixture proportions to ensure continuous
circulation, bore stability, reduce drag on the pipe, and completely fill the annular
space between the bore and the pipe to control settlement. Management and
disposal of drilling fluids shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Drilling fluids
shall not be disposed of on-site or discharged to sanitary or storm sewers, or the
water way.
2.04 DRILL PIPE
A. The Contractor shall provide high quality drill pipes that have been inspected and
determined to be adequate for the project requirements. Bent, cracked, or
fatigued drill pipes shall not be used. Threads must be in good condition. The
length of each drill pipe shall be measured and recorded.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall provide adequate control of surface water and drilling fluids
drainage and runoff, and provide silt fences, hay bales, and wattles to prevent
surface water or drilling fluids from entering the water way.
B. The Contractor shall not initiate HDD until all submittals are received, reviewed,
and accepted by the Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall not initiate HDD until all required permits are obtained.
3.02 PROTECTION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
A. The drawings show existing buried utilities that are believed to be near the
directional drill alignment. There is no guarantee that these utilities are located as
shoWn or that other utilities are not present. It will be the Contractor's
responsibility to locate all nearby utilities or other potential subsurface
obstructions that may interfere with the work. Further information on existing
site utilities may be obtained from the City of Clearwater Utilities Department.
B. The Contractor shall notify "One Call" system to request marking of utilities that
subscribe to One Call, and shall individually notify all other known or suspected
utilities to request marking of these utilities. The Contractor shall confirm that all
requested locates are made prior to commencing drilling operations. Contractor
shall make all diligent efforts to locate any unmarked or abandoned utilities using
all available information, maps, and drawings. The Contractor shall visually
confirm and stake all existing lines, cables, or other underground facilities
including exposing all crossing utilities and utilities within ten (10) feet laterally
of the centerline of designed drilled path.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\2413 .doc
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
02413-14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. The Contractor shall control drilling practices to prevent damage to existing
utilities.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for all losses and repairs occasioned by
damage to underground utilities resulting from drilling operations.
E. The Contractor shall make diligent effort to locate surface evidence of any other
potential subsurface obstructions, such as piers and piles.
3.03 WORK STAGING AREA
A. Work Staging: The Contractor shall limit staging and work operations to the
areas shown on the plans, or as otherwise accepted in writing by the Engineer, for
storage of equipment and materials, parking, pipe layout, drilling, and other work.
B. Construction Impacts: The Contractor shall maintain the work area in a manner
that shall minimize adverse impacts on other public use activities. The Contractor
shall proceed with work in a safe, orderly manner, while maintaining the work
site free of debris and unnecessary equipment and materials.
C. Control of Drilling Fluids: The Contractor shall follow all requirements of the
Frac-Out and Surface Spill Contingency Plan as submitted and approved and shall
control operational pressures, drilling mud weights, drilling speeds, and any other
operational factors required to avoid hydro fracture fluid losses to formations, and
control drilling fluid spillage. This includes any spillages or returns at entry and
exit locations or at any intermediate point. All inadvertent returns or spills shall
be promptly contained and cleaned up. The Contractor shall maintain on-site
mobile spoil removal equipment during all drilling, pre-reaming, reaming, and
pullback operations and shall be capable of quickly removing spoils. The
Contractor shall immediately notify Engineer of any inadvertent returns or spills
and immediately contain and clean up the return or spill.
D. Combustible Materials: Combustible materials (fuel, oil, lubricants, etc.) shall be
stored off-site or in a well-ventilated storage facility removed from the immediate
vicinity of the drilling area by at least twenty (20) feet.
E. Temporary Lighting: The Contractor shall procure and maintain all temporary
lighting needed for Contractor's operations, safety, testing, and inspection.
Temporary lighting shall be removed after completion of construction.
F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: The Contractor shall, in accordance with
approved Traffic and Safety Plans, erect appropriate barriers, warning lights, and
signs, painted with approved colors, warnings, and graphics to ensure adequate
warning to personnel and the public.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\OOO83021.06\DOaSpecs\2413.doc
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
02413-15
G. Site Security: The Contractor shall install an enclosure fence around the work
area. The enclosure fence shall include a lockable gate and should be adequate to
prevent entry of unauthorized persons.
H. Removal of Temporary Facilities: At the completion of construction, the
Contractor shall remove all temporary facilities installed by the Contractor_
Unused soil, aggregate, and other materials shall be removed and disposed of at
approved sites in accordance with all Federal, State, and Local regulations. Any
damage to streets, lawns, common areas, and sidewalks shall be restored to
original or better conditions. All disturbed areas shall be re-vegetated.
3.04 MOBILIZATION
A. The Contractor shall mobilize all equipment, materials, and personnel necessary
to construct the HDPE pipeline using the HDD process at the locations shown in
the Drawings.
1. Entry Area: The Contractor shall set up temporary workspace within the
areas delineated on the Plans. Appropriate precautions and measures shall
be employed by the Contractor to prevent erosion, surface drainage, and
spillage of drilling fluids or other materials that could adversely impact the
environmental quality of the site. Silt fences, hay wattles, and hay bales
shall be used to line the work area to minimize erosion and contain any
spillages or runoff. Shovels, brooms, buckets, and barrels shall be" kept
on-site to facilitate containment and cleanup. A vacuum truck or trailer
unit will be on standby and capable of responding within one hour to any
spill or inadvertant return incident.
2. Exit Area: The exit area shall have a drilling fluid pit for containing
drilling fluids and cuttings. Hay bales or wattles shall be used to line the
exit area to minimize erosion and runoff. Containment and cleanup
equipment shall be available to contain and clean up any surface spills and
frac-outs.
3. Pipe Layout Area: Layout area shall be free of stones, wood, debris and
obstructions. Pipe rollers shall be provided by the Contractor to facilitate
pipe pullback.
3.05 HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL DRILLING
A. Drill Rig Capacity: The capacity of the directional drilling system used by the
Contractor shall be adequate to install the specified pipeline.
B. Pump Capacity: The pump used by the Contractor shall be adequate to supply the
required flow rate and pressures at the anticipated drilling fluid viscosity at all
times. Drilling speeds shall not exceed pump capacity.
THE Group, Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\2413 .doc
02413-16
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Bore Tracking and Monitoring: At all times during the pilot bore the Contractor
shall provide and maintain a bore tracking system that is capable of accurately
locating the position of the drill head in the x, y, and z axes. The Contractor shall
record these data at least once per drill pipe length or every thirty (30) feet or
thirty (30) minutes, whichever is more frequent.
1. Downhole and Surface Grid Tracking System: Contractor shall monitor
and record x, y, and z coordinates relative to an established surface survey
bench mark, from downhole survey data using downhole wireline system.
Tru-tracker energized surface grid, or equivalent, shall be installed and
used to supplement the wireline system. The grids shall be surveyed to
establish horizontal and vertical position to 0.1 feet accuracy. The data
shall be continuously monitored and recorded at least once per drill pipe
length or at thirty (30) feet or thirty (30) minute intervals during drilling,
whichever is most frequent.
2. Deviations between the recorded and design bore path shall be calculated
and reported on the daily log. If the deviations exceed tolerances specified
elsewhere, such occurrences shall be reported immediately to the
Engineer. The Contractor shall undertake all necessary measures to correct
deviations and return to design line and grade.
3. Drilling Fluid Pressures and Flow Rates: Drilling fluid pressures and flow
rates shall be continuously monitored and recorded by the Contractor. The
pressures shall be monitored at the pump. These measurements shall be
made during pilot bore drilling, reaming, and pullback operations.
4. Drilling Speeds: Maximum allowable drilling speeds shall be calculated
by the Contractor for pilot boring and each reaming pass and shall not be
exceeded for pilot boring or reaming passes. Measurements shall be taken
every thirty (30) feet or thirty (30) minutes, whichever is more frequent.
5. Drilling Fluid Viscosity and Density (Mud Weight): The Contractor shall
measure and record drilling fluid viscosity and density at least three (3)
times per shift with at least two (2) hours between readings, llsing
calibrated Marsh funnel and mud balance. These measurements shall be
included in daily logs submitted to the Engineer. The Contractor shall
document modifications to the drilling fluids, by noting the types and
quantities of drilling fluid additives and the dates and times when
introduced. The reason for the addition of drilling fluid additives or other
modifications shall be documented and reported.
D. Location of Entry and Exit Points: Entry and exit points shall be as shown on the
Drawings, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall employ licensed, experienced surveyors to locate the. entry and exit points,
and to establish horizontal and vertical datum for the bore and the pipe layout and
fabrication areas.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\2413 .doc
02413-17
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
E. Entry and Exit Angles: Drill entrance and exit angles shall be as shown on the
Contract Plans and Drawings, unless otherwise approved in writing by the
Engineer.
F. Pilot Bore: The pilot bore shall follow the design path of the bore shown on the
drawings.
1. Horizontal and Vertical Tolerances: Horizontal and vertical deviations
shall be less than plus or minus three (3) feet from the design path
centerline. The Contractor shall continuously monitor horizontal and
vertical position and record the position at least once per drill pipe length,
or at thirty (30) feet or thirty (30) minute intervals, whichever is most
frequent.
2. Radius of Curvature: The radius of curvature shall not be less than that
shown on the drawings. The radius of curvature shall be calculated over
the distance of three (3) drill pipe sections.
3. Entry and Exit Tolerances: The location of the entry and exit points shall
be as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall be solely responsible
for all work necessary to correct excessive deviations from line and grade,
including re-drilling, redesigning connections, and acquiring additional
easement, at no additional cost to the Owner and without schedule
extension.
G. Pre-reaming and Reaming: The pilot bore shall be pre-reamed and reamed using
equipment and methods submitted by the Contractor. The Contractor shall
completely ream the bore to the final diameter prior to pullback.
H. Hydrostatic Pretest: The Contractor shall perform hydrostatic water pressure test
in accordance with Section 02594 - High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe
prior to pipe pullback.
I. Pipe Pullback:
1. The pipe shall be installed by pulling it into the reamed bore path in a
continuous operation, behind a final reaming tool selected by the
Contractor.
2. The pipe shall be isolated from excessive torsional and axial stresses by a
swivel device with a pre-established breakaway, tensile capacity that is
lower than the allowable tensile strength of the pipe.
3. All measurements shall be made, recorded, and submitted on the daily
logs during final reaming and pipe pullback.
4. Pulling Loads: The maximum pull (axial tension force) exerted on the
HDPE pipelines shall be measured continuously and limited to the
TBE Group, Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\2413 .doc
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
02413-18
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
maximum allowed by the pipe manufacturer with an appropriate factor of
safety (~ 2) so that the pipe or joints are not overstressed.
5. Pipeline Support: The pipelines shall be adequately supported during
installation so as to prevent overstressing or buckling. The Contractor
shall provide adequate support/rollers along the stringing area to support
the required length of the HOPE pipe for each bore. Such support/rollers
shall be spaced at a maximum of 60 feet on centers, and the rollers be
comprised of a non-abrasive material arranged in a manner to provide
support to the bottom and bottom quarter points of the pipeline allowing
for free movement of the pipeline during pullback. The pipe layout area
shall be cleared of all large stones, construction debris, or other foreign
objects that could damage the pipe during pullback.
6. The end of the pipe shall be closed during the pull back operation.
7. Each length of pipe shall be inspected and cleaned as necessary to be free
of debris immediately before joining.
8. Two tracer wires will be attached to the leading end of the pipe pulling
head and shall extend the full length of the installed pipe.
9. The Contractor shall at all times handle the HDPE pipe in a manner that
does not overstress or otherwise damage the pipe. Vertical and horizontal
curves shall be limited so that wall stresses do not exceed 50% of yield
stress for flexural bending of the HOPE pipe. If the pipe is buckled or
otherwise damaged, the d~maged section shall be removed and replaced
by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall take appropriate
steps during pullback to ensure that the HDPE pipe and tracer wires will
be installed without damage.
10. The HOPE pipe shall be filled with water as it enters the bore to reduce
pullback loads and to ensure that adequate internal pressure is maintained
at all points to counter balance collapse pressures.
11. The Contractor shall monitor and inspect pipe rollers and method for
suspending pipe at entry during the pullback operation to avoid damage to
the pipe.
12. The Contractor shall cease operations if the pipe is damaged and shall
remove the pipe from the bore and repair the pipe using the
manufacturer's recommended procedure or replace the damaged pipe
before resuming installation.
13. Damage to the pipe resulting from installation, contact grouting, or
grouting of the annulus is the responsibility of the Contractor, including
costs for replacement and labor and materials. To confirm no damage to
the pipe, upon completion of pull back and grouting, the Contractor shall
perform the following test on the completed pipeline:
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\OOO83021.06\DOC\Specs\2413 .doc
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
02413-19
a. A sphere or pig, one inch less in diameter than the internal
diameter of the product pipe, which is capable of allowing water
to pass through it, complete with a pulling cable on either side of
sphere or pig, shall be pulled through the entire length of the
pipeline. If the pig or sphere cannot pass through the pipe, it shall
be considered collapsed and damaged.
14. After the carrier pipe is completely pulled through the bore, a sufficient
relaxation period as recommended by the pipe manufacturer shall be
provided before the final pipe tie-in.
15. Final Hydrostatic Test: The Contractor shall conduct a final hydrostatic
test of the installed pipeline. Final test shall be in accordance with Section
02594 - High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe. The Contractor will
repair any defects discovered during this test, and repeat until the pipe
passes the test.
J. Annular Space and Contact Grouting: The Contractor shall grout the annular
space between the bore and the outer diameter of the HDPE pipe prior to the
mandrel or pig test described in 3.5..I.13.a of this section. Grouting shall be
completed within 48 hours of completion of the final hydrostatic test. Grouting is
to be completed using materials in accordance with Section 03360 - Annular
Space and Contact Grouting. Grouting procedures shall be in accordance with
approved submittals. The grouting operations shall ensure that the annulus is
filled with grout for at least the first 100 feet from entry point and the last 100 feet
before exit point. Grouting may be accomplished using one or more of the
methods described below, or an alternative submitted by the Contractor, subject to
Engineer's approval. The Contractor shall ensure that the annulus does not
provide a preferential pathway for seepage regardless of the method(s) used and
shall ensure that settlements shall not cause damage to existing utilities, roadways
or structures. Extra caution shall be taken to protect the electric vault near the
entry end on the west side of the bore.
1. Tremie pipe. Tremie pipes shall be inserted into the borehole, for at least
100 feet from both entry and exit ends after the pipe pullback is completed
to grout the annulur space between borehole and pipe, or any other voids
created or encountered above the borehole. Tremie grout pipes shall be
not less than 1-1/4 inch and not more than 2-inch diameter Schedule 40
PVC, and shall be inserted at the crown and at two locations 60 degrees
from the crown. Grout will be injected in sufficient volume to completely
fill the annulus as the tremie pipes are withdrawn. Grouting pressures shall
be carefully controlled and monitored to avoid applying excessive
pressure to the pipe and to avoid heave or hydro fracture. The water main
pipes shall be filled with water during grouting to counterbalance grouting
pressures and to avoid excessive heat of hydration as the grout sets that
could damage the pipes.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\2413 .doc
02413-20
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Mix grout into drilling fluid and inject with drilling fluid as pipe is pulled
back ftnal 100 feet to grout annulus at entry side. Grout shall be mixed
into drilling fluid recirculation/distribution system and shall be injected as
drilling fluid as pipe is pulled back final 100 feet. The grout mixture shall
satisfy performance requirements of drilling fluid before set and
requirements of annulus grout after set. Retarding agents may be
incorporated into grout mixture to allow sufficient time to complete pipe
pullback before initial grout set. The exit side annulus shall be grouted by
inserting a tremie pipe into the bore annulus for at least 100 feet from the
exit end as described in 1. above. Grout/drilling fluid injection pressures
shall be less than pressures that could result in collapse of the pipe or
hydro fracture of the surrounding soil.
K. Obstructions: The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately in the event
that any obstruction is encountered that prevents further advancement of the drill
pipe, or pullback of the pre-reamer, reamer, and/or pipe. The Contractor shall
make all diligent and reasonable efforts to advance past the object by drilling
slowly through the object, pulling back, and drilling along a new bore path that
avoids the object, or excavating and exposing and removing the object, and all
other reasonable attempts to continue the bore. The Contractor shall notify the
Engineer of proposed measures to attempt to advance past the object, prior to
initiating the attempt. If the Contractor attempts to pullback and re-drill, the
Contractor shall adhere to line and grade tolerances established in this
speciftcation section, unless the Engineer approves variance, in writing, prior to
the Contractor's attempt to re-drill. The Contractor and Engineer shall investigate
the cause and together determine an appropriate response. Appropriate response
may include revisions to equipment or methods, retraction and re-drilling of a
portion of the bore, or abandonment of the hole. If abandonment is deemed
necessary, the Contractor shall recover, to the extent practicable, any drill pipe,
product pipe, and tools in the bore, and properly abandon the bore by contact
grouting, unless otherwise directed in writing by the Engineer. If the bore is
abandoned, the Contractor shall be allowed to begin a second attempt to install the
pipeline at an alternate location subject to approval, in writing, by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall take all reasonable actions to complete the installation with
minimal delays. The extra costs and payments associated with encountering a
confIrmed obstruction shall be negotiated between the Owner and Contractor,
based on reasonable time and materials.
L. Site Restoration and Demobilization: The Contractor shall remove all equipment,
materials, drilling fluids, muck, waste, and debris from the site and restore the site
to its original condition upon completion of the installation. Restoration and
demobilization shall be completed by the Contractor within seven (7) days of the
completion of the pipeline installation.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\2413.doc
02413-21
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
M. Settlement Monitoring: The Contractor shall visually monitor for settlement or
heave before and during drilling and grouting operations.
THE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\2413 .doc
END OF SECTION
02413-22
Horizontal Directional Drilling
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02531
FffiERGLASS MANHOLES
PART 1
GENERAL
A.
Fiberglass reinforced polyester manhole shall be manufactured from commercial
grade polyester resin or other suitable polyester or vinyl ester resins, with
fiberglass reinforcements. Manhole shall be a one piece unit manufactured to
meet or exceed all specifications of ASTM. D-3753 latest edition as manufactured
by L.F. Manufacturing, Inc., Giddings, Texas or an approved equal. Resin
1.02 MANUFACTURE
A. Manhole cylinders, manway reducers, and connectors shall be produced from
glass fiber-reinforced polyester resin using a combination of chop and continuous
filament wound process.
B. Interior Access: All manholes shall be designed so that a ladder or step system
can be supported by the installed manhole.
C. Manway Reducer: Manway reducers will be concentric with respect to the larger
portion of the manhole. diameters through 60 inches. Larger manholes may have
concentric or eccentric manway reducer openings.
D. Cover and Ring Support: The manhole shall provide an area from which a grade
ring or brick can be installed to accept a typical metal ring and cover and have the
strength top support a traffic load without damage to the manhole.
1.03 TEST METHODS
A. All tests shall be performed as specified in ASTM 3753 latest edition, Section 8.
Test method D-790 and test method D-695.
1.04 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Each completed manhole shall be examined for dimensional requirements,
hardness, and workmanship. All required ASTM 3753 testing shall be completed
and records of all testing shall be kept and copies of test records shall be
presented to customer upon formal written request within a reasonable time
period.
1.05 CERTIFICATIONS
A. As a basis of acceptance the manufacturer shall provide a independent
certification which consist of a copy of the manufacturer's test report and
THE Grou~. Inc.
J:\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\02531.doc
Fiberlrlass Manholes
July 2007
02531-1
accompanied by a copy of the test results that the manhole has been sampled"
tested, and inspected in accordance with the provisions of this specification and
meets all requirements.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 Resins
A. The resins used shall be a commercial grade unsaturated polyester resin or other
suitable polyester or vinyl ester resin.
2.02 Reinforcing Materials
A. The reinforcing materials shall be commercial Grade "E" type glass in the form of
continuous roving, and chop roving, having a coupling agent that will provide a
suitable bond between the glass reinforcement and the resin.
2.03 Interior Surfacing Material
A. The inner surface exposed to the chemical environment shall be a resin-rich layer
of 0.010 to 0.020 in. thick. The inner surface layer exposed to the corrosive
environment shall be followed with a minimum of two passes of chopped roving
of minimum length 0.5 in. (13 mm) to maximum length of 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) and
shall be applied uniformly to an equivalent weight of 3 ozlft. Each pass of
chopped roving shall be well-rolled prior to the application of additional
reinforcement. The combined thickness of the inner surface and interior layer
shall not be less than 0.10 in. (2.5 mm)
2.04 Wall Construction Procedure
A. After inner layer has been applied the manhole wall shall be constructed with
chop and continuous strand filament wound manufacturing process which insures
continuous reinforcement and uniform strength and composition. The cone
section, if produced separately, shall be affixed to the barrel section at the factory
with resin-glass reinforced joint resulting in a one piece unit. Seams shall be
fiberglassed on the inside and the outside using the same glass-resin jointing
procedure. Field joints shall not be acceptable by anyone except the
manufacturer.
2.05 Exterior Surface
A. For a UV inhibitor the resin on the exterior surface of the manhole shall have gray
pigment added for a minimum thickness .125 in.
TBE GrOUD. IDc.
J:\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\02531.doc
02531-2
Fiberglass Manholes
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.06 STUBOUTS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Upon request stubouts maybe installed. Installation of SDR PVC sewer pipe must
be performed by sanding, priming, and using resin fiber-reinforced hand layup.
The resin and fiberglass shall be same type and grade as used in the fabrication of
the fiberglass manhole. Inserta- Tee fittings maybe requested and installed per
manufacturers instructions. Kor-N-Seal boots may be installed by manhole
manufacturer using fiberglass reinforced pipe stubout for Kor-N-Seal boot sealing
surface.
2.07 MANHOLE BOTTOM
A. Upon request manholes may be required to have resin fiber-reinforced bottom.
Deeper manholes may require a minimum of two fiberglass channel stiffening
ribs. All fiberglass manholes with a fiberglass bottom will have a minimum 3-
inch anti-flotation ring, or anchor lugs as shown on the drawings. Manhole
bottom shall be a minimum of ~-inch thick.
2.08 FIBERGLASS ENCLOSED INVERT AND BENCH AREA
A. Upon request a fiberglass enclosed invert and bench area may be installed in the
manhole. The invert will be formed using a non-corrosive material and
completely enclosed in a minimum 1/4 inch layer of fiberglass chop.
2.09 Height Adjustment
A. Fiberglass manholes must have the ability to be height adjustable with the use of a
height adjustment ring. Height adjustment can be made as a field operation
without the use of uncured resins or fiberglass layups. Fiberglass manholes must
maintain all load and soundness characteristics required by A.S.T.M. D3753 after
height adjustment has occurred.
2.10 Fillers and Additives
A. Fillers, when used, shall be inert to the environment and manhole construction.
Sand shall not be accepted as an approved filler. Additives, such as thixotropic
agents, catalysts, promoters, etc., may be added as required by the specific
manufacturing process to be used to meet the requirements of this standard. The
resulting reinforced-plastic material must meet the requirements of this
specification.
2.11 REQUIREMENTS
A. Exterior Surface: The exterior surface shall be relatively smooth with no sharp
projections. Hand-work finish is acceptable if enough resin is present to eliminate
fiber show. The exterior surface shall be free of blisters larger than 0.5 in. in
diameter, delamination or fiber show.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J:\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\02531.doc
Fibenzlass Manholes
July 2007
02531-3
B. Interior Surface: The interior surface shall be resin rich with no exposed fibers.
The surface shall be free of crazing, delamination, blisters larger than 0.5 in. in
diameter and wrinkles of 0.125 in. or greater in depth. Surface pits shall be
permitted if they are less than 0.75 in. in diameter and less than 0.0625 deep.
Voids that cannot be broken with fmger pressure and that are entirely below the
resin surface shall be permitted if they are less than 0.5 in. in diameter and less
than 0.0625 in. thick.
C. Repairs: Any manhole repair are subject to meet all requirements of this
specification.
D. Manhole Length: Manhole lengths shall be in 6 inches increments +1- 2 inches
E. Diameter Tolerance: Tolerance of inside diameter shall be +1- 1 % of required
manhole diameter.
F. Load Rating: The complete manhole shall have a minimum dynamic-load rating
of 16,000 Ibf. when tested in accordance with A.S.T.M. 3753 8.4 (note 1). To
establish this rating the complete manhole shall not leak, crack, or suffer other
damage when load tested to 40,000 Ibf. and shall not deflect vertically downward
more than 0.25 in. at the point of load application when loaded to 24,000 lb.
G. Stiffness: The manhole cylinder shall have the minimum pipe-stiffuess values
shown in table below when tested in accordance with A.S.T.M. 3753 8.5 (note 1)
H;
LENGTH - FT.
3 - 6.5
7 - 12.5
13 - 20.5
21 - 25.5
26 - 35
FlAY - PSI
0.75
1.26
2.01
3.02
5.24
I. Soundness: In order to determine soundness, apply an air or water pressure test
to the manhole test sample. Test pressure shall not be less than 3 psig or greater
than 5 psig. While holding at the established pressure, inspect the entire manhole
for leaks. Any leakage through the laminate is cause for failure of the test. Refer
to A.S.T.M. 3753 8.6.
J. Chemical Resistance: The fiberglass manhole and all related components shall
be fabricated from corrosion proof material suitable for atmospheres containing
hydrogen sulfide and dilute sulfuric acid as well as other gases associated with the
wastewater collection system.
TBE GrOUD. Ine.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\02531.doc
02531-4
Fibere:lass Manholes
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.12 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
Hoop Axial
Direction Direction
a. Tensile Strength (psi) 18,000 5,000
b. Tensile Modules (psi) 0.6 x 106 0.7 X 106
c. Flexural Strength (psi) 26,000 4,500
d. Flexural Modules (psi) 1.4 x 106 0.7 X 106
e. Compressive (psi) 18,000 10,000
2.13 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION
A.
Each manhole shall be marked on the inside and outside with the following
information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Manufacturer's name or trademark
Manufacturer's factory location
Manufacturer's serial number
Total length
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 SIDPPING AND HANDLING
A. Do not drop or impact the fiberglass manhole. Fiberglass manhole may be lifted
by inserting a 4"x 4"x 30" timber into the top of manhole with cable attached or
by a sling or "choker" connection around center of manhole, lift as required. Use
of chains or cables in contact with the manhole surface is prohibited.
3.02 CONCRETE
A. Fiberglass Bottom: Concrete may be used to form bench area and invert. Also
concrete may be used on top of anti-flotation ring and around the reducer section
as required for buoyancy.
B. Concrete Bottom: Lower manhole into wet concrete until it rests at the proper
elevation, with a minimum of 4 in. of fiberglass manhole inserted into the wet
concrete below flow line, then move manhole to plumb. The concrete shall
extend a minimum of one foot from the outside wall of the manhole and a
minimum of 6 in. above incoming lines. On the inside concrete shall form the
bench and invert area and rise a minimum of 4 in. above incoming lines. If
required by Engineer concrete may be used around reducer section for buoyancy.
3.03 BACKFILL
A. Backfill Material: Unless shown otherwise on drawings and approved by the
Engineer, sand, crushed stone, or pea gravel shall be used for backfill around the
manhole for a minimum distance of one foot from the outside surface and
THE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\02531.doc
Fibendass Manholes
July 2007
02531-5
extending from the bottom of the excavation to the top of the reducer section.
Suitable material chosen from the excavation may be used for the remainder of
the backfill. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps or clods, which will
not readily break down under compaction. This material will be subject to
approval by Engineer.
B. BacktUl Procedure: Backfill shall be placed in layers of not more than 12 loose
measure inches and mechanically tamped to 95% Standard Proctor Density,
unless otherwise approved by Engineer. Flooding will not be permitted. Backfill
shall be placed in such a manner as to prevent any wedging action against the
fiberglass manhole structure.
END OF SECTION
THE Group. IDC.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\02531.doc
02531-6
Fibendass Manholes
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02532
FIBERGLASS WETWELL OR LIFT STATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Fiberglass reinforced polyester wetwells shall be manufactured from commercial
grade polyester resin or vinyl ester resin, with fiberglass reinforcements. The
resin system shall be suitable for atmospheres containing hydrogen sulfide and
dilute sulfuric acid as well as other gases associated with the wastewater
collection systems. The wetwell shall be a one piece unit manufactured by L. F.
Manufacturing, Inc., Giddings, Texas, 1-800-237-5791 or an approval equal.
B. MARKING AND IDENTMCATION: Each wetwell shall be marked with the
following information.
(I)Manufacturer's name or trademark
(2)Manufacturing special number
(3)Totallength and nominal diameter
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. RESIN: The resins used shall be a commercial grade unsaturated polyester resin.
B. REINFORCING MATERIALS: The reinforcing materials shall be commercial
Grade "E" type glass in the form of mat, continuous roving, chopped roving,
roving fabric, or a combination of the above, having a coupling agent that will
provide a suitable bond between the glass reinforcement and the resin.
C. SURFACING MATERIALS: If reinforcing materials is used on the surface
exposed to the contained substance, it shall be a commercial grade chemical-
resistant glass that will provide a suitable bond with the resin and leave a resin
rich surface.
D. FILLERS AND ADDITIVES: Fillers, when used, shall be inert to the
environment and wetwell construction. Additives, such as thixotropic agents,
catalysts, promoters, etc., may be added as required by the specific manufacturing
process to be used. The resulting reinforced plastic material must meet the
requirement of this specification.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\02532.doc
Fibenzlass Wetwell or Lift Station
July 2007
02532-1
2.02 FABRICATION
A. EXTERIOR SURFACE: The exterior surface shall be relatively smooth with no
sharp projections. Handwork finish is acceptable if enough resin is present to
eliminate fiber show. The exterior surface shall be free of blisters larger than 1/2
inch in diameter, delamination and fiber show.
B. INTERIOR SURFACE: The interior surface shall be resin rich with no exposed
fibers. The surface shall be free of grazing, delamination, blisters larger than 1/2
inch in diameter, and wrinkles of 1/8 inch or greater in depth. Surface pits shall be
permitted up to 6 square feet if they are less than 3/4 inch in diameter and less
than 1/16 inch deep.
C. FIBERGLASS REINFORCED BOTTOM: The bottom to be fabricated using
fiberglass material as stated in paragraph 2.01. Material and installation to meet
all physical requirements as per paragraph 2.03. Bottom to be attached to wetwell
pipe with fiberglass layup to comply with A.S.T.M.-D3299 specifications. When
reinforcement is necessary for strength, the reinforcement shall be fiberglass
channel laminated to wetwell bottom per A.S.T.M.-D3299.
D. FIBERGLASS REINFORCED TOP: The fiberglass wetwell top shall be
fabricated using fiberglass material as stated in paragraph 2.01. Material and
installation to meet all physical requirements as per paragraph 2.03. Top to be
attached to wetwell pipe with fiberglass layup to comply with A.S.T.M.-D3299
specifications. When reinforcement is necessary for strength, the reinforcement
shall be fiberglass channel laminated to wetwell bottom per A.S.T.M.-D3299.
E. INSTALLATION OF STUBOUTS: Effluent, service, or discharge lines made
be factory installed. Approved methods are PVC sewer pipe, Inserta- Tee fittings,
or Kor-N-Seal boots. Installation of stubouts to be fiberglass layup to comply
with A.S.T.M.-D3299 specifications.
F. DEFECTS NOT PERMITTED
1. Exposedfibers: glass fibers not wet out with resin.
2. Resin runs: runs of resin and sand on the surface.
3. Dry areas: areas with glass not wet out with resin.
4. Delamination: separation in the laminate.
5. Blisters: light colored areas larger than 1/2 inch in diameter.
6. Crazing: cracks caused by sharp objects.
7. Pits or Voids: air pockets.
8. Wrinkles: smooth irregularities in the surface.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\02532.doc
02532-2
Fibendass Wetwell or Lift Station
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9. Sharp projection: fiber or resin projections necessitating gloves for
handling.
2.03 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. LOAD RATING: The complete wetwell shall have a minimum dynamic-load
rating of 16,000 ft-Ibs when tested in accordance with Section A.5. To establish
this rating, the complete wetwell shall not leak, crack, or suffer other damage
when load tested to 40,000 ft-Ibs and shall not deflect vertically downward more
than 1/4 inch at the point of load application when loaded to 24,000 lbs.
B. STIFFNESS: The wetwell cylinder shall have the minimum pipe-stiffness values
shown in Table 1 when tested in accordance with Section A.5.
Table 1
STIFFNESS RE~ UIREMENTS
Lenlrth - Feet FlAY-PSI
10 to 20 2.01
21 to 30 3.02
31 to 40 5.24
C. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Hoop
Direction
18,000
0.8 x 10
26,000
Axial
Direction
5,000
0.7 x 10
4,500
1.4 X 106
0.7 X 106
0.7 X 106
0.7 X 106
2.04 TEST MEmODS
A. Tests shall be performed as specified in A.S.T.M.-D3753 latest edition, Section 8.
THE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\02532.doc
02532-3
Fiberglass Wetwell or Lift Station
July 2007
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INST ALLA TION
A. EXCAVATION
1. GENERAL: The limit of excavation shall be such to allow for placing
and removing forms, installing sheeting, shoring, bracing, etc. The
Contractor shall pile excavated material. in a manner that will not endanger
the work and will avoid obstructing sidewalks, driveways, power poles,
etc. Drainage shall be kept clear.
2. VERTICAL SIDES: When necessary to protect existing or proposed
structures or other improvements, the Contractor shall maintain vertical
sides of the excavation. The limit shall not exceed three feet outside the
footing on a vertical plane parallel to the footing except where specifically
approved otherwise by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide and
install any sheeting, shoring, and bracing as necessary to provide a safe
work area as required to protect workmen, structures, equipment, power
poles, etc. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and
adequacy of all sheeting, shoring, and bracing. The sheeting, shoring, and
bracing shall be removed as the excavation is backfilled in such a manner
as to prevent injurious caving.
3. SLOPING SIDES: Where sufficient space is available, the Contractor
shall be allowed to. back slope the sides of the excavation. The back slope
shall be such that the excavation shall be safe from caving. The type of
material being excavated shall govern the back slope used, but in any case
the back slope shall be no steeper than 1 foot horizontal to 1 foot vertical.
4. DEWATERING: The Contractor shall keep the excavation free from
water by use of cofferdams, bailing, pumping, well pointing, or any
combination as the particular situation may warrant. All dewatering
devices shall be installed in such a manner as to provide clearance for
construction, removal of forms, and inspection of exterior of form work.
It is the intent of these specifications that the foundation be placed on a
firm dry bed. The foundation bed shall be kept in a dewatered condition a
sufficient period of time to insure the safety of the structure. All
dewatering methods and procedure are subject to the approval of the
Engineer. The excavation shall be protected from excessive rainfall,
drainage and drying. The excavation shall be inspected and approved by
the Engineer before work on the structure is started. It is the intent of
these specifications that the Contractor provide a relatively smooth, firm
foundation bed for footings and slabs that bear directly on the undisturbed
earth without additional cost to the Owner, regardless of the soil
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\02532.doc
Fibendass Wetwell or Lift Station
July 2007
02532-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
conditions encountered. The Engineer will be the sole judge as to whether
these conditions have been met. The contractor shall pile excavated
material in a manner that will not endanger the work.
5. UNAUTHORIZED OVER EXCAVATION: Excavation for slabs,
footings, etc., that bear on earth shall not be carried below the elevation
shown on the drawings. In the event the excavation is carried on below
the indicated elevation, the Contractor shall bring the slab, footing, etc., to
the required grade by filling with concrete having a minimum compressive
strength of at least 3,000 PSI at 28 days.
B. HANDLING: Do not drop or impact the wetwell. Wetwells shall be chocked if
stored horizontally. Ifwetwells must be moved by rolling, the ground transversed
shall be smooth and free of rocks, debris, etc. FRP wetwells may be lifted by the
installation of two lifting lugs as specified by the manufacturer on the outside
surface near the top or.by a sling or "choker" connection around the center. Use
of chains or cables in contact with the wetwell surface is prohibited. Wetwells
may be lifted horizontally using one support point.
C. CUTOUTS: Cutouts in wetwell wall should be made with proper cutting tools,
such as jig saw or hole saw. Do not use axe or other impact-type tools.
D. INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE
1. TYPE 1: Make the cutout in the wetwell wall, the outside diameter of
pipe, plus 1/2 inch maximum. Slip pipe into position. Apply
industrial grade silicone around the pipe next to the wetwell
wall cutout on the inside and on the outside. Cover the outside
siliconed area with epoxy grout and backfill.
2. TYPE 2: Make the cutout in the wetwell wall, the outside diameter of
pipe, plus 1/2 inch maximum. Grind the outside surface of the
pipe and both the inside and the outside
3. Surfaces of the cutout in the wetwell wall. ( Apply a priming agent to any
PVC pipe that might be used before fiberglass lay-up.) Insert the pipe
through the cutout in the wall of the wetwell. Apply fiberglass putty to the
inside and the outside of the wetwell wall cutout, filling openings between
pipe and cutout. Make a good radius for the fiberglass lay-up. After putty
has set-up, fiberglass the pipe into place. Use one layer of woven roving
sandwiched between two layers of fiberglass mat. Allow fiberglass to
completely set-up before backfilling. Fiberglass layup method to comply
with A.S.T.M.-D3299 specifications.
THE GrouD. Inc.
I :\00083\OO083021.06\DOC\Specs\02532.doc
Fibenllass Wetwell or Lift Station
July 2007
02532-5
4. TYPE 3: Install Insert-A- Tee type fitting per manufacturers instruction.
(Fowler Mfg. Co., P.O. Box 767, Hillsboro, Or. 97123. PH.
503-359-5417) or approved equal.
E. CLOSED BOTTOM WETWELL INSTALLATION: Bottom of excavation
should be compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Density. Wetwells with diameters
72 inches or less require a base of 6 inches of crushed stone. Wetwells with
diameters larger than 72 inch should have poured reinforced concrete base one
foot deep and at least two feet larger than fiberglass wetwell outside diameter. As
soon as the concrete has set-up enough to support the fiberglass wetwell, lower
the wetwell into place. Place lag bolts or rebar through anti-flotation flange or
hold down lugs. Pour reinforced concrete a minimum of one foot deep and two
feet from outside wall of the wetwell. More concrete may be required in high
water table areas. In high water table areas you should consult your Engineer for
backfill requirements.
F. FIBERGLASS WETWELL TOP: The fiberglass top may have stubouts
installed or may have a raised fiberglass collar around the hatch opening. The
fiberglass top has been designed to withstand the weight of a concrete reinforced
slab to be installed over it.
G. BACKFILL
1. BACKFILL MATERIAL: Unless shown otherwise on the drawings,
sand or crushed stone shall be used for backfill around the wetwell for a
distance of two feet from the outside surface and extending from the
bottom of the excavation to the bottom of the top slab. Suitable material
chosen from the excavation may be used for the remainder of the backfill.
The material chosen shall be free of large lumps or clods, which will not
readily break down under compaction. This material will be subject to
approval by the Engineer. Backfill material shall be free of vegetation or
other extraneous material. Excavated materials which are to be used for
fill or backfill may be stockpiled on the site. Location of stockpiles shall
be approved by the Engineer. Top soil should be stockpiled separately
and used for finish grading around the structure.
2. SCHEDULE OF BACKFILLING: The Contractor may begin
backfilling of wetwell as soon as the concrete has been allowed to cure
and the forms removed.
3. BACKFILL LIFTS: Backfill shall be placed in layers of not more than
12 loose measure inches and mechanically tamped to at least 95%
Standard Proctor Density. Flooding will not be permitted. Backfill shall
be placed in such a manner as to prevent any wedging action against the
structure.
TBE Group. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\02532.doc
02532-6
Fibere:lass Wetwell or Lift Station
Iuly 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
H. TOP SLAB SUPPORT: When installing a fiberglass wetwell without a
fiberglass top you should pour a reinforced concrete slab support a minimum of
two feet outside of fiberglass wetwell wall and a minimum of six inches thick.
The slab shall be specified and designed by project engineer.
END OF SECTION
THE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\OO083021.06\DOC\Specs\02532.doc
Fibenzlass Wetwell or Lift Station
July 2007
02532-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02594
mGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment and materials to install High
Density Polyethylene (HOPE) pipe as specified and shown on the Drawings.
HOPE pipe shall be installed using horizontal directional drilling.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02413 - Horizontal Directional Drilling.
B. Section 03360 - Annular Space and Contact Grouting.
1.03 REFERENCE Specifications, codes, and STANDARDS
A. American Water Works Association (AWWA) C906: Large Polyethylene
Pressure Pipe
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:
1. D1248: Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion
Materials.
2. D2122: Standard Test Method of Determining Dimensions of
Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings.
3. D2657: Standard Practice for Heat-Joining Polyoletin Pipe and Fittings.
4. D2774: Standard Recommended Practice for Underground Installation of
Thermoplastic Pressure Piping.
5. D3261: Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for PE Plastic
Pipe and Tubing.
6. D3350: Standard Specifications for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fitting
Materials.
7. F714: Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-
PR) Based on Outside Diameter.
8. F2164: Standard Practice for Field Leak Testing of Polyethylene (PE)
Pressure Piping Systems using Hydrostatic Pressure.
TBE Group, Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\2594.doc
High Density Polyethylene Pipe
July 2007
02594-1
1.04 DEFINITIONS
Not Used
1.05 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. The pipe shall be installed using horizontal directional drilling (HDD) techniques
at the location shown on the Drawings.
B. Each reach of pipe to be installed by HDD methods shall be fully fabricated and
tested using hydrostatic pressure prior to and after installation, using the
procedures described in this section and referenced sections and standards.
C. All HDPE pipe shall have a white or light-colored inner surface. The outside
color of the pipe shall be color coded.
D. HDPE pipe joints shall be butt-fusion welded, following the procedures described
in this Section and referenced Sections and Standards.
E. The HDPE pipe shall be designed to withstand all anticipated service and
installation loads. The HDPE pipe shall have Dimension Ratio (DR) not greater
than 9 unless specified elsewhere. All pipe shall have a ductile iron pipe outside
diameter unless otherwise specified.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor necessary to assist the Owner in inspecting
pipe upon delivery. Contractor shall remove rejected pipe immediately.
B. The Contractor shall perform all tests in accordance with A WW A C906 and the
requirements of this Section. The acceptance or rejection of the pipe shall be
based on the test results. The Contractor shall submit test results and records to
Engineer within 48 hours of completion of tests.
C. The Contractor shall perform the butt-fusion of pipe sections in presence of pipe
manufacturer's representatives and ensure that manufacturer's recommended
practices are followed. The Contractor shall provide records of butt-fusion of
each joint.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Required submittals for HDPEpipe are listed below. Details of submittal
requirements follow the list in 1.07B.
1. Shop drawings and descriptive literature
TOE Group, IDe.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\2594.doc
02594-2
High Density Polyethylene Pipe
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
2. Certification of pipe materials
3. Certified copies of test reports of pipes
4. Pipe joining procedures, including machine generated print outs of each
as-built joint showing date, time, joint number, temperature, pressure, time
to join, etc.
5. Description of all testing procedures and equipment
6. Pressure test records
7. Pipe layout drawings
8. Results of pig test of post-installed pipe
9. Traffic control plan
B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following in accordance with the applicable Special
Provisions mentioned in the contract documents.
1. Shop drawings and descriptive literature showing pipe dimensions, joints,
wall thickness, pipe stiffness, pipe specials, outlets, flanged connections to
other pipe materials and other details for each size of pipe indicated.
2. Certification with each delivery that pipe meets or exceeds. the
requirements of this Specification and applicable Standards.
3. Certified copies of test reports with each delivery, stating compliance with
ASTM F714 and ASTM D33S0 as appropriate.
4. Pipe manufacturers' joint assembly procedure, and records of each joint
butt-fusion, as specified in this specification.
S. Description of all testing procedures.
6. Description of all testing equipment to be used during pressure and
leakage testing.
7. The Contractor shall submit all pressure test records for both the pre-
installation and post-installation tests to the Engineer within 24 hours of
completion of the tests.
8. Layout drawings showing: placement of pipe within the layout area;
location of temporary pipe support(s); and location and size of bending
radius for all curves along the alignment. Shop drawings shall show
extent of open trench sections at ends ofHDD section.
9. Calculations of maximum allowable pipe pulling tension. Calculations
showing that combination of pullback, buckling, and bending stresses
anticipated can be safely resisted by the HDPE pipe proposed for
installation by the Contractor.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\2594.doc
High Density Polyethylene Pipe
July 2007
02594-3
10. Results of post-installation pigging test to confirm deflections of installed
pipe are less than maximum allowable deflection of 5% of the nominal ill.
C. Submit traffic control plans and traffic circulation map, for any streets that shall
be temporarily obstructed by rig setup, pipe layout, or other Contractor
operations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HDPE PIPE
A. Provide HDPE for HDD installations for the nominal sizes and lengths shown on
the Drawings. Nominal sizes shown on the Drawings are based upon outside
diameter (OD) of the HDPE pipe. Unless shown otherwise, HDPE shall have a
dimension ratio (DR) not larger than 9.
B. Pipe shall be high molecular weight, high-density polyethylene pipe (HDPE).
C. The material shall be listed by the Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) with a designation
ofPE 3408 and have a minimum cell classification of 345434C, or D as described
in ASTM D3350. The outside color of the pipe shall be color coded.
D. The pipe material shall meet the requirements for Type III, Class B, Category 5,
Grade P34 material as described in ASTM D1248.
E. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that generated in the
manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw
material pipe.
F. Pipe and fittings shall be of the same material and class and made in conformance
with ASTM F714 and joined in accordance with ASTM D3261 as modified for
the specified material.
G. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of cracks, holes, foreign
inclusions or other injurious defects. Pipe shall be uniform in density and other
physical properties.
H. Any pipe not meeting these criteria shall be rejected.
I. HDPE pipe shall be delivered in 40-foot lengths or longer but not longer than can
be transported over highways and surface streets to the site. Perform layout,
fusing, and installation of HDPE such that adjacent work, traffic circulation and
access to private property are not affected.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\2594.doc
02594-4
High Density Polyethylene Pipe
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a
I
\1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.02 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Chevron Phillips Chemical Company LP, Woodlands, TIC
B. M.L. Sheldon Plastic Division, New York, NY.
C. KWH Pipe Corporation, Granada Hills, CA.
D. Or equal.
2.03 JOINTS
A. General:
1. Butt-fusion joints shall be used for all pipe installed by horizontal
directional drilling. Friction or pressure couplings are NOT
ACCEPTABLE. Flanged joints with SS backup flanges may be used at
transitions to different pipe materials.
B. Butt Fusion Joints:
1. Butt fusion techniques shall meet all requirements of ASTM D2657 and
D3261, and requirements of this Section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine the pipe layout area for evidence of rocks, debris, or other objects that
could damage the pipe during layout, fabrication, or installation. Remove all
objects and ensure layout area is compatible with Contractor's operations.
B. Examine the design bore path, open trench sections, each pipe and fitting, the
fabricated pipeline, and the layout area prior to pullback/installation to ensure:
1. Bore paths and trenches can be completed to the slopes, elevations, and
limits indicated on the Drawings.
2. No obstruction exists along the bore, trench, or layout area that might
interfere with installation.
3. No defects exist in the pipe string, butt fusion welds, pulling head,
swivels, break-away couplings, etc.
4. All crossing utilities and parallel utilities within 10 feet from centerline of
bore have been located and depth and lateral positions have been visually
confirmed and accurately marked.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\2594.doc
02594-5
High Density Polyethylene Pipe
July 2007
C. Inspect each pipe and fitting prior to fusion of the joints. Remove defective pipe
and fittings from the site.
D. Inspect the pipe string prior to installation for any defects. Repair any defects
prior to installation according to manufacturer's recommendations and in
accordance with these Specifications.
3.02 HANDLING
A. The Contractor shall provide and use a temporary pipe storage area as needed to
protect the pipe prior to installation.
B. Store all pipe materials in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations
until installation.
1. Keep pipe at ambient outdoor temperature.
2. Provide temporary shading.
3 . Avoid covering practices that will cause a temperature build-up.
C. Handle all pIpe material in accordance with pipe manufacturer's
recommendations. Handle all pipe material carefully to avoid any damage.
Gouges, cuts, or scratches greater that are deeper than 5% of the pipe wall
thickness shall be cause for rejection of the damaged pipe section.
3.03 FABRICATION
A. Pipeline fabrication specified herein applies to all pipeline installed by the
horizontal directional drilling technique,
B. The Contractor shall fabricate and test the pipeline prior to installation in the
prepared HDD bore path. The Contractor shall test the pipeline after install~tion
by HDD. The Contractor shall provide all necessary labor, equipment, and
materials to fabricate and test the pipeline.
C. The length of fabricated pipeline shall extend beyond the HDD entry and exit
locations sufficient distance to allow for expansion, contraction, and connections
to adjacent pipe sections.
D. The pipe layout and fabrication area shall be within the areas specified in the
drawings, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer.
E. The Contractor shall provide all necessary protective padding materials and skids
to protect the pipe during storage, fabrication, and installation.
TBE Group, IDC-
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\2594.doc
02594-6
High Density Polyethylene Pipe
July 2007
I
I'
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ij
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F. The Contractor shall provide adequate supports and rollers along the HDD pipe
layout area to support the pipe during installation and to protect the pipe from
damage by stones, debris, etc., on the ground.
O. Joints: All HDPE pipe joints shall be completed in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and following steps 3.3.0.1 through 3.3.0.6
below.
1. The Contractor shall clean and prepare joint surfaces according to
manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Joints in HDPE pipe shall be made using thermal butt-fusion welding
equipment designed for the specific purpose of permanently connecting
HDPE pipes. This equipment shall be capable of squarely facing the pipe
ends to be joined, properly heating each pipe end to the temperature range
specified by the pipe manufacturer, and applying and sustaining the
appropriate pressure, as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
3. The butt-fusion welding machine shall be outfitted with a measuring and
recording unit that documents the conditions existing during the fusion of
each individual weld. A printout that includes the date and time each joint
was made, the joint number, the initials of the machine operator, the platen
temperature at the time of mating, the pressure during the heating cycle,
the time period for the heating cycle, the pressure during the soak cycle,
and the time period of the soak cycle shall be machine-generated and
delivered to the Engineer at the end of each work shift. The recording unit
shall be a DataLogger, as manufactured by McElroy Manufacturing, Inc.,
or approved equal.
4. Butt-fusion welding equipment shall be as follows, or equal:
a. McElroy Hydraulic Fusion Machine, McElroy Manufacturing,
Tulsa, Oklahoma.
b. Proweld, Asahi/ America, Malden, Massachusetts.
5. Thermal-Butt-Fusion: The Contractor shall join all sections ofHDPE pipe
together, using thermal butt-fusion. The Contractor shall obtain optimum
fusion parameters from the pipe manufacturer, with regard to fusion
temperature, interface pressure, and cooling time. The Contractor shall
follow the manufacturer's recommendations with regard to the optimum
fusion parameters, and shall use proper equipment for the fusion process.
The Contractor shall employ only trained, experienced personnel to
conduct the fusion process.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\OOO83021.06\DOC\Specs\2594.doc
High Density Polyethylene Pipe
July 2007
02594-7
6. Butt-fusion welds shall be performed in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. The butt-fusion welding procedures are summarized below:
a. Clean each pipe end with a clean cotton cloth to remove dirt, oil,
grease, and other foreign materials.
b. Square (face) the mating surfaces of each of the pipes to be fused.
c. Bring the two (2) pipe ends together and adjust the pipe locations
to ensure proper alignment.
d. Verify that the surface temperature of the heater plate is between
375 to 400 degrees Fahrenheit and then clean the heater surface
with a clean cotton cloth.
e. Insert the heater plate between the pipe ends, bring the ends into
firm contact with the heater plate without applying pressure, and
achieve a proper melt pattern.
f. After achieving the proper melt bead, remove the heater plate and
quickly examine the pipe ends for complete melt.
g. Once complete melt has been accomplished, rapidly bring the pipe
ends together and apply pressure as recommended by the pipe
manufacturer.
h. Hold the pressure constant and at the proper level throughout the
cooling period, for the minimum time period recommended by the
pipe manufacturer or as necessary to achieve proper cooling.
1. The Contractor shall mark each joint with the individual joint
number, corresponding to the joint identification number appearing
on the printout of the data logger attached to the butt-fusion
welding machine. The printout shall be attached to the pipe, near
the joint, for collection by the Engineer.
j. The external and internal beads that result from the fusion process
shall not be removed.
k. Do not pull or cramp joints without permission of Engineer.
1. Contractor shall remove pipes that cannot be fitted together
properly, and replace with sound units.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. HDD Installation: Installation of pipe using the horizontal directional drilling
technique shall be performed as specified in Section 02413 - Horizontal
Directional Drilling.
B. Cleaning.
1. Prevent soil, water, and other materials from entering the pipeline.
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\2594.doc
02594-8
High Density Polyethylene Pipe
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Clean pipeline upon completion.
3.05 TESTING
A. HDPE pipe shall be tested in accordance with ASTM F2164, manufacturer's
recommendations, and this Section.
B. Clean all dirt, dust, oil, grease, and other foreign material from the pipe prior to
pressure and leakage tests.
C. Test Procedures:
1. Hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests of each entire pipeline reach.
2. Raise the pressure in section under test to 150 psi. of the maximum design
pressure.
3. Maintain the pressure for two (2) hours without additional pumping.
4. If unable to achieve and maintain specified pressure for two (2) hours
without additional pumping, locate and repair or replace defective pipe or
joint at no cost to the Owner and without time extension. Retest the
replaced or repaired pipe joint.
5. Provide water, bulkheads, blind flange assemblies, and all other labor,
equipment, and materials to perform testing as described herein.
D. Required Testing:
1. Pre-Installation Test of Pipe Installed by HDD: The Contractor shall
notify Engineer at least 48 hours prior to testing, and shall perform
hydrostatic pre-testing of the pipe to be installed by HDD in the presence
of the Engineer within one (1) day of completion of pipe welding/fusion
and before installation. Test pressures and air temperatures shall be
monitored with appropriate measurement equipment that has been
calibrated and inspected prior to the test.
2. Final Acceptance Test: The Contractor shall conduct a final test of the
installed pipeline. The test pressure shall be maintained with no loss of
pressure for at least two (2) hours. Pressure and temperature readings
shall be taken at not greater than fifteen (15) minute intervals during the
final test, using approved instruments. The Contractor shall repair any
defects discovered during this test, and repeat the test until the test
pressure can be maintained for at least four (4) hours without loss of
pressure.
3. The Contractor shall furnish and install all temporary testing plugs or caps,
pressure pumps, pipe connections, meters, gages, equipment, and labor.
TBE Group, Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\2594.doc
High Density Polyethylene Pipe
July 2007
02594-9
4. The Contractor shall test pipelines in open trench excavation before
completing backfill or placing CDF around open cut tie-in sections.
5. The Contractor shall conduct additional tests and repairs until pipe section
passes pressure and leakage tests at no additional cost to the Owner, and
without schedule extension.
6. The Contractor shall pass a pipe pig completely through the entire reach of
HDPE to confirm that pipe deflection is within allowable deflection limits.
The OD of the pig shall be 1" less than the internal diameter of the product
pIpe.
7. . Pig catcher shall be installed at the exit end of the pipeline to avoid flying
pIgS.
END OF SECTION
THE Group, Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\2594.doc
02594-10
High Density Polyethylene Pipe
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work included in this Section consists of providing all labor and materials,
reinforcing steel and welded wire mesh for cast-in-place concrete.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, all materials, workmanship and practices
shall meet all requirements of the following standards:
1. Standard Building Code.
2. ACI 318-77 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete,
including the latest Supplement.
3. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, MSP-2-81.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Complete shop drawings shall be submitted for review, including bar lists and
placing drawings. Drawings shall show the type, spacing and location of metal
bar supports, the grade of the reinforcing and the name of the manufacturer. The
type of coupler splice devices shall be designated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed bars of a USA manufacture.
Number 2 bars for ties may be plain, Grade 40.
B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, galvanized.
C. Metal Bar Supports: CRSI MSP-2, Chapter 3, Class 2, Type B, Stainless Steel
Protected Bar Supports.
D. Coupler Splice Devices: Cadweld, tension couplers capable of developing the
ultimate strength of the bar, as manufactured by Erico Products, Incorporated,
Solon, Ohio.
THE Group. Inc.
J :\00083 \00083021.06\DOaSpecs\03200.doc
Concrete Reinforcinl!:
July 2007
03200-1
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication shall not begin until the approval of the shop drawings by the Owner's
representative has been received. Fabrication shall meet all requirements of the
specified standards. Unless otherwise indicated the following shall apply:
1. Hooks shall be standard hooks.
2. Bottom bars shall extend a minimum of 6-inches into supporting
members.
3. Cover is to the outermost stirrup, tie or bar.
4. Splices are permitted only where indicated on the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Supporting Reinforcing: Bar supports shall be provided as required by CRSI
MSP-2. Top and bottom bars in slabs formed on earth shall be supported on
precase concrete block supports except where such bars are properly supported
from formwork. Precast concrete block supports are not required in slabs formed
on tremie concrete but may be used at the Contractor's option.
B. Placing Reinforcing: Placing of reinforcing and welded wire fabric shall be as
indicated on the Drawings and as recommended by CRSI MSP-2. Reinforcing
shall be securely tied and supported to prevent displacement during concrete
placement.
C. Welded Wire Fabric: Splices in welded wire fabric shall be such that the overlap
between outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet is not less than the spacing of
the cross wires, plus two inches. Fabric shall not be extended through expansion
joints or construction joints in slabs on grade except as otherwise indicated.
D. Coupler Splice: Unless indicated on the Drawings, full positive tension
connections shall be provided. Such devices shall be installed in accordance with
the recommendations of the manufacturer.
E. Dowels: Dowels shall be wired in position prior to placing concrete.
F. Field Bending: Heat shall not be used to bend bars. Bars shall not be bent after
being embedded in concrete.
G. Welding: Welding of reinforcing will not be permitted.
END OF SECTION
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\03200.doc
03200-2
Concrete Reinforcinl!:
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1\
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 03300 .
CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work included under this section consists of furnishing all materials, forms~
transportation and equipment, and performing all necessary labor to do all the
plain and reinforced concrete work shown on the Drawings, or incidental to the
proper execution of the work, or as herein specified.
B. Composition: Concrete shall be composed of cement, fine aggregate, coarse
aggregate, and water, so proportioned and mixed as to produce a plastic workable
mixture in accordance with all requirements under this section suitable to the
specific conditions of placement.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. All materials specified shall be certified by the producer or manufacturer that the
furnished material meets the specific requirements of the specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cement:
1. Cement: Cement for all concrete shall be domestic Portland cement that
conforms to the requirements of ASTM Designation C 150, Type I, Type
II or Type III. Type III cement for high early strength concrete shall be
used only for special locations and only with the approval of the Owner.
Type II cement containing the lowest calcium thiosulfate available shall be
used in the construction of sanitary sewer manholes, wet wells, pump
stations and other structures in contact with sewage.
2. Only one brand of cement shall be used in any individual structure unless
approved by the Owner. Cement which has become damaged, partially
set, lumpy or caked shall not be used and the entire contents of the sack or
container which contains such cement will be rejected. No salvaged or
reclaimed cement shall be used.
THE GraDD. IDe.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\03300.doc
03300-1
Concrete
July 2007
B. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall conform to the requirements of the Florida
Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction", latest edition.
C. Coarse Aggregate: Coarse aggregate shall conform to the requirements of the
Florida Department of. Transportation "Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction", latest edition, except that slag shall not be used and the
gradation shall be grade 57.
D. Water: Water shall be taken from a potable water supply and shall be fresh, clean
and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali or organic matter.
E. Admixtures: No admixtures shall be used except by specific approval. When
approved, admixtures shall meet the following minimum standards.
1. Air entraining agent: ASTM C 260.
2. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D and free
of chlorides.
F. Membrane Curing Compound: Membrane curing compound shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO Designation M 148, Type I-clear, or Type 2-white
pigmented.
G. Expansion Joint Filler:
1. Preformed expansion joint filler shall be of the nonextruding and resilient
bituminous type and conform to the requirements of AASHTO
Designation M 213.
2. Expansion joint filler shall be gray neoprene sponge rubber that conforms
to AASHTO Designation M 153, Type I.
H. Membrane: Membrane shall be a 6 mil polyethylene film.
I. Reinforcing Steel:
1. Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation
A 615, Deformed Grade 60, except where otherwise indicated.
a. The name of the manufacturer of the reinforcing steel shall be
called out in the shop drawings together with a sketch showing the
pattern of the deformation, including the mill mark.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\03300.doc
03300-2
Concrete
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
:1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. Bar reinforcement shall be accurately fabricated in accordance
with the latest CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. The Contractor
shall have prepared and shall submit to the Owner in sextuplicate,
necessary shop drawings and bar lists. The Contractm shall be
responsible for errors made in shop drawings reviewed by the
Owner or his authorized representative.
2. Welded wire fabric for concrete reinforcement shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM Designation A 185 and shall be formed with
smooth cold-drawn wire.
3. Cold-drawn wire for spirals shall be plain and shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM Designation A 82 with a minimum yield strength
of 70,000 psi.
4. Bar Supports:
a. Bar supports for reinforcing steel shall conform to the
requirements of CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, Chapter 3 and
shall be of a height to furnish the concrete cover called for on
Drawings. High chairs shall be furnished for bent or top bars in
solid slabs. Bar supports to be in contact with exterior surfaces of
concrete shall be Class C with plastic caps at least I-inch in length
on the leg tips, or Class E with stainless steel legs. Bar supports
shall be spaced not more than 100 times the diameter of the bars to
be supported, with not more than 1/4 spacing from the end of the
supported bars to the first chair.
b. Bar supports for slabs on grade shall be plain concrete blocks,
three inches high by 4-inches square with tie wires embedded in
support. Concrete strength shall be at 3,000 psi at time of use.
J. Forms: Forms shall be of wood, steel or other approved materials. The sheeting
for all exposed surfaces shall be 5-ply plywood, unless otherwise specifically
authorized. Forms of like character shall be used for similarly exposed surfaces in
order to produce a uniform appearance. Forming for exposed exterior concrete
from one foot below finished exterior grade to top of structure shall be carefully
fabricated so as to provide a smooth finish without defects. The type, size, shape,
quality and strength of all materials of which the forms are made shall be subject
to the approval of the Owner. If it is his opinion that the interior surfaces of the
forms are too irregular to produce the specified finish, they shall be lined with
smooth, dense, moisture resistant hardboard or other material of which he
approves.
K. Nonshrink Grout: Nonshrink grout shall be nonmetallic, pre-mixed type and shall
be Sauereisen F-IOO Level Fill, Master Builders Masterflow 713, Burke Non-
THE Group. Inc.
I :\00083\OOO83021.06\DOC\Specs\03300.doc
Concrete
Iuly 2007
03300-3
Ferrous, Non-Shrink Grout or approved equal.
L. Sealer: Sealer shall be applied over existing cleaned surface and proposed
concrete surface. The preventative silane shall be a clear solution of an Alkyl
Silane formulated at 20 percent and 40 percent active Silane in DOT non-
flammable, mineral spirit solvent. Product shall be system 8244 made Polymer
Systems, Inc. or equivalent.
2.02 CLASSIFICATION AND STRENGTH OF CONCRETE
A. Class and minimum strength requirements for concrete shall be as tabulated
below.
B. Strength Requirements: Concrete shall meet the following minimum 28-day
compressive strength.
Miscellaneous Concrete
(thrust blocks, pipe encasement, etc.)
'2,500 psi
Concrete Curb/Gutter/
Sidewalk/Pavement
3,000 psi
Cast-in-Place/Precast Structures
4,000 psi
Prestressed Structures
5,000 psi
2.03 PROPERTIES AND DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIX
A. Tests and Design Mix:
1. The Contractor, 30 days before the beginning of concrete work, shall
advise the Owner or his authorized representative of the proposed sources
of the materials,.or ready-mixed concrete, which the Contractor intends to
use in the work. A design mix which has been used by the concrete
supplier before, may be submitted for approval provided the proportions
and strengths meet the requirements of this specifications.
2. The source and manufacturer of material after once having been approved
shall not be changed by the Contractor, except as approved by the Owner
or his authorized representative, and additional laboratory tests may be
required by the Owner or his authorized representative to prove
conformance with specification requirements.
3. If during the progress of the work, tests indicate that concrete is not being
THE GrouD. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\03300.doc
03300-4
Concrete
Iuly 2007
,I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
produced in accordance with these Specifications, the Owner or his
authorized representative may order changes in the materials or theh
proportions so as to secure concrete as specified.
B. Slump: Slumps shall be as low as possible consistent with proper placing. Low
slump concrete shall be used for footing and slabs on grade. Medium slump
concrete shall be used for walls, columns and suspended slabs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Concrete Mixing:
1. Equipment: The concrete shall be ready-mixed and the equipment shall
conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM Designation C 94.
2. Measurement: Equipment necessary to positively determine and control
the actual amounts of all materials entering the concrete shall be provided
by the Contractor or the concrete manufacturer. All materials shall be
measured by weight, except that water may be measured by volume. A
bag of cement weighs 94 pounds.
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Forms:
1. Construction:
a. Forms shall be built true to line and grade, and shall be mortartight
and sufficiently rigid to prevent displacement or sagging between
supports. Particular attention shall be given to adequacy of
supports and shoring, which is the Contractor's responsibility. The
surfaces of forms used for permanently exposed surfaces shall be
smooth and free from irregularities, dents, sags, or holes. Forms
for surfaces to receive stucco finish shall be suitable for its
application. Bolts and rods used for internal ties shall be so
arranged that, when the forms are removed, all metal is at least 1 ~
inch from any concrete surface. Form ties shall be removed
immediately after removal of forms, and holes shall be thoroughly
plugged with grout within 24 hours after form removal and kept
damp for 4 days to prevent shrinking.
b. Wire ties will not be permitted. All forms shall be so constructed
that they can be removed without hammering or prying against the
concrete. Unless otherwise indicated, suitable moldings shall be
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\0008302] .06\DOC\Specs\03300.doc
03300-5
Concrete
July 2007
placed to bevel or round exposed edges at expansion joints or at
any other comers that are to remain. Beams below grade shall
have forms at both sides.
2. Coating: Prior to. the placing of steel reinforcement or concrete, forms fo]'
exposed surfaces shall be coated with a nonstaining paraffm base oil 0]'
mineral oil. Forms for unexposed surfaces may be thoroughly wetted in
lieu of oiling, immediately before the placing of concrete.
3. Removal: Forms and/or form supports shall not be removed from any
concrete until it has obtained sufficient strength to support itself and any
live loads it may be subjected to, and then only with the approval of the
Owner or his authorized representative.
B. Reinforcing Steel: When placed in the forms, reinforcement shall be clean and
free of all rust, scale, dust, dirt, paint, oil or other foreign material and shall be
accurately and securely positioned in the forms as shown on the Drawings before
the placing of concrete. Reinforcing steel shall be wired or otherwise fastened
together at intersections and shall be supported by concrete or metal supports,
spacers or hangers. Bar supports, where adjacent to the ground, shall be set on
precast concrete pads compressed into the subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain
approval before fastening reinforcing steel at intersections by welding methods.
1. Splicing of reinforcement shall be held to a minimum and shall be placed
at points of minimum stress. Bars shall be lapped at splices a minimum of
24 bar diameters unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or directed, and
shall be rigidly wired or clamped.
2. Wire fabric shall be straightened before placing and shall overlap one full
space of mesh at ends and edges and shall be securely fastened. Fabric
shall be supported so as to occupy its proper location in the concrete as
shown on the Drawings. Fabric shall not cross any expansion joints.
C. Embedded Items: In addition to steel reinforcement, pipes, inserts and other
metal objects as shown, specified or ordered shall be built into, set in or attached
to the concrete. All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent these objects
from being displaced, broken or deformed. Before concrete is placed, care shall
be taken to determine that all embedded parts are firmly and securely fastened in
place as indicated. They shall be thoroughly clean and free from paint or other
coating, rust, scale, oil, or any foreign matter. No wood shall be embedded in
concrete. The concrete shall be packed tightly around pipes and other metal work
to prevent leakage and to secure perfect adhesion. Drains shall be adequately
protected from intrusion of concrete.
THE GrouD. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\03300.doc
03300-6
Concrete
Iuly 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Concrete:
1. General: Reinforcement shall be secured in position, inspected and
approved before placing concrete. Runways for transporting concrete
shall not rest on reinforcing steel. Concrete not placed within 90 minutes
from the time mixing is started will be rejected and shall be removed from
the job by the Contractor. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as
practicable in:final position. Concrete shall not be allowed to drop freely
more than six feet. All concrete shall be placed in daylight and (excepting
seal concrete) shall be placed in the dry unless otherwise authorized in
writing.
2. Slabs Placed On Subgrade: Slab concrete placed on earth or fill subgrade
shall be separated from direct contact with the subgrade by 6 mil
polyethylene film or other approved material. Sidewalks and walkways
will not require a separation sheet. Polyethylene film shall be lapped four
inches on sides and 12 inches on ends.
3. Compaction: Concrete shall be compacted by internal vibrating
equipment, supplemented by hand rodding and tamping as required.
Vibrators shall in no case be used to move the concrete laterally inside the
forms. Internal vibrators shall maintain a speed of at least 50000 impulses
per minute when submerged in concrete. (At least one spare vibrator in
working condition shall be maintained at the site during concrete placing
operations.) Duration of vibration shall be limited to time necessary to
produce satisfactory consolidation without causing segregation. Vibrator
shall be moved constantly and placed in each specific spot only once.
4. Bonding: Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete that has
set, the surfaces of the set concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned so as to
expose the coarse aggregate and be free of laitance, coatings, foreign
matter and loose particles. Forms shall be retightened. The cleaned
surfaces shall be dampened, but not saturated, and then thoroughly
covered with a coat of cement grout of similar proportions to the mortar in
the concrete. The grout shall be as thick as possible on vertical surfaces
and at least 1/4-inch thick on horizontal surfaces. The fresh concrete shall
be placed before the grout has attained its initial set.
5. Protection: Rainwater shall not be allowed to increase the ratio of mixing
water nor to damage the surface finish. Concrete shall be protected from
disfigurement, damage, vibration, internal fractures and construction
overloads.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\03300.doc
Concrete
July 2007
03300-7
E. Curing:
1. All concrete, including gunite, shall be water cured by covering with a
double thickness of clean burlap, cotton mats, or other approved material
kept thoroughly saturated with water. The forms shall be kept wet until
removed and upon removal, the curing specified herein shall be started
immediately. Concrete shall be cured for a period of 7 days for normal
Portland cement or 4 days for high early strength cement. Concrete
poured in the dry shall not be submerged until it has attained sufficient
strength to adequately sustain the stress involved nor shall it be subjected
to flowing water across its surface until it has cured 4 days. Curing of
gunite shall be started as soon as possible without damaging surface and
not later than 2 hours after placing.
2. In lieu of wet burlap or cotton mats as specified above, concrete slabs may
be covered with wet sand and kept moist for the specified curing period.
The initial curing period of not less than 24 hours shall consist of the wet
burlap or cotton mat method, then the wet sand method may be utilized
until the end of the curing period.
3. Concrete surfaces which will not be coated, painted, plastered, stuccoed,
covered with tile or floor covering or requiring a bonding surface may be
cured by means of a membrane curing compound in lieu of the wet cure
method. The curing compound shall be applied immediately after a
satisfactory surface finish has been completed or forms have been
removed. The rate of application of membrane curing compound shall be
at least one gallon to every 200 square feet of exposed surface to be cured.
The membrane curing compound and impervious covering shall be
continuous and without defects and shall retain the required moisture in
the concrete. Membrane curing compound that becomes damaged by rain,
foot traffic or other conditions within 5 days of application shall be
reapplied.
F. Finishes:
1. As soon as forms can safely be removed, all irregular projections shall be
chipped off flush with the concrete surfaces. All voids produced by
spacers or any honeycombing shall be pointed up with grout and troweled
flush with the concrete surface immediately after removal of forms and
water cured to prevent shrinkage. Honeycombing shall be cut out to
expose a sound concrete surface prior to pointing. The use of mortar
pointing or patching shall be confined to the repair of small defects in
relatively green concrete. Where substantial repairs are required, the
defective concrete shall be cut out to sound concrete and repaired with
gunite or the concrete shall be removed and reconstructed. as directed.
THE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\03300.doc
03300-8
Concrete
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Floor slabs shall be brought to a true and even finish by power or hand
floating in a manner that will not bring excess fines to the surface. The
consistency of the concrete shall be such that water does not accumulate at
the surface. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the surface shall be
floated with a wood float and shall be steel troweled to a smooth finish.
Troweling shall be the minimum to obtain a smooth, dense surface and
shall not be done until the mortar has hardened sufficiently to prevent
excess fine material from being worked to the surface. If so directed, the
surface shall be brushed lightly with a push broom so as to produce a
nonslip surface.
3. Concrete surfaces that are not exposed in the completed work will require
no special finish other than such pointing up and rubbing as is necessary to
leave them smooth and impervious.
4. Other surfaces which will be exposed in the completed work shall be
finished by being rubbed smooth with a float and water or a carborundum
brick. The final surface shall be smooth and dense, without pits,
irregularities, blow holes or bubbles.
G. Grout:
1. Grout for pointing and patching shall consist of cement and fme aggregate
mixed in the proportions used in the concrete and a minimum amount of
water to produce a workable grout.
2. Material for grouting column base plates, anchor bolts, reinforcing bars,
pipe sleeves and pump base plates shall be of the nonshrink type and shall
be mixed and placed as recommended by the manufacturer. Machinery set
on grout pads shall not be operated until the grout has cured for at least 24
hours.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: The quality of the concrete as to conformance to the specifications is the
entire responsibility of the Contractor until it is accepted in place in the structure
and verified by the final cylinder tests made by the laboratory. Arrangements for
field testing shall be made by the Contractor with the laboratory as selected by the
Owner.
B. Compressive Tests: Standard laboratory compressive test cylinders will be
obtained by the laboratory when concrete is discharged from the mixer at the site
of the work. A set of 6 cylinders ~ll be obtained for each 60 cubic yards or
fraction thereof placed each day, for each type of concrete. The cylinders will be
cured under laboratory conditions and will be tested in two groups of three at 7
and 28 days of age, respectively.
THE Group. Ine.
1:\00083\0008302 I .06\DOC\Specs\03300.doc
Concrete
luly 2007
03300-9
C. Slump Tests: The laboratory of the Owner or their representative will make
slump tests of concrete as it is discharged from the mixer at the site of the work.
Slump tests will be made for each 25 cubic yards or "pour" of concrete placed.
Slump tests may be made on any batch and failure to meet specified slump
requirements will be sufficient cause for rejection of that batch.
D. Reports: Proper reports of all tests performed by the laboratory and submitted
promptly to the Owner. Such reports shall be properly labeled so as to identify
the portions of the project into which the materials have been placed.
END OF SECTION
TBE Group. Inc.
I :\OOO83\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\03300.doc
03300-10
Concrete
Iuly 2007
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 03600
GROUT
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work included in this Section consists of providing all labor, equipment,
materials, and incidentals. necessary to grout the various items listed hereinafter
and indicated on the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's literature shall be submitted for review on the following items:
I. Nonshrink grout data shall include grout properties,
mixing, surface preparation and installations.
1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Grouting materials shall be delivered and stored in unbroken containers with seals
and labels intact as packaged by the manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Group: Sauereisen F-IOO Level Fill, Master Builders
Masterflow 713, Burke Non-Ferrous, Non-Shrink Grout or approved equal pre-
mixed type.
B. Nonshrink Metallic Group: Master Builders Embeco 636 Grout Premixed type,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. All bonding surfaces shall be clean and dust and oil free.
THE GrouD. IDe.
J :\00083\OO083021.06\DOC\Specs\03600.doc
Grout
July 2007
03600-1
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Nonshrink Grout:
1. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout shall be used for grouting precast concrete
wall panel connections, column base plates, anchor bolts, reinforcing bars,
pipe sleeves, machinery supports and pump base plates.
2. Nonshrink grout shall be mixed and placed as recommended by the
manufacturer.
3. Grout shall be mixed as close to the work area as possible and transported
quickly to its fmal position in a manner which will not permit segregation
of materials.
4. Nonshrink grout shall be cured with water saturated burlap for at least
three days.
5. Machinery set on grout pads shall not be operated until the grout has cured
for at least 24 hours.
END OF SECTION
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\03600.doc
03600-2
Grout
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 11305
SUBMERSffiLE SEWAGE PUMPS, CONTROLS AND PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The contractor shall furnish and install, as described hereinafter and shown on the
plans, two constant speed, centrifugal sewage pumps to operate in the relocated
wet well of Pump Station 16. The pumps shall be as manufactured by Flygt
Corporation and be capable of operating in a submerged environment and shall be
explosion proof. Contractor shall provide a third identical pump, uninstalled,
delivered to the Owner. Additionally, the Contractor shall furnish and install
pump discharge piping, valves, a station control panel with soft start starters and
all miscellaneous and associated equipment required for a complete operating
sewage pumping system.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor shall perform such start-up operations and tests as delineated.
B. Pumps shall be tested to Hydraulic Institute (HI) Standards; International
Standards Organization (ISO) Standards are not acceptable. Certification must
accompany pumps.
C. Each pump shall have a stainless steel nameplate indicating the design capacity in
GPM with the one pump operating, the TDH with one pump operating, RPM,
Voltage, Full-Load Amperage, Date of Manufacture and Explosion-Proof Listing
Organization. The nameplate shall read GPM at TDH.
D. All equipment shall be installed by skilled workmen in accordance with the
instructions of the equipment supplier.
E. All equipment supplied shall have ample means oflubrication for all bearings and
other metal surfaces in sliding contact. The Contractor shall provide all
lubricants, fuel and power necessary to start-up, test, and place the pumping
facility in operation.
F. Guaranteed Parts Stock Program: The pump supplier shall have a guaranteed parts
stock program in the State of Florida. These parts shall include at least one set of
spare parts as detailed below for each different model of pump supplied on this
Contract.
THE GrouD. IDe.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\11305.doc
Submersible SeWll2e PumDS. Controls and Panels
July 2007
11305-1
Upper Mechanical Seal
Lower Mechanical Seal
Cable Entry Washer/Grommet
Complete Set of "0" Rings
Inspection Plug Washers
Impeller Bolt '
Lower Bearing
Upper Bearing
Wear Rings
Impeller Key
Motor Cable
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: The contractor shall submit six sets of detailed and dimensioned
working shop drawings showing the construction of the proposed facility and
installation of all equipment complete in every respect. Each drawing shall be
indexed and/or referenced to the Contract Drawings and Specifications. No work
upon the manufacture or fabrication of any equipment shall be performed until the
Engineer's review has been obtained. Certified pump curves shall be submitted
with the shop drawings and shall indicate actual test performance of units
furnished. The Contractor shall also submit layout drawings showing exact
installation, piping and foundation details for the pumping units being installed.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: The pump manufacturer shall warrant the pumps being supplied to the
Owner against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of five years
under normal use, operation and service. In addition, the manufacturer shall
replace certain parts which shall become defective through normal use and wear
on a progressive schedule of cost for a period of five years: parts included are the
mechanical seal, impeller, pump housing, wear ring and ball bearings. The
warranty shall be in published form, apply to all similar units and be submitted
with the shop drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. The complete guide rail slide bracket assembly shall be non-sparking.
B. Pipe and fittings shall be ductile iron
2.02 PUMPS
A. Pumps to be furnished and installed shall be non-clog, heavy duty municipal-type
submersible pumps. Pumps shall be FM (Factory Mutual Research) rated for
Class I, Division I, Group C and D environments. Each pump shall be capable of
passing a three-inch diameter sphere and any trash or stringy material which can
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\ 11305 .doc
11305-2
Submersible SewalZe PUffins. Controls and Panels
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
pass through a four-inch sewage collection system. The pump/motor unit must be
non-overloading across the complete head capacity range of the pump. Pumps
shall meet the following listed minimum operating conditions.
NO.OF PUMPS EACH PUMP .....
.. . STATION INSTALLED GPM .. TDR RPM
PS-16 2* 1,300 75 1755
* Third identical uninstalled pump shall be provided to Owner.
B. Pump shall be of the volute-type and centerline discharge design to minimize
clogging or flow interference. They shall be of one-piece construction, made from
cast iron, Class 30, in accordance with ASTM Specifications A-48, latest revision.
The design shall be for a wet pit installation, permanently connected to outlet
pipes. The pump shall be capable of operating in a continuous submerged
condition.
C. Impellers shall be of the non-clog type, one piece construction and mounted
directly on a stainless steel pump motor shaft.
D. For information purposes, the design of these facilities and dimensional layouts
are based on the following pump model:
.....S'fATIO~ ............... MANUFACTURER PUMP MODEL IlVIPELLER NOMINAli@...
.
PS-16 Flygt C-3201 452 50
2.03 MOTORS
A. Pumps and motors shall be constructed as integral units and shall be the products
of one manufacturer/supplier. Each motor shall be UL listed, sealed, submersible-
type explosion proof electric motors for operation on 480 Volt, 3-Phase, four-
wire, 60 Hertz, AC power.
B. The motor nameplate rating shall not be exceeded by the brake horsepower
requirement of the pump for the design condition of service specified and for the
impeller-diameter furnished. The motor shaft shall be stainless steel, impervious
to the liquid and waste matter being pumped. Shaft supports shall be a single-
row, heavy-duty ball bearings for the upper support and a double-row, heavy-duty
ball bearings for the lower support.
C. Motors shall be air-filled. Oil-filled motors shall not be considered equal.
D. Motors shall have tandem mechanical seals, and the lower seal shall be silicone
THE GrouD. loCo
J :\00083\OOO83021.06\DOC\Specs\I130S.doc
Submersible Sewa2e PumDS. Controls and Panels
July 2007
11305-3
carbide. Mechanical seals shall not require pumped liquid as a lubricant. Motors
shall be capable of continuous operation in a submerged, partially-submerged or
non-submerged condition.
E. Motors shall have a seal probe in the motor housing to detect the presence of
moisture. Motors shall also have a bimetallic electromechanical temperature
monitor embedded in each phase to de-activate the pump. The temperature
monitors shall be self-resetting. A fault condition shall shut down pump and
annunciate at the control panel.
F. Motor cables shall be in accordance with NEC specifications. Cables provided
shall be a minimum of 60 feet in length. Cables shall run from the pump to the
junction box without splicing. Motor bearings shall be pre-lubricated at the
factory and have an electric motor specification B-1 0, life of 50,000 hours.
2.04 STATION CONTROL PANEL
A. The Pump Control Panel, rack mounted, shall be a dead front style enclosure as
shown on the plans and defined in the Technical Specifications, DIVISION
16000, ELECTRICAL. The panel shall be supplied by the pump supplier to
insure compatibility between pumps and all controls. The cabinet shall have fully-
gasketed hinged door with ground strap. The door shall be operated by a single
lockable lever type handle that actuates a three-point interior latching mechanism
with a one-quarter turn.
B. An inner aluminum door mounted on a continuous piano-type hinge shall be
furnished for protection against exposed wiring and shall have cut-outs for access
to the circuit breakers.
C. All wiring within the panel shall be as specified in the Technical Specifications,
DIVISION 16000, ELECTRICAL. All panel components shall be UL listed and
conform to all applicable codes and regulations as specified in the Technical
Specifications, DIVISION 16000, ELECTRICAL.
D. Outer and inner doors shall have provisions to be held in the "open" position. A
permanent metal pocket shall be provided on the left exterior side of the enclosure
door for 8~-inch by ll-inch papers. The panel shall have a wiring schematic
permanently affixed to the interior of the enclosure door and it will show the
numbering and color coding of the wires in the control panel.
2.05 CONTROL SYSTEM
A. The control system shall provide for the automatic and manual control of the
pumps to maintain a pumped down condition of the wet well.
THE GrouD. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\l1305.doc
11305-4
Submersible Sewa!!:e Pumps. Controls and Panels
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. The control system shall control two submersible sewage pumps at the station
based upon a transducer water level sensing system.
C. The controller shall provide adjustable on/off level settings for each pump. The
pumps shall operate in a lead and lag mode, based on corresponding rising and
falling wetwell water levels, as selected by the operator. The controller shall
recognize and alarm a f~led pump, and automatically select the other pump as the
operating pump.
1. As the level in the wet well rises, the lead pump, as determined by the
alternator, shall start and pump the station to the "off" position. In the
event the incoming flow exceeds the capacity of the lead pump, the
number one lag pump shall start and both pumps shall run to the off level.
The alternator shall switch when the off level is. reached. Alternation
control is provided through the RTU control functions. The controller
shall also contain suitable high-level and low-level alarms.
D. If the level continues to rise, alarm functions shall be activated. A dual float
controller backup system shall be provided for the lift station. If primary
controller fails to maintain control, as the level rises the high-level float switch
shall call for two pumps to start eight seconds apart and activate the station alarm
relay. The pumps shall continue to operate until the lower float switch is
activated on the falling water level.
2.06 ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT
A. The control system shall include, but not be limited to, the equipment listed
below.
1. A three position Hand/Off! Auto switch shall be provided for each pump.
The switch shall be NEMA 4x rated with ten amp contacts. A position
indicating legend plate shall be provided. The Hand/Off! Auto switches
shall be mounted on the inner dead front door.
2. A green "Run" pilot indicator for each pump shall be mounted on the dead
front door.
3. An elapsed time meter for each pump shall be mounted on the dead front
door. The meter shall operate on 120 V AC, shall indicated in hours (six
digits) and tenths and shall be non-resetable.
4. Pilot lights and running time meters.
5. Main disconnect switches and main circuit breakers.
6. High level alarms including externally mounted alarm light and horn.
TIE GrouD. Inc.
J:\00083\OOO83021.06\DOaSpecs\11305.doc
Submersible SeWll2e Pumos. Controls and Panels
July 2007
11305-5
7. Auxiliary power receptacle.
8. Lightning arrestor and surge protection.
2.07 MISCELLANEOUS
A. A final Record Drawing, laminated in mylar, shall be attached to the inside of the
front door. A list of all legends shall be included.
B. All component parts in the control panel shall be permanently marked and
identified as they are indicated on the drawing. Marking shall be on the back
plate adjacent to the component. All control conductors shall be identified with
wire markers at each end as close as practical to the end of conductor.
C. All panels shall be tested to the power requirements as shown on the plans to
assure proper operation of all the components. Each control function shall be
activated to check for proper indication.
D. All equipment shall be guaranteed for a period of three years from date of
shipment. The guarantee is effective against all defects in workmanship and/or
defective component. The warranty is limited to replacement or repair of the
defective equipment.
E. The manufacturer shall be a UL listed shop for industrial control systems and
shall provide evidence of such on request from the engineer or using authority.
2.08 ACCESS HATCHES AND GUIDE RAILS
A. Stainless steel dual type upper guide rail holders shall be provided and mounted
below the casting frame as indicated on the drawings. The lower guide holders
shall be integral with the discharge base elbow. The guide rails shall be
continuous Schedule 40 welded type 304 stainless steel pipes of the size
recommended by the pump manufacturer. A 304 stainless steel power Cable and
control Cable holder shall be provided for each pump and installed as indicated on
the drawings. The rails shall be cushioned with rubber grommets to eliminate
vibration noise. All material used to fabricate upper guide holders, cable holders,
etc., shall be aluminum or 304 stainless steel. All bolts, anchors, hinge pins and
other fasteners shall be 304 stainless steel.
B. Valve Vault Access Hatches: Shall be 300 IbisF load rated. Frames and covers
complete with hinges, locking devices and/or hand lifts shall be aluminum and/or
stainless steel construction. The frame shall have safety locking rails for locking
in the open position. The covers shall be checker plate design. All access vaults
TBE GrOUD. IDC.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\ 11305.doc
11305-'6
Submersible Sewal!:e Pumns. Controls and Panels
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
shall be equipped with a hatch safety net, Hatch Net 120S by Safe Approach, Inc.,
or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All material and equipment shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and as
recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Additional items of construction, such as valve boxes, flanged adapters, thrust
blocks and other items necessary for the complete installation of the system shall
be included and shall be constructed of first-class materials.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests: A qualified representative of the pumping system supplier shall
inspect the installation and supervise start-up performed by the Contractor's
personnel. All components of the systems shall be tested for proper operation
during the start-up operation.
B. Maintenance Procedures: After the equipment has been placed into operation, the
qualified representative of the pump system supplier shall instruct the Owner's
personnel in proper operating and maintenance procedures without additional cost
to the Owner.
C. Testing: Upon completion of installation, the Contractor shall test the facilities to
demonstrate that the station performs as specified. He shall perform the initial
testing to assure himself that acceptance testing can be satisfactorily completed.
The Contractor shall then arrange for the equipment manufacturer to furnish a
qualified representative to check the installation and conduct testing for final
acceptance, and shall give the Engineer written notice as to the date and time of
the test. An acceptance test shall demonstrate that all items are in compliance
with the function as specified. Testing shall illustrate the following:
1. That all units have been properly installed and are in correct alignment.
2. That all units operate without overheating or overloading any parts and
without objectional vibration.
3. That there are no mechanical defects in any of the parts.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\OOO83021.06\DOC\Specs\l1305.doc
Submersible Sewal!:e PumDS. Controls and Panels
July 2007
11305-7
4. That all pumps can deliver the specified pressure and quantity and have
correct rotation, volts and amps.
5. That the pumps shall be capable of pumping raw, unscreened sewage.
6. That all pumps, sensors and controls perform satisfactorily as to sequence
control, correct start and stop elevations, and proper high and low level
alarm functions.
In addition to furnishing, delivering, installing and testing equipment, the
Contractor shall provide the services of competent manufacturing representatives
for the period indicated. Additional time, beyond that specified which is
necessitated by installation or other non-City related requirements, shall be paid
for by the Contractor. Such representatives shall assist the City's personnel in
start-up, instructing operating personnel of the City in the maintenance and
operation of the equipment, conducting tests, and making recommendations for
producing the most efficient results. These services shall be made during the
initial operation of the pumping station and shall be over and above any services
necessary during construction and to correct defective materials or workmanship
during the guarantee period. These representatives shall be specially trained and
qualified for installation, adjustment, start-up and testing work and shall" not be
sales representatives only. The cost for such representation, including subsistence
and travel, shall be included under this Contract. The time required for
instructing the City's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the
station is not to exceed one day.
END OF SECTION
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\ I 1305.doc
11305-8
Submersible SewalZe PUffins. Controls and Panels
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15050
PIPING, FITTINGS, VAL YES AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work included in this Section consists of furnishing all labor, equipment and
materials and in performing all operations necessary for the construction or
installation of all piping, valves, valve boxes and all castings and appurtenances
within, adjacent and cOIlIiecting to the sewage pump station and inside the limits
of the work shown therefore, complete and ready for operation as shown on the
Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. In general, the following shop or data drawings shall be submitted for approval:
1. Test certificates for pipe (Mill Test Reports)
2. Details for Restrained Joints
3. All Valves and Valve Boxes
4. Weld Inspection Reports
5 Meter Vault Cover and Frame
6. Detail Piping Layout Drawings
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
During shipping, delivering and installing pipe and accessories, they shall be
handled in such a manner as to ensure a sound undamaged condition.
B.
Particular care shall be taken not to damage the pipe lining and coating.
PART 1
PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE
A. General: Pipe for wastewater lines and drain lines, 4-inches in nominal inside
diameter or greater shall be ductile iron pipe, except as otherwise indicated. Pipe
for underground use shall be mechanical or push on joints, and exposed pipe in
structures, i.e., wet well, valve vault, etc., for above ground use shall be flanged,
unless otherwise indicated. Pipe shall be provided with joint types, designs and
materials compatible to the pipe with which it connects.
B. Iron Pipe Lining for Sewage: Ductile iron pipe and fittings for sanitary sewer
force mains shall be epoxy lined. Epoxy lining shall be 40 mil nominal dry film
TBE Groun. Inc.
J :\00083\OO083021.06\DOC\Specs\15050.doc
Pipinlt. Fittinlls. Valves and Accessories
July 2007
15050-1
thickness (multi-pass process) and shall be Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy as
manufactured by the Protecto Division of Vulcan Painters, Inc., or equal. The
interior of the ductile iron pipe and fittings shall not have been lined with any
substance prior to the application of the specified lining material and no coating
shall have been applied to the first six inches of the exterior of the spigot ends.
The lining shall be applied by a competent firm with a successful history of
applying linings to the interior of ductile iron pipe and fittings. Surface
preparation, lining of pipe, coating of bell 'sockets and spigot ends, number of
coats and touch up and repair shall be in accordance with the manufacturer> s
recommendations. The pipe or fitting. manufacturer shall supply a certificate
attesting that the applicator met the requirements of this specification; that the
material used was as specified; that the linings have the nominal dry film
thickness specified; and, that the linings have no pinholes when tested with a
nondestructive 2,500 volt test. Lined pipe and fittings shall be handled only from
the outside of the pipe and fittings.
C. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be class 51 or greater. All buried ductile iron
pipe and fittings shall be polyethylene encased (minimum 8 mil) in accordance
with ANSI! A WW A A21.5/C 1 05 and ASTM A674. All fittings shall be restrained
joints.
D. Plastic Pipe:
1. Unless otherwise specified, all pressure pipe smaller than 4-inches in
nominal inside diameter shall be PVC. PVC pipe that is exposed to
sunlight shall either be resilient to deterioration due to sunlight or be
coated in some manner so as to protect the pipe.
2. Plastic pipe smaller than 2-inches shall be Schedule 80, PVC pipe, with
threaded joints and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
Designation D 1785, Class 1120 or 1220.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe 2-inches in
diameter or larger shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 2241,
Class 1120 or 1220, SDR 26, for a minimum pressure rating of 160 PSI at
730F.
4. Plastic pipe furnished under (2) and (3) above shall bear the approved seal
of the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).
5. Unless otherwise indicated, plastic gravity sewer pipe and fittings shall be
unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and conform to the requirements
of ASTM Designation D 3034, Type PSM, Class 12454-B or 12454-C,
with elastomeric gasket joints. PVC pipe and fittings shall be as
manufacturer by Johns-Manville, Certainteed or approved equal.
E. Identification Tape: Electronically traceable identification tape shall be installed
18 inches above installed pipe on a tamped backfill surface, continuously over all
TOE Group. Inc.
J:\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\15050.doc
15050-2
Pioing. Fittings. Valves and Accessories
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
mains. The tape shall be a minimum of 3-inches wide, have a minimum tensile
strength of 50 poundS and have the words "force main" printed on it.
2.02 FITTINGS AND VALVES
A. Pipe Fittings:
1. Iron: Cast iron and ductile iron pipe fittings shall have a 250 PSI pressure
rating and shall conform to the requirements of A WW A Standard C 110.
Joints shall be of the type shown on the drawings and fit the pipe
furnished. Flanges shall be drilled for ANSI Standard BI6.1, 125 pound
template. Grooved end joint fittings shall conform to the applicable
requirements of this paragraph. The lining and coating for the fittings
shall be as specified above for ductile iron pipe. Wall fittings or sleeves
shall be cast iron selected with length suitable for the wall in which they
are placed.
2. Plastic: Fittings for Schedule 80 plastic pipe shall be Schedule 80 and
conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation D 2464 and D 2467
for threaded or solvent weld joints respectively. Fittings for plastic pipe
with O-ring joints shall be of the type recommended by the pipe
manufacturer and conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation D
2467. All fittings shall bear the approval stamp of the National Sanitation
Foundation.
3. Unions: All pipe, tubing and hose connections to hydraulic or air operated
equipment, appurtenances and accessories shall be made with a union type
fitting.
B. Joint Material:
I. Mechanical Joints: Cast iron and ductile iron pipe mechanical joints and
push on joints shall be made up with rubber gaskets conforming to ANSI
Standard A21.11. Glands for mechanical joint pipe shall be bituminous
coated and bolts and nuts shall be of high strength cast iront or high
strength low alloy steel as specified in ANSI Standard A21.11.
2. Iron Pipe Flanged Joints: Flanged connections shall comply with the
requirements of ANSI Standard BI6.1, 125 pound class. Flanges for
ductile iron pipe shall be of ductile iron. Machine bolts shall be the best
commercial quality steel with hexagonal nuts of the same quality metal.
Gaskets shall be full face (ring face) of neoprene, red rubber or corrugated
copper.
3. Grooved End Couplings: Grooved end couplings for ductile iron pipe
shall not be allowed.
TBE Grou~. IDC.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\15050.doc
fioin!!. Fittinlls. Valves and Accessories
July 2007
15050-3
4. Solvent Joints: Joints for plastic pipe and fittings shall be made using
material and methods as recommended by the plastic pipe manufacturer.
5. Couplings: Plain end joint material shall be Dresser couplings, Style 38,
or approved equal.
6. Restrained Joints: Restrained joints may be of the types fabricated by the
various manufacturers upon approval of the Engineer of details submitted
by the Contractor. Restrained joints that require field welding or grooves,
or joints using set screws will not be acceptable.
C. Wall Sleeves, Pipes and Castings:
1. Wall Sleeves: Wall sleeves shall be of cast iron, ductile iron or carbon
steel with steel galvanized after fabrication and shall have a waterstop
located in the center of the wall. Sleeves shall be provided with seals and
shall be oversized as required for the installation of seals. Sleeves shall
terminate flush with fmished surfac~s of walls and ceilings, and shall
extend 2-inches above fmished floor. Escutcheons shall be provided at
walls and floor to completely conceal the sleeves smaller than 3-inches.
Escutcheons shall be cast iron, nickel plated split-type.
2. Interior: Wall sleeves shall be installed for all piping passing through
interior walls and floors, except where noted on the drawings. Sleeves
shall be of sufficient size to pass the pipe without binding. Sleeves shall
terminate flush with finished surfaces of walls and ceilings, and shall
extend 2-inches above finished floor. Escutcheons shall be provided at
walls and floor to completely conceal the sleeves smaller than 3-inches.
Escutcheons shall be cast iron, nickel plated split-type.
3. Wall Pipes: All piping passing through exterior walls and base slabs shall
be provided with wall pipes. All pipes shall be of ductile iron and shall
have a waterstop located in the center of the wall. Each wall pipe shall be
of the same grade, thickness and interior coating as the piping to which it
is joined. Those portions of the wall pipes that are buried shall have a
coal-tar outside coating.
4. Wall Sleeve Seals: Wall sleeve seals shall be modular mechanical type
consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped.. to continuously
fill the annular space between the pipe and wall sleeve. Links shall be
loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the
pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt and nut. After the seal assembly
is positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolts shall cause the rubber
sealing elements to expand and provide an absolutely water-tight seal
between the pipe and wall sleeve. The synthetic rubber shall be suitable
for exposure to treated sewage effluent and groundwater. Bolts, nuts and
hardware shall be 18-8 stainless steel. The seals shall be Link Seal as
manufactured by Thunderline Corporation or equal, and the wall sleeve
and seal shall be sized as recommended by the seal manufacturer.
THE Grouo. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\15050.doc
15050-4
PipinlZ. FittinlZs. Valves and Accessories
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Plug Valves:
1. Eccentric plug valves shall be as manufactured by DeZurik, Homestead or
approved equaL
2. Plug valves shall be tested in accordance with current A WW A Standards.
3. Valves shall be of the non-lubricated eccentric type with resilient faced
plugs and shall be furnished with end connections as shown on the plans.
Flanged valves shall be faced and drilled to the ANSI 125/150 lb.
standard. Mechanical joint ends shall be to the A WWWA Standard C 111-
72. Bell ends shall be to the A WW A Standard C 1 00-55 Class B. Screwed
ends shall be to the NPT standard.
4. Valve bodies shall be of ASTM AI26 Class B Semi-steel, 31,000 psi
tensile strength minimum in compliance with A WW A Standard C507-73,
Section 5.1 and AWWA Standard C504-70 Section 6.4. Port areas for
valves 20-inches and smaller shall be 80 percent of full pipe area. Valves
24-inch and larger shall have a minimum port area of 100 percent of full
nominal pipe area. All exposed nuts, bolts, springs, washers, etc. shall be
zinc or cadmium plated. Resilient plug facings shall be of Hycar or
Neoprene.
5. Valves shall be furnished with permanently lubricated stainless steel or
oil-impregnated bronze upper and lower plug stem bushings. These
bearings shall comply with current A WW A Standards.
E. Gate Valves:
1. Gate valves 3 inches through 12 inches shall be resilient-seated and meet
or exceed all the requirements of A WW A Standard C 509. The resilient
seating arrangement shall provide zero leakage at the design working
pressure when installed with line flow in either direction. All ferrous
surfaces inside and outside shall have a fusion-bonded epoxy coating. All
valves shall be provided with O-ring seals. The design and machining of
valves shall be such as to permit replacing the O-ring seals in the valves
while in service without leakage.
2. The valve body, bonnets, and bonnet cover shall be cast iron ASTM AI26,
Class B. All ferrous subfaces inside and outside shall have a fusion-
bonded epoxy coating. A 2-inch wrench nut shall be provided for
operating the valve in a buried installation.
3. The valve shall be a non-rising stem with the stem made of cast, forged, or
rolled bronze as specified in AWWA C509. Two stem seals shall be
provided and shall be of the o-ring type. The stem must not be
independent of the gate.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\OO083021.06\DOC\Specs\ 15050.doc
Pioinl!. Fittin2S. Valves and Accessories
July 2007
15050-5
F. Check Valves:
,
1. Small Check Valves: Small check valves 4-inches or less shall be
constructed of Schedule 80 PVC with union ends. These check valves
shall be used where plans call for "Flapper Check Valves" at the end of
the trap on the drain from the valve vault.
2. Large Check Valves: Swing check valves 4-inches through 30-inches
shall be constructed with heavy cast iron or cast steel body with a bronze
or stainless steel seat ring, a noncorrosive shaft for attachment of weight
and lever. The valve must be tight seating, its seat ring shall be renewable
and must be securely held in place by a threaded joint; the valve disc shall
be of cast iron or cast steel and shall be suspended from a noncorrosive
shaft which will pass through a stuffing box. Check valves shall
absolutely prevent the return of wattfr back through the valve when the
inlet pressure decreases below the delivery pressure. Hydrostatic test
pressure for horizontal swing valves shall be 300 PSI. A tapped boss with
plug shall be provided on the check valve bonnet for future use with a
pressure gauge.
G. Backflow Preventer: .
1. The I-inch reduced pressure principal backflow preventer for the potable
water system shall be a complete assembly consisting of two
independently acting spring-loaded toggle lever check valves together
with an automatically operating pressure differential relief valve located
between the two check valves. The first check valve shall reduce the
supply pressure a predetermined amount so that during normal flow and
cessation of normal flow, the pressure between the checks is less than the
supply pressure. In the case of leakage of either check valve, the
differential relief valve should discharge to atmosphere to maintain the
pressure between the checks, less than the supply pressure.
2. This unit shall contain tightly closing shut-off valves located at each end
of the device, and shall be fitted with properly located test cocks.
Operation shall be completely automatic. All internal parts of the toggle
lever check valves and pressure differential relief valve must be removable
or replaceable without removal of the reduced pressure principal backflow
preventer from the line. The total head loss through the complete
backflow assembly shall not exceed 10 PSI at the "rated flow".
3. The ends shall be female threaded for NPT. The main body and trim shall
be bronze, ASTM B-61. The differential valve shall be bronze as above
with stainless steel 304 trim.
H. Pressure Gauges:
TBE GrOUD. Ine.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\ 15050.doc
15050-6
Pipinl!:. Fittings. Valves and Accessories
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. General: All pressure gauges shall have a 4~-inch dial, shall read PSI or
feet of water as indicated below and shall be appropriately marked for PSI
and feet of water. All gauges that are to be installed shall be Red Valve
Pressure Gauge, Series 40' or equal.
I. Vacuum Breakers: Antisiphon vacuum breakers to prevent back siphonage of
polluted water into a potable water supply shall be furnished and installed where
shown on the drawings, required codes or directed by the Engineer. Vacuum
breakers shall be equal to the Watts Regulator Company's No. 288A Series, or as
otherwise indicated. Hose bibb vacuum breakers shall be Watts Regulator
Company's No.8, Neptune Model 5 or approved equal. The devices shall be
certified and listed under the ASSE Standards.
J. Supports and Hangers: Pipe supports and hangers shall conform to Federal
Specification WW-H-171, or shall be as specifically shown or indicated on the
drawings. Pipe hangers shall be complete with rods and clamps or inserts
proportioned to the size of the pipe supported.
K. Valve Boxes: Cast iron valve boxes shall be provided for all valves installed
underground which do not have extended operators such as required by the plug
valves. The valve boxes shall be adjustable to fit the depth of earth cover over the
valve and shall be designed so as to prevent the transmission of surface loads
directly to the valve or piping. Valve boxes shall have an interior diameter of not
less than 5-inches. The valve boxes shall be provided with covers marked with
the appropriate symbols as follows for the systems that they serve: N.P.W. (Non-
Potable Water); Water (potable Water) and Sewer. The covers shall be
constructed so as to prevent tipping or rattling. Boxes shall be equal to Clow
Corporation No. F 2450, Mueller Company H-I0357 or approved equal.
Extension sections shall be cast iron only.
L. Tie Rods: Steel for tie rods and tie bolts shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM Designation A 242, and rods shall be galvanized in conformance with
requirements ASTM Designation A 123. Tie rods and tie bolts shall be Super
Star Tierod Figure No. SS12 and Tiebolt Figure No. SST7 respectively as
manufactured by Star National Products.
M. Pipe and Valve Identification System:
1. Underground Warning: Underground warning tape for metallic piping
shall be 6-inches wide, green, .004-inch polyethylene film with a printed
legend "CAUTION SEWAGE FORCE MAIN BELOW". Warning tape
for PVC mains shall be 2-inches or wider, green, .004-inch polyethylene
film metallic lined and with a printed legend "CAUTION SEWAGE
FORCE MAIN BELOW". Tape shall be as manufactured by Seton Name
Plate Corporation, Terra Tape by Griffolyn Co. Inc. or approved equal.
THE Group. IDC.
J :\00083\OOO83021.06\DOC\Specs\ 15050.doc
PiDiDlz. Fittinl!S. Valves and Accessories
July 2007
15050-7
2. Valve Tags: Tags shall be as manufactured by Seton Name Plate
Corporation of Floy Tag and manufacturing Co., or approved equal.
. ~
N. Miscellaneous Items:
1. Other items necessary for the complete installation and not specified
herein shall conform to the details and notes shown on the drawings. All
minor items implied, usually included, or required for the construction of a
complete operating system shall be installed whether shown on the detail
drawings or not.
2. Appropriate signs shall be provided for nonpotable water system outlets
with a legend of "Non-Potable Water - Do Not Drink".
PART 2
EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. All pipe and fittings, valves and other material shall be subject to inspection and
approval by the Engineer after delivery, and no broken, cracked, misshapen,
imperfectly coated, or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used.
When a defect or crack is discovered, the damaged portion shall not be installed.
Cracked pipe shall have the defect cut off at least 12-inches from the break in the
sound section of the barrel.
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Piping:
1. At threaded joints between PVC and metal pipes, the metal shall contain
the socket end and the PVC side the spigot. A metal spigot shall not,
under any circumstances, be screwed into a PVC socket.
2. Steel Pipe Threaded Joints: Threaded joints shall be made up with teflon
tape, graphite and oil, or other approved compound. Close nipples shall
not be used and when the unthreaded portion of any nipple is less than
1 ~inches, an extra strong nipple shall .be used. After joints have been
made up, exposed threads and fittings on steel pipe lines to be buried shall
be coated with Bitumastic 50 Paint or equal.
3. All connections to existing piping systems shall be made as shown or
indicated on the drawings after consultation and cooperation with
authorities of the Owner. Some such connections may have to be made
during off-peak hours.
4. Pipe Sleeves and Wall Castings: Pipe sleeves and wall castings shall be
provided at locations called for on the drawings. These units shall be used
as detailed and of material as noted on the drawings. They shall be
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\ 15050.doc
15050-8
PiDin2.. Fittimzs. Valves and Accessories
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
accurately set in concrete or masonry to the elevations shown. All wall
sleeves and castings required in the walls shall be in place when the walls
are poured. End of wall castings and wall sleeves shall be of type
consistent with the piping being connected to them.
5. Tie Rods: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, the size and
number of tie rods for a joint or installation shall be as recommended by
the manufacturer's design chart for working pressure of 150 PSI. Tie rods
shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Underground Piping:
I. Trench excavation and backfill shall conform to the provisions of
Section 02220.
2. Cover on buried piping shall not be less than 30 inches, unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Upon satisfactory excavation of the pipe trench and completion of the pipe
bedding, a continuous trough for the pipe barrel and recesses for the pipe
bells, or couplings, shall be excavated by hand digging. When the pipe is
laid in the prepared trench, true to line and grade, the pipe barrel shall
receive continuous, uniform support and no pressure will be exerted on the
pipe joints from the trench bottom.
4. The interior of the pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter
before being gently lowered into the trench and shall be kept clean during
laying operations by means of plugs or other approved methods. During
suspension of work for any reason at any time, a suitable stopper shall be
placed in the end of the pipe last laid to prevent mud or other foreign
material from entering the pipe. Lines shall be laid straight and depth of
cover shall be maintained uniform with respect to finish grade, whether
grading is completed or proposed at time of pipe installation. Where a
grade or slope is shown on the drawings, batter boards with string line
paralleling design grade shall be used by the Contractor to assure
conformance to required grade. No abrupt changes in direction or grade
will be allowed. Any pipe found defective shall be immediately removed
and replaced with sound pipe.
5. Sewer pipe shall be laid with a minimum separation of 10-feet from a
parallel water line.
6. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be placed in polyethylene tube in
accordance with Clow Corporation instructions or approved equal. Tube
joints shall be lapped and tapped with polyethylene adhesive tape.
7. The joints of all pipelines shall be made absolutely tight. The particular
joint to be used shall be approved by the Engineer prior to installation.
Where shown on the plans, or where in the opinion of the Engineer,
TIE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\OOO83021.06\DOC\Specs\ 15050.doc
PioinlZ. FittiDlls. Valves and Accessories
July 2007
15050-9
settlement vibration is likely to occur, all pipe shall be bolted mechanical
type as specified herein. .
8. Mechanical joints shall be made up using annealed high strength cast iron
bolts and rubber gaskets having either plain or duct tip as recommended
by the manufacturer. All types of mechanical joint pipes shall be laid and
jointed in full confonnance with manufacturer's recommendations. Only
especially skilled workman shall be pennitted to make up mechanical
joints. Torque wrenches set as specified in A WW A Standard C III shall
be used with the pennission of the Engineer.
9. Push on joints shall be made in strict, complete compliance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
10. After pipe has been laid, inspected, and found satisfactory, sufficient
backfill shall be placed along the pipe barrel to hold the pipe securely in
place during the construction of the preliminary hydrostatic test. No
backfill shall be placed over the joints until the preliminary test is
satisfactorily completed, leaving them exposed to view for the detection of
visible leaks.
11. Upon satisfactory completion of the preliminary hydrostatic test,
backfilling of the trench shall be completed.
C. Aboveground and Exposed Piping:
1. Aboveground and exposed pipe fittings, valves and accessories shall be
installed as shown or indicated on the drawings.
2. Piping shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the job site
and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing, properly
clearing all equipment access areas and openings. Changes in sizes shall
be made in accordance with appropriate reducing fittings. Pipe
connections shall be made in accordance with the details shown and
manufacturer's recommendations. Open ends of pipe lines shall be
properly capped or plugged during installation to keep dirt and other
foreign material out of the system. Pipe supports and hangers shall be
provided where indicated or as required to insure adequate support of the
pIpmg.
3 . Welded connections shall be made in confonnity with the requirements of
A WW A Standard C 206 and shall be done only by qualified welders. The
Engineer, may, at his option, require certificates that welders employed on
the work are qualified in confonnity with the requirements of the standard
and/or sample welds to verify the qualifications of the welders. Before
testing, field welded joints shall be coated with the same material as used
for coating its pipe in accordance with the requirements of A WW A.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Sp,ecs\ 15050.doc
15050-10
PipiDl!. Fittings. Valves and Accessories
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Flanged joints shall be made up by inserting the gasket between the
flanges. The threads of the bolts and the faces of the gaskets shall be
coated with suitable lubricant immediately before installation.
S. Joints using Dresser couplings shall be made up as recommended by the
manufacturer.
6. Use of perforated band iron (plumber's strap), wire or chain as pipe
hangers will not be acceptable. Supports for pipe less than 1 ~-inches
nominal size shall not be more than eight feet on centers and pipe two
inches nominal size and larger shall be supported at not more than ten feet
on centers, unless otherwise indicated. Supports for PVC pipe shall be
spaced one-half the distance as that specified above unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Valves: Valves shall be carefully inspected during installation; they shall be
opened wide and then tightly closed and the various nuts and bolts shall be tested
for tightness. Special care shall be taken to prevent any foreign matter from
becoming lodged in the valve seat. Valves shall be set plumb at the locations
indicated and in accordance with the details shown on the drawings.
E. Hydrants: Hydrants shall be set plumb and in true alignment with mains. They
shall be securely braced against the end of the trench with concrete thrust blocks
as shown on the drawings and as described and specified in these specifications.
Care shall be taken to insure the free draining of the hydrant barrel and, to this
end, coarse material shall be placed around this valve outlet. Backfilling around
hydrants shall be carefully done so as not to disturb the hydrant and shall be
thoroughly rammed so as to support the hydrant securely.
F. Pipe and Valve Identification: The Contractor shall provide identification
markings on all piping, tubing and valves installed under the various Sections of
the Specifications.
1. Exposed Pipe, Tube and Conduit: Identification on all pipe, tube and
conduit (over 120 volt conductors) inside buildings and outside exposed
work shall be made with plastic snap-on and/or plastic pressure sensitive
adhesive markers lettered with appropriate legend and where applicable
shall have arrows indicating direction of flow. When appropriate legends
and band colors are not available painted on legends and bands will be
acceptable.
2. Underground Pipe and Tube: Pipe and tube shall be located by laying 2-
inch wide plastic tape continuously along the run of pipe or tube. Where
possible, color of tape shall be consistent with the color of bands on
interior pipe and as approved by the Engineer, or shall bear and imprinted
identification of the line. Tape shall be laid approximately 12-inches
below ground surface and directly over pipe location.
THE Groun. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021. 06\DOaSpecs\ 15050.doc
Pinin2. FittinllS. Valves and Accessories
July 2007
15050-11
3. Valve Identifications: On all valves, except shut-off valves located at a
fixture or piece of equipment, the Contractor shall provide a coded and
numbered tag attached with a brass chain and/or brass "S" hooks.
a. Tag Types: Tags for valves on pipe and tube lines conducting hot
medium (steam, condensate, hot water, etc.) shall be brass or
anodized aluminum. Tags for all other valves shall be colored
plastic. Colors for aluminum or plastic tags shall, where possible,
match the color code of the pipe line on which installed. Square
tags shall be used to indicate normally closed valves and round
tags shall be used to indicate normally open valves.
b. Coding: In addition to the color coding, each tag shall be stamped
or engraved with wording or abbreviations to indicate the line of
service. All color and letter coding shall be approved by the
Engineer.
4. Valve Schedule: The Contractor shall provide a typewritten list of all
tagged valves giving tag color, shape, letter code and number, the valve
size, type use and general location within the building. Schedule shall be
included in the 0 & M Manual.
G. Concrete Encasement:
1. Concrete for concrete encasement shall have a minimum strength at 28
days of 2,500 psi and encasement shall be constructed in accordance with
the details shown on the drawings. Encasement shall be constructed
where:
a. The pipe shall have less than adequate cover over the top of the
pIpe.
b. A gravity sewer of clay pipe crosses over, or at a depth which
provides less than IS-inches clear distance between pipes when
crossing, under water mains. Encasement shall extend a minimum
oCIO-feet on each side of the point of crossing. In lieu of encasing
the clay pipe, the length of pipe to be encased may be constructed
of the same material as the water main.
c. The Engineer shall order the line encased.
2. If through failure to provide suitable trench sheeting, or other causes, the
maximum for trench excavations, as specified elsewhere in the
specifications, is exceeded, the Contractor shall construct concrete
encasement around pipe for the length of excessive excavation.
3. The points of beginning and ending of the pipe encasement shall not be
more than 6-inches from a pipe joint to protect the pipe from cracking due
to uneven settlement of its foundation or the effects of superimposed live
loads.
THE Group. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\ 15050.doc
15050-12
Pipimz. FittinlZs. Valves and Accessories
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Payment for the above described work is considered incidental and shall
be included in the appropriate bid price.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Flushing: All force mains shall be flushed to remove all sand and other foreign
matter with the velocity of flusmng water not less than 4-feet per second.
Flushing shall be terminated at the direction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall
dispose of flushing water without causing a nuisance or property damage.
B. Pressure and Leakage Testing: All pumps, gauges and measuring devices shall be
furnished, installed and operated by the Contractor and all such equipment and
devices and their installation shall be approved by the Engineer. All pressure and
leakage testing shall be done in the presence of a representative of the Owner as a
condition precedent to the approval and acceptance of the system. All pipes shall
be thoroughly flushed immediately prior to testing.
C. Pressure Tests for Lines:
1. Pressure piping installed under this contract shall be subjected to a
pressure test after the pipe has been installed and partlally backfilled for
underground installations. Each pressure test shall be maintained for at
least two hours at 150 PSI pressure during which time all joints shall be
examined for leaks.
2. Before application of test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe.
If permanent air vents are not located at all high points, the Contractor
shall install corporation cocks or fittings and valves at such points so air
can be expelled as the pipe system is slowly filled with water. After
expulsion of air, the corporation cocks, or other blowoff devices shall be
closed and the test pressure applied.
3. Piping runs with two joints or less need not to be pressure tested, but shall
be checked for leakage under normal operating pressures.
4. All exposed pipe, fittings, valves and joints shall be carefully examined
for leaks. All cracked, broken or defective pipe, fittings or valves
discovered as a consequence of this pressure test shall be removed and
replaced with sound material. All leaking, or defective joints shall be
repaired, replaced or corrected. After all necessary replacements and
corrections, the test shall be repeated until satisfactory to the Owner.
D. Leakage Testing for Pressure Piping:
1. After completion of satisfactory pressure test of piping, the lines shall be
subjected to leakage tests.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\OOO83\OO083021.06\DOC\Specs\ 15050.doc
Pining. Fittimrs. Valves and Accessories
July 2007
15050-13
2. The duration of each leakage test shall be at least 3 hours and the pressures
maintained during each leakage test shall be as specified above for
pressure tests.
3. Leakage is defined as the quantity of water that must be supplied into the
newly laid pipe or any valved section thereof to maintain the specified test
pressure after the air in the pipeline has been expelled and the pipe has
been filled with water. The allowable limits for leakage of underground
piping shall be determined by the following formula.
E. Allowable Limits for Leakage of Pressure Piping:
1. The hydrostatic pressure tests shall be performed as herein above specified
and no installation, or section thereof, will be acceptable until the leakage
is less than the number of gallons per hour as determined by the formula:
L = SD po.s
133200
in which,
L = Allowable Leakage, in gallons per hour
S = Length of pipe being tested. in feet
D = Nominal pipe diameter; in inches
P = Average test pressure during the test, in PSI gauge
2. Watershall be supplied to the line during the test period as required to
maintain the test pressure as specified. The quantity used, which shall be
compared to the above allowable quantity, shall be measured by pumping
from a calibrated container. A S/8-inch meter installed on the discharge
side of the pump may be used to measure the leakage for large mains
when approved by the Engineer.
3. Where leakage exceeds the allowable limit, as specified hereinbefore, the
defective pipe or joints shall be located and repaired. If the defective
portions can not be located, the Contractor shall remove and reconstruct as
much of the work as is necessary in order to conform to the specified
limits. No additional payment will be made for the correction of defective
work, or damage to other parts of the work resulting from such corrective
work.
F. Tests for Drain Lines:
1. Drain lines shall be tested for infiltration and exfiltration.
THE GrouD. Ine.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\15050.doc
15050-14
Pioine:. FittinlZS. Valves and Accessories
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. The allowable limits of infiltration and exfiltration or leakage for the drain
lines or any portion thereof shall not exceed a rate of 0.1 gallon per foot of
pipe per 24 hours for all sizes of pipe throughout the system.
3. Any part, or all of the system may be tested for infiltration or exfiltration,
as directed by the Engineer. Prior to testing for infiltration, the system
shall be pumped out so normal infiltration conditions exist at the time of
testing. The amounts of infiltration or exfiltration shall be determined by
pumping into or out of calibrated drums, or by other approved methods.
4. The exfiltration test will be conducted by filling the portion of the system
being tested with water to a level which will provide; a minimum head
lateral connected to the test portion of2-feet; or, in the event there are no
laterals in the test portion, a minimum difference in elevation between the
crown of the highest portion of the sewer and the test level of 5-feet.
5. Where infiltration or exfiltration exceeds the allowable limits specified
herein, the defective pipe, joints or other faulty construction shall be
located and repaired by the Contractor. If defective portions can not be
located, the Contractor shall remove and reconstruct as much of the work
as is necessary in order to conform to the specified allowable limits.
6. The Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment and materials and shall
conduct all testing required, under the direction of the Engineer. No
separate payment will be made for this work and the cost for this work
shall be included in the prices quoted in this Proposal.
END OF SECTION
THE GrouD. IDc~
J :\00083\OOO83021.06\DOC\Specs\ 15050.doc
15050-15
PipinlZ. Fittioes. Valves and Accessories
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16000
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS
A. The applicable requirements of this Section shall apply to all Sections of this
Division.
1.02 PROPRIETARY NAMES
A. For convenience of description and as a standard for grade, type, quality, and
performance characteristics, proprietary names are included with some
descriptions. This does not imply preference to specific manufacturers (except
where multiple choice is specified), but minimum requirements with approval to
be made by the Engineer.
1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the General Conditions.
B. Shop drawings, materials lists, cuts and other required data shall be submitted for
approval assembled according to respective section of Division 16. All of the
data for each Section shall be submitted in a single package. If any required items
are omitted from this submittal, the Engineer shall select each item indicating
manufacturer, model, etc., and such decision shall be final. Such submissions
shall be made as specified in these documents. Items shall be listed individually
by manufacturer, type, rating, etc. The term "Per Specifications" will not be
acceptable.
C. Any deviation from the Specifications pertinent to shop drawings shall be listed
separately and submitted with the shop drawings. Failure to list all deviations in
this manner shall be grounds for requiring removal of such items and installation
of new items in exact accordance with Specifications at no extra cost to the
Owner. No material shall be purchased or installed before satisfactory review of
any submission.
D. Data submitted with the shop drawings shall include written sequence of
description of control systems to be installed under this contract.
E. Samples shall be required as reauested by the Engineer to further substantiate any
substitutions.
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J:\00083\OOO83021.06\D0C\Specs\16000.doc
Basic Electrical Reauirements
July 2007
16000-1
F. Before submittal to the Engineer, all shop drawings shall be perused, corrected
and verified by signature, or stamp and signature as approved by the applicable
subcontractor and by the Contractor to be in accordance with the requirements of
the Drawings and/or Specifications. Shop drawings that have been signed or
stamped and signed as approved, but have not been perused for compliance with
the Drawings and Specifications and/or have not been coordinated with other
equipment and other trades will be returned to the Contractor without being
reviewed by the Engineer.
G. Existing Equipment: Existing equipment shall be tightly covered and protected
against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury, or theft; and, at the
completion of the work, all existing equipment in the vicinity of the proposed
work shall be cleaned, both interior and exterior, in a satisfactory condition
acceptable to the Engineer. Any damage to existing equipment shall be corrected
at the Contractor's expense.
H. Owner Furnished Items: Materials and equipment indicated to be furnished by
the Owner will be turned over to the Contractor at the site in the general vicinity
of their use. The Contractor shall accept the equipment and install it for a
complete installation. If the equipment is found to be defective, the Owner shall
be notified and will either have the equipment repaired or will furnish a new item.
1.04 CODES
A. All work under this Division shall be performed in compliance with all local
codes, county and state codes, Occupational Safety & Health Act, Florida Power
Corporation regulations, Drawings and Specifications, the National Electrical
Safety Code, as the minimum. Any errors, omissions, or conflicts shall be called
to the attention of the Engineer, in writing, not later than 7 days prior to bid
opening.
1.05 GUARANTEE
A. All equipment, materials and workmanship shall be guaranteed to conform with
the specifications and accepted alternates. Parts defective or not in accordance
with the specifications or accepted alternates shall be replaced in the system and
tested free of cost to the Owner and for a period of one year after fmal acceptance
of the completed system, such replaced parts shall be fully guaranteed.
B. In the event that a repetition of any material defect occurs, indicating the
probability of repeated failures which can be traced to faulty manufacture,
manufacturer's design of material or item, or Contractor's method of installation,
the Contractor shall not continue to replace. with the same material, part or
method, but shall take steps to remedy the fault through replacement of all such
defective material or revise completely the method of installation.
THE GroDD. IDe.
J:\OO083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\16000.doc
16000-2
Basic Electrical Reauirements
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Manufacturer's guarantees which extend beyond the guarantee period specified
shall be transferred to the Owner before request of final payment.
D. All equipment, accessories and connections shall be guaranteed to operate without
undue heating, noise or voltage drop; and the Contractor shall correct or adjust
any items, should such conditions be found to exist after system has been put into
operation. Whether or not a condition or noise is objectionable shall be decided
by the Engineer.
E. Certification must be provided stating that all materials and equipment used on
the project are new.
1.06 FEES, PERMITS AND TESTS
A. The Contractor shall perform or secure such tests as may be required, supplying
all labor, and instruments needed, or paying such costs as may be involved.
B. All tests required to establish the adequacy and quality of all systems shall be
made by this Division in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
C. All contained work must remain uncovered until approved. All tests shall be
made in strict accordance to code requirements. Defects disclosed by tests shall
be made good and defective materials replaced without additional cost to the
Owner. Tests shall be repeated after repairs or replacements have been made.
D. The Owner shall be furnished with Certificates of Inspection from all authorities
having jurisdiction. During the course of the construction, the work shall be
inspected by those having jurisdiction. After the completion of the work, the
Contractor shall deliver certifications or letters of approval from such bodies to
the Engineer.
1.07 SLEEVES, INSERTS AND OPENINGS
A. All work under each section of this Division shall be laid out and installed in
advance of pouring concrete floors or walls. The Contractor shall furnish and
install all sleeves or openings through floors or walls for passage of all conduits,
or ducts installed.
B. Sleeves shall be of 18 gauge galvanized sheet steel or plastic rigidly supported
and suitably packed to prevent ingress of wet concrete.
C. The Contractor shall furnish and install all inserts, and hangers required to support
conduit, cables, pull boxes, etc.
D. If sleeves, hangers, inserts, etc., are improperly installed, all necessary cutting and
patching to rectify such error shall be performed by the Contractor at no expense
to the Owner.
THE Group. Inc.
J:\00083\OOO83021.06\DOC\Specs\16000.doc
Basic Electrical Reauirements
July 2007
16000-3
1.08 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
,
A. All necessary excavation and backfilling for all underground lines, interior and
exterior, required for this Section shall be performed in accordance with the
provisions of this contract.
1.09 SUPERVISION AND WORKMANSHIP
A. All work under this Division shall be performed under the immediate direction of
fully qualified foremen. Insofar as possible and unless approved by the Engineer,
there shall be no change in supervision during the course of construction.
B. The Contractor shall employ on the job full time Electrical Foreman, who has
been approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit in writing and in full
detail the experience record of the individual who will be foreman during the
complete job. The submission shall indicate jobs of similar scope where the man
has been recently employed as foreman on the installation of a project of this
type.
C. All workmanship shall be of the highest quality, and the right to require
immediate removal from the project of any personnel for cause is reserved to the
Engineer.
D. It is the intent and of the essence of the Specifications that all personnel furnished
for this Division shall cooperate with all other personnel at all times to insure the
furnishing of the highest quality workmanship.
1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. During the progress of the work, the job superintendent for this Division shall
daily record on his field set of drawings the exact location as installed of all
underground utilities and otherwise concealed conduits which were not installed
exactly as shown on the Contract Drawings. Conduits which are installed in
furred spaces, chases, or other spaces which can be readily inspected by the use of
access panels or other means will not be considered as being concealed. The
exact conduit runs shall be . shown on these drawings. The drawings will be
examined prior to approval of each month's partial payment estimate.
1.11 INSTRUCTIONS
A. The Contractor shall fully instruct the Owner in the operation and maintenance of
all electrical systems.
END OF SECTION
THE Group. Inc.
J:\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\16000.doc
Basic Electrical Reauirements
July 2007
16000-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16011
CABINETS AND CONTROL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
This section addresses the functional requirements of the cabinet and control panel
suitable for controlling the operation of the system described elsewhere in the contract
documents.
Work shall conform to the NEC.
5.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
Work shall conform to the NEC.
5.2 ALTERNATIVES
. All electrical components shall be Square "D" or equal.
5.3 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. The panel shall operate the units indicated, at the
power characteristics shown elsewhere in these documents.
5.4 1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. SHOP DRAWINGS. Before any components are fabricated, and/or integrated
into assemblies, or shipped to the job site, the Contractor shall furnish full details,
shop drawings, catalog cuts and descriptive material that fully describes the
equipment to be used and its relationship with other components comprising the
control system. Required items include control panel layouts, elementary
diagrams and interconnecting wiring diagrams.
B. WIRING DIAGRAMS. Complete wiring diagrams showing units and conductors
connected to the cabinet shall be furnished and placed m an internal pocket on
each cabinet doors, sized for 8~" x II" pages.
THE GrouD. Ine.
J :\OO083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\l6011.doc
Cabinets and Control Panels
July 2007
16011-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
All electrical wire, unless otherwise noted, shall be minimum # 16 gauge, fully marked in
wire ducts and color-coded to NEC.
5.5 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. CABINETS Cabinets shall be manufactured of 14-guage minimum stainless steel
NEMA 4X , gasketed construction, with one-inch lip with rolled edges.
B. PANELS Interior mounted. Stainless steel panels shall be provided to mount to
all terminal strips and component devices. Provide timers, starters, relays, alarm
lights, and other devices as indicated elsewhere in the contract documents.
A ~ inch thick aluminum inner door with a continuous piano-type hinge for
mounting components shall be provided where noted in the drawings.
Panel mounted switches and indicating lights shall be oil tight and heavy duty
such as manufactured by Allen Bradley, Square "D" Company, Cutler-Hammer or
equal.
C. TERMINAL STRIPS Below 50 volts, use screw terminal type. Above 50 volts,
use 250 volt screw terminal type with barriers between each set of terminals and
individual terminal points for each conductor.
D. ACCESSORIES Terminal blocks shall be provided with a designation strip
which carries the wire identification number. The instrument or operating device
shall be provided with a stud or terminal identification by the manufacturer.
E. WIRING Wire shall be properly sized and installed in accordance with applicable
code and/or acceptable practices.
F. IDENTIFICATION Identify terminal strips with permanent numbers.
G. ENGRAVED NAMEPLATES White letters on black background; liS-inch
laminated plastic with beveled edges; secured to panel with black self-tapping
Phillips head screws.
H. PANEL DRA WINGS The panel shall be supplied with a complete panel drawing
and schedule of parts bonded to the inside of the door and covered with a
protective coating.
TOE GrouD. Inc.
I :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\ 160 II.doc
Cabinets and Control Panels
Iuly 2007
16011-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IbI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
All materials and equipment shall be installed in a neat workmanlike manner utilizing
skilled craftsmen in the trade. The finished product shall have a neat finished
appearance.
5.6 GUIDELINES
All wires shall be neatly arranged in properly supported bundles. Nylon saddles shall be
used for wire supports. Neoprene bands secure the wire bundle in the saddle.
Additionally, Nylon tie-straps shall be used where required. All wiring shall be of the
open type except when it enters terminal block enclosures, if used.
The Contractor shall protect all materials and equipment during the course of
construction. Equipment shall be stored in a protected environment prior to installation
and be further protected during the construction period. Materials and equipment not
fully protected and suffering from weathering, corrosion, etc. shall be replaced with new
equipment.
The Contractor shall follow the manufacturer's installation recommendations, unless
otherwise indicated in the contract documents.
Where existing materials and equipment are removed or relocated, the Contractor will
repair the affected surfaces to conform in type, quality, and finish to that of the
surroundings.
Scratches, scrapes, or chips in the interior or exterior surfaces of devices and equipment
shall be touched up with fInishes matching the original in type, color, and consistency.
Terminate conduit in cabinets with lock nut and grounding bushing.
Terminate wiring on terminal blocks or strips.
Vacuum clean cabinet on completion of installation.
END OF SECTION
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\OOO83021.06\DOaSpecs\l60 I I. doc
Cabinets and Control Panels
July 2007
16011-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16012
SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Conduit supports. Channel supports for equipment.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS. National Electrical Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. SINGLE RUNS Stainless steel conduit straps or ring bolt type hangers with
specialty spring clips.
B. MULTIPLE RUNS Conduit rack with 25 percent spare capacity.
C. VERTICAL RUNS Channel support with conduit fittings.
5.1 CHANNEL SUPPORTS
Steel channel sections shall be rolled from Stainless Steel.
The cross sectional width dimension of the channel shall be a minimum of 1 ~-inches.
The depth will be as required to satisfy the load requirements. Channel with 1 ~-inch
depth or greater shall be rolled from manufacturer's standard 12-gauge steel. Channel
smaller than 1 ~-inch may be manufacturer's standard 14-gauge steel.
Attachment holes, when required, shall be factory punched on hole centers equal to the
channel cross sectional width dimension and shall be a maximum of 9/16-inch in
diameter.
Channel attachment nuts shall be designed to prelocate in the channel and provide a
bearing surface on the turned down lips while making positive contact with the side walls
of the channel.
Straps for the support of conduit shall be designed such that the attachment nut is
captivated on the shoulder of the strap when tightened, and the attachment bolt shall
allow tightening by either a screwdriver or wrench.
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\ 160 12.doc
SUDDOrlin!!: Devices
July 2007
16012-1
All nuts, bolts, straps, and threaded rod shall be stainless steel.
5.2 2.03 ANCHOR METHODS
A. HOLLOW MASONRY Toggle bolts or spider type expansion anchors.
B. SOLID MASONRY Lead expansion anchors or preset inserts.
C. METAL SURFACES Machine screws, bolts, welded studs, or beam type clamps
on steel joints.
D. WOOD SURFACES Wood screws.
E.
CONCRETE SURFACES
expansion bolts.
Self-drilling anchors, power-driven studs, or
See drawing for special mounting and installation. All anchors shall be stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Layout to maintain headroom, neat mechanical appearance, and to support equipment
loads required. Verify exact mounting and installation requirements with the City's
representative prior to installation.
END OF SECTION
TBE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\ 160 12.doc
16012-2
SUDDortine: Devices
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16013
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
5.1 WORK INCLUDED
Ground all electrical components of the electrical supply systems including the
emergency power system.
5.2 SYSTEM GROUNDING
Service neutral shall be grounded at the main disconnecting means as shown in the
drawings. Transformers shall be grounded as shown on the plans and as specified herein.
5.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
All metallic structures, enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets,
machine frames, and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits
shall be grounded for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible
ground fault currents.
5.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
Install complete grounding system in accordance with NEC.
5.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS
The following specifications and standards, except as hereinafter modified, are
incorporated herein by reference and form a part of this specification to the extent
indicated by the references thereto. Except where a specific date is given, the issue in
effect (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) on the date of
Invitation for Bids shall be applicable. In text, such specifications and standards are
referred to by basic designation only:
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
No. 70
National Electrical Code (NEC)
B. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
J-C-30A(I) Cable and Wire Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation)
THE GrouD. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\ 160 13.doc
Groundinl! and Bondinl!
July 2007
16013-1
C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publications:
No. 83
Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires
No. 467
Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment
5.6 TESTS
Measure ground resistance with earth test megger and install additional ground rods and
conductors as required until resistance to ground complies with specifications below.
Ground resistance shall be limited to 5 ohms or less for the complete system. The ground
rods shall be connected to the main water supply metallic pipe, if available. A bare
copper conductor shall be used between ground rods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUNDING SYSTEM
Provide grounding systems consisting of 5/8-inch by lO-feet long copper clad steel driven
rods, connection where designated in the drawings. See plans and other paragraphs and
sections for additional requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
5.7 POWER SYSTEM GROUNDING
Provide grounding and bonding systems in accordance with NEe, local codes and power
company except where more stringent requirements are specified herein. Interconnection
of neutral and ground is not permitted except at service entrance equipment. Install
grounding conductors to permit shortest and most direct path to ground. Concealed joints
shall be made by exothermic method. Grounding and bonding fittings used shall be UL
listed and be compatible with metals used in system. Sheet metal type straps are not
acceptable.
The grounding system shall be connected to the main disconnect switch with a grounding
electrode conductor sized as shown in the drawings.
Service entrance ground system shall consist of two driven electrodes (minimum) spaced
no less than six feet apart. Each driven electrode shall consist of one 5/8-inch diameter,
1 Q-foot long driven copperweld steel rod. Interconnect conduits entering and leaving
service entrance equipment using grounding bushings and copper conductors. Provide
required number of driven ground rods to comply with specifications above.
TBE GrouD. IDe.
J :\00083\0008302 1.06\DOC\Specs\1 60 13 .doc
16013-2
Grounding and Bonding
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Where metallic conduit is used for mechanical protection of a grounding conductor, the
conductor shall be securely bonded to the conduit at each end.
Outlet box to device strap or yoke screw connection is not sufficient. Provide an
insulated grounding jumper for receptacles. Connect jumper to grounding pole for device
and connect to outlet box using insulated throat grounding bushing.
A separate equipment grounding conductor, with green insulation, shall be provided in all
circuits. In all cases, locknuts and insulated throat grounding bushings shall be used
between all conduit and equipment. Ground wedges shall be used at all boxes and
equipment enclosures where required to insure proper ground connections for the conduit
system.
All electrical equipment, panels, starters, and fencing used to enclose electrical
equipment, etc., shall be connected to the grounding system herein described.
The grounding terminal of all receptacles shall be solidly connected, by means of a green
wire, to a grounding terminal in the outlet box and the insulated throat grounding
bushing.
All metal non-current carrying parts of electric equipment, raceways, supports, etc., shall
be grounded to meet NEC requirements.
The Contractor shall check the continuity of ground in the electrical system. This shall
include all panels, receptacles, switches, outlets and other electrically operated devices.
If continuity does not exist, the Contractor shall install additional grounding conductor as
described in these specifications and the NEC.
END OF SECTION
THE Group. Inc.
J:\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\160 13.doc
GroundiDlz and Bondinl!:
July 2007
16013-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16051
ELECTRICAL - WASTEWATER PUMPING STATION
PART I-GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work included in this section consists of furnishing all labor, material, equipment
and transportation and performing all operations required for electrical work in
accordance with the Specifications and Drawings and includes, but is not
restricted to the following:
1. Complete electrical wiring of all electrical systems as shown on the
Drawings and herein specified.
2. Furnish and install electrical distribution as shown on the Drawings and as
herein described.
3. Temporary service installation as required by all crafts during
construction.
4. Electrical permits, fees, tests and guarantees.
5. Connection of all eleCtrical equipment.
6. Submit shop drawings.
7. Coordination of work with the utility company and Owner.
8. Provide "Record" drawings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes: Any conflicts between the Drawings and Specifications or with the
regulations of local codes, public utility company, or the National Electrical Code
shall be promptly brought to the attention of the Owner for clarification. All
materials and work shall be in accordance with said codes and standards.
B. Contract Documents: The Drawings are generally diagrammatic not necessarily
showing in detail all of the minor items and it shall not be interpreted to mean that
any minor item required may be omitted. The Contractor shall make use of all the
data in all of the Contract Documents and shall verify all information at the site
which may influence his proposal.
THE GraDD. lac.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\l6051.doc
16051-1
Electrical- Wastewater Pumoine: Station
July 2007
C. Inspections: During the course of construction, the work will be reviewed by the
Owner. The Contractor shall call for inspections by the inspector during the
normal phases of installation and, following.the successful completion of the final
inspection, furnish the Owner with a certificate of fmal approval.
D. Tests: The Contractor shall provide all necessary instruments and special
apparatus to conduct any test that may be required to insure the system is free of
all improper grounds and short circuits. These tests shall be conducted in the
presence of the Owner's representative prior to final acceptance.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit shop drawings covering all
electrical equipment for review within 45 days after the date of the Notice to
Proceed. No partial list will be reviewed. Shop drawings and submittal data will
be reviewed two times; thereafter, all further submittal data review time will be
charged to the Contractor at a rate of $115.00 an hour. The Contractor shall
carefully review and check all shop drawings prior to their submittal to the Owner
and his approval shall be indicated or stamped on the drawings. Six copies of
each drawing shall be submitted.
B. Record Drawings: A complete set of electrical Drawings will be given to the
Contractor to clearly mark all work as installed and all changes from the
Drawings as noted. This work must be kept up-to-date and verified by the
Owner's field representative before the payment is made. The complete marked
set shall be delivered to the Owner before the final acceptance of the work.
C. Permits: All required permits and inspection certificates shall be obtained, paid'
for and made available at the completion of the work.
1.04 GUARANTEE
A. The Contractor shall submit a written guarantee to the Owner that all electrical
work and material provided under this Contract is free from defects for a period of
one year after fmal acceptance of the job. There will be no additional charge to
the Owner to repair or replace any such work which is found to be defective
within the guarantee period. .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: All materials and equipment shall be new and shall bear the
manufacturer's name, date of manufacture, trade name and the UL label.
TBE Group. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\ 16051.doct
Electrical- Wastewater Pumoinlz Station
July 2007
16051-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I,
\1
I
I
J
I
I
I;
I
I
I
Equipment and materials shall be delivered to the site and stored in original
containers, suitably sheltered from the elements, but readily accessible for
inspection.
B. Conductors:
1. No conductor shall be smaller than No. 12 A WG unless otherwise
indicated in the drawings. All conductors shall be of copper, having a
minimum of 98 percent conductivity. Tinning shall be in accordance with
the standards of the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Conductors shall be
as manufactured by Hatfield Wire and Cable Company, or General
Electric.
2. Coding: All conductors shall be coded throughout. The same color code
for a particular phase or part of a circuit shall be run with the same
conductor through the job. Neutral shall be white and gray. A band of
tape 3/4-inches wide shall be used to color code conductors that are not
otherwise coded. These bands shall be applied wherever conductors are
accessible. Branch circuit conductor shall be color coded as designated in
Section 16005 of these specifications.
3. Insulation: All conductors in trapped or damp locations shall be Type
THW, 750C, 600 volts insulation.
a. Conductors size No. 6 A WG and larger shall be standard, Type
THW, 750C, 600 volts.
b. Conductors in dry locations, size No.8 and smaller shall be type
TW, 600 volts, solid.
C. Raceways:
1. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Rigid, heavy wall, threaded aluminum
conduits as manufactured by Alcoa or Kaiser Aluminum, Alloy 3xxx or
6xxx Series. Fittings for aluminum conduit shall be of aluminum or
copper-free aluminum alloy.
2. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid steel conduits shall be equal to Pittsburgh
Standard hot dipped galvanized conduit, Republic II Galvite" , or National
II Sherarduct. II
3. Plastic Coated Conduit: Rigid conduit and fittings covered with plastic
shall be equal to "Robroy" or "Korkap" plastic coated galvanized electrical
conduit.
4. PVC Conduit: PolYvinyl Chloride Schedule 40 conduit shall be equal to
TBE Grouo. Inc.
J :\00083\OOO83021.06\DOaSpecs\l6051.doc
Electrica1- Wastewater Pumoin2 Station
July 2007
16051-3
that manufactured by Carlon products Corporation, 3645 Warrensville
Center Road, Cleveland, Ohio, 44122.
D. Splices: Skotchlock, OZ type XW or XLP or equal by Burndy and Penn Union.
2.02 PUMPING STATION CONTROLS
A. General: A control panel shall be supplied containing all the electrical and
mechanical equipment necessary to provide for the operation of two (2) electric
submersible pumps. The panel shall be a regular type and provide a high level
alarm system and emergency power provisions which can be utilized manually in
case of main power failure.
B. Control Panel Operations:
1. The control panel shall operate two electrical submersible pumps as
specified.
2. The control function provides for the operation of the lead pump under
normal conditions. If the incoming flow exceeds the pumping capacity of
the lead pump, the second pump shall automatically start to handle this
increased flow. As the flow decreases, pumps shall be cut off at
elevations as shown on the Drawings. In the event of a malfunction or a
flow that exceed the capacity of the pumps, a high level light shall be
excited to indicate alarm conditions.
C. Construction and Material:
I. The control panel shall be NEMA 4X, Type 316 stainless steel, dead front
construction.
2. All circuit breakers shall be molded case breakers.
3. A lightning arrestor, and a transient voltage surge suppressor shall be
provided.
4. The motor starters shall be as designated in the drawings with thermal
overload sensing in each phase.
5. Pump panel controls will operate in conjunction with the pump control
unit (PCU) and RTU controls. Control elements contained in the control
panel are shown in the drawings. All control wiring shall be color coded
(minimum of 18 colors) size No. 12 A WG, rated for 600 volts, 900 C,
stranded tinned copper, THHN/THWN insulated.
THE GroDD. Inc.
J:\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\16051.doc
16051-4
Electrical- Wastewater PUffioine: Station
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
I
I
il
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6. The inner aluminum door, mounted on continuous hinge, shall be
furnished for protection against exposed wiring and shall have cutouts for
access to the circuit breaker. Components mounted on the inner door shall
be as indicated on the drawings and include pump run lights, hand-off:.
automatic switches, and a 20 ampere duplex receptacle.
7. On the exterior of the control panel enclosure shall be mounted an audible
alarm, alarm light and a generator receptacle.
8. An 11" x 17" schematic and pump data sheet or approved equal shall be
permanently affixed to the interior of the enclosure door. The data sheet
shall be extruded vinyl polymer laminate or equal.
D. Operation of the controls and equipment shall be as shown on the Drawings or as
specified elsewhere.
2.03 PUMP CONTROLffELEMETRY SYSTEM
A. General: A microprocessor-based pump control unit shall be an integral part of
the control panel as shown in the Drawings. The pump control unit shall be
complete with radio unit, antenna and mounting tower and shall be provided and
installed in accordance with the Drawings.
The pump control unit shall not only provide for pump control but shall serve as
the interface between the pumping station and a central monitoring site. The
information from the pumping station will be transmitted to the central site with
the "T AC Pack" radio unit.
Details and requirements for the pump control unit, "T AC Pack" radio, antenna,
tower and associated components are included herein, as well as, in the Drawings.
B. Pump Control Unit: The pump control unit shall be a microprocessor-based
multi-pump controller module designed for use with the telemetry systems. As a
minimum the pump control unit (pCU) shall have the following features:
1. Local automatic control from float, bubbler, transducer, or ultrasonic
inputs. All the electronics for each type of input shall be included in the
PCU.
2. Local manual control provided by hand-off-automatic (HOA) switches.
The hand-off-automatic (HOA) switches shall be fail safe and operate in
the "off" and "hand" position without power. Hand-off-automatic (HOA)
switch alarms shall be reported back to central site computer. Alarms
shall indicate that a hand-ofI-automatic (HOA) switch has been left in the
"hand" or "oft" position.
TOE GrouD. IDe.
J :\00083\OO083021.06\DOaSpecs\16051.doc
16051-5
Electrical- Wastewater Pumoinl! Station
July 2007
3. Remote control from the central site computer which shall provide
individual pump overrides and disables, station and alarm disables.
4. Triplex/Duplex/Simplex configurable. The module shall have the
capability of being configured for one, two or three pumps.
5. Pump alternation function. Alternation around non-operational pumps
shall be provided.
6. An on-board 240 V AC three phase monitor. The phase monitor shall be
transformer-isolated and detect loss of phase, phase reversal, low phase
and high phase faults. All phase monitor adjustments shall be adjustable
from the keyboard. Phase voltages from phase A to B and from phase A
to C shall be transmitted to the central site computer.
7. The PCU shall be easily replaced by removing two industry standard
terminal connectors.
8. Alarm light and bell outputs capable' of driving 120 V AC loads to 1 amp.
9. Local mput for alarm silence switch.
10. Remote alarm bell and light disable from central site computer.
11. Float alarm reporting back to central site computer when floats are
operating out of sequence. In the float mode each float position shall be
transmitted to the central computer.
12. A 16 character display to provide the operators with the elapsed runtime of
each pump, the average runtime of each pump, the flow of each pump, the
flow of the station and the time of day.
13. Pumps/motor starter/circuit breaker fault alarms that are reported back to
central site computer. The alarms shall be activated when a pump is called
to run, but fails to run, or if the pump is turned off by the PCU, but
continues to run.
14. Pump run status that are reported back to central site computer. Pump run
times shall be recorded with 2 second accuracy.
15. Configuration parameters that are adjustable through the front mounted
keypad or a RS-232 service port.
16. Redundancy of level sensing devices.
TBE GrOUD. IDe.
I :\00083\OOO83021.06\DOC\Specs\l6051.doc
16051-6
Electrical- Wastewater PumDine: Station
Iuly 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
:1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
17. All inputs and outputs that are optically or magnetically isolated and surge
suppressed.
The Pump Control Unit shall be manufactured by Data Flow Systems, Inc. of
Melbourne, Florida; telephone number, 321-259-5009.
C. "TAC Pack" Radio: The "TAC Pack" Radio shall be a microprocessor controlled
unit that functions as the interface between the Pump Control Unit and the central
site equipment. The unit shall house the radio transceiver and associated
electronics to allow the Pump Control Unit to communicate with central site. The
"T AC Pack" Radio shall mount directly to the Pump Control Unit using four
captive screws. The Pump Control Unit/"T AC Pack" Radio assembly shall be
mounted in the pumping station control panel. As a minimum, the "T AC Pack"
radio shall have the following features:
1. Environmentally sealed/corrosion resistant enclosure.
2. Conformally coated PC Board.
3. Surge protected radio power.
4. On board communications and functional firmware.
5. Watchdog Timer.
6. On board voltage regulation and radio power supply control.
7. RS-232 service port.
8. LEDs on test mode, power, transmit data, receive data, and CPU failure.
9. Test mode switch for radio service.
10. Radio current, receiver sensitivity and operating temperature that are
monitored for system diagnostics.
11. Unit removable without disturbing field wiring or configuration jumpers.
The "T AC Pack" Radio shall be manufactured by Data Flow Systems, Inc. of
Melbourne, Florida; telephone number, 321-259-5009.
D. Antenna Subsystem: A high gain directional antenna shall be used to transmit
-and receive data through the Pump Control Unit/"T AC Pack" radio. The antenna
shall be supported on a mast/pole and have DC grounding for lightning
protection. The antenna mast/pole shall be hot dipped galvanized for corrosion
protection. All mounting hardware shall be made of stainless steel. The mast
TBE Gruuu. IDe.
J :\00083\OOO83021.06\DOC\Specs\ 16051.doc
Electrical- Wastewater PumDine: Station
July 2007
16051-7
shall meet or exceed the quality and reliability of the 250 manufactured by Rohn.
The coax cable shall be the type that utilizes an inert semi-liquid compound to
flood the copper braid. The coax cable shall be of the RO-8 construction type and
have the RF loss characteristic of foam flex. The coax cable shall meet or exceed
the quality, reliability and performance of RTe 400 as supplied by Data Flow
Systems, Inc. of Melbourne, Florida. Type N connectors shall be utilized at both
ends of the coax. The Type N connectors shall be sealed with 3 inch sections of
Alpha FIT321-1-0 sealant shrink tubing. The coax cable shall be secured to the
mast/pole with E.V.A.-coated 316 stainless steel cable ties. The cable ties shall
meet or exceed the quality, reliability and performance of AE112 cable ties
manufactured by Band-It. The antenna shall be an all welded aluminum elements.
The antenna shall have a single radiator element connected to a type N female
connector. Element connections utilizing nuts and bolts are not acceptable. The
antennas shall meet or exceed the quality, reliability and performance of the RTA
series as provided by Data Flow Systems, Inc. of Melbourne, Florida. The
antenna/tower shall be designed to meet 100 MPH wind loading without damage.
Sealed engineering drawings shall be submitted to verify the design.
E. Surge Protection: Surge protection shall be provided for all power supply and
power monitoring circuits. The protection shall be equipped with both energy
limiting and clamping circuits with slow blow fuses designed for overload
conditions. This design shall provide a very high level of non-destructive
transient immunity. With the exception of a direct lightning strike, the device
shall protect the R TU power supply and power monitoring circuits from damage
due to voltage transients. The unit shall provide circuit protection to withstand
multiple transients in excess of 6500 volts, 3250 amps, without damage. Damage
shall be limited to a blown fuse when exposed to larger transients. The device
shall be transient-tested to ANSI standard C62. 41. The unit shall meet or exceed
the quality, reliability and performance of the Transient Filter Shield TFSOOl as
manufactured by Data Flow Systems.
F. Warranty: The system supplier shall warrant all hardware provided under this
contract against all defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year
and shall carry an additional two year return-to-factory warranty for damage due
to lightning and electrical surge.
O. Service: The supplier shall offer full factory support of the installed products
through the use of factory employees. Service representatives who are not direct
employees of the system supplier, or who are not specifically trained in the
service of radio telemetry systems are not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
TBE GrOUD. Ine.
J :\00083\OOO83021.06\DOC\Specs\ 16051.doc
16051-8
Electrical- Wastewater PumDimz Station
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. All work shall be executed in a neat and workman-like manner by experienced
and capable electricians so as to present a neat installation upon completion.
B. Electrical work shall be coordinated so as not to interfere with or delay other
construction operations.
C. Contractor shall do all necessary cutting, sleeving, excavating and backfilling for
the installation of the equipment and the patching thereafter. Rigid conduit
installed underground shall be coated with two coats of asphaltic paint.
D. Splices: All splices for conductors No. 12 through No.6 A WC solid or stranded
shall be made with "Skotchlock" spring connectors, or the pressure wire type. For
wire sizes larger than No.6, splices shall be made with OZ Type XW of XLP as
appropriate to the splice being installed. Equal fittings of Bumdy and Penn Union
may be used. Tape shall be equal to Scotch No. 33 plastic over splice and filler
tape on splices shall be equal to "Scotchfill." All Skotchlock splices in handholes
shall be dipped in Glyptol for waterproofing.
E. The Contractor shall install all starters and control devices furnished with the
equipment provided by equipment manufacturers. This equipment shall be wired
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved wiring
diagrams. Any Owner furnished equipment will be connected by the Contractor.
F. The ends of all conduits shall be carefully reamed free from burrs after threading
and before installation. All cuts shall be made square. All joints shall be made up
tight. Care shall be taken to see that all light and power conduit runs form a
permanent and continuous ground connection point.
G. The Contractor shall permanently and effectively ground service neutral and all
raceways, devices and utilization equipment in accordance with requirements of
National Electrical Code, and as shown or required.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Units shall be tested after installation for proper operation, grounds and
sequencing.
END OF SECTION
THE GrouD. Ine.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\ 16051.doc
Electrical- Wastewater PUffiDine: Station
July 2007
16051-9
SECTION V
CONTRACT
DOCUMENTS
1.,- .
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BOND NUMBER: 0038254
CONTRACT BOND
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF MANATEE
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we TLC DIVERSIFIED, INC., Contractor
and WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANX (Surety) whose borne address is MEDIN1\
COUNTYLOWO
HEREINAFTER CALLED THE "Surety't, are held and firmly bound into the City of Clearwater,
Florida (hereinafter called the "Owner") in the penal sum of: TWO MILLION TWENTY-FIVE
THOUSAND NINE HUNDRED NINETY-FOUR DOLLARS AND FIFTY ($2,025,994.50) for
the payment ofwbich we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns
for the faithful performance of a certain written contract, dated the day of
. 2007, entered into between the Contractor and the City of Clearwater for:
PUMP STATION 16 RELOCATION (02-0002-UT)
a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully
copied herein.
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if tbe
Contractor shall in all respects comply with the terms and conditions of said contract, including the
one-year guarantee of material and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract
documents (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Form of Proposal, Form of Contract, Form of
Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the
Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be
made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless
the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or conduct, want of care or
skill, negligence or default, including patent infringements on the part of the said Contractor agents
or employees, in the execution or performance of said contract, including errors in the plans
furnished by the Contractor, and further, if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make
payments to all persons supplying him, them or it, labor, material, and supplies used directly or
indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub-Contractor, or Sub-Contractors, in the prosecution of
the work provided for in said Contract, this obligation shall be void, otherwise, the Contractor and
Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference between the sum to which the
said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may
be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, & any damages, direct or
indirect, or consequential, which said Owner may sustain on account of such work, or on account of
the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things, keep and execute all the provisions of
said contract.
Page I
I
I
'.
I"
I
I
I
I....
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I,
I
1
I
I
CONTRACT BOND
(2)
And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, executors,
administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, that they will amply and fully protect the said
Owner against, and will pay any and all amounts, damages, costs and judgments which may be
recovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by
reason of any damages arising from the performance of said work, or of the repair or maintenance
thereof, or the manner of doing the same or the neglect of the said Contractor or his agents or
servants or the improper perfonnance of the said work by the Contractor or his agents or servants, or
the infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any material furnished or work done; as
aforesaid, or otherwise.
And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, heirs,
executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the
Owner may be compelled to pay because of any lien for labor materi.al furnished for the work,
embraced by said Contract.
And the said Surety, for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of
time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be perfonned thereunder or
the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it
does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of
the contract or to the work or to the specifications. '
*
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this
day of' , 2007.
ILC DIVERSIFIED. INC.
CONTRACTOR
~:~
Thurston
~ ---- ~
I,aIt'berson, President
WITNESS: +
~ 'r7f fu$ .
c1t;?Jzr:
Nestfield lnsuranGe-f'..ompany
SURETY~' 1JJ;t-~':7>" --.
By: c1" . ~. . ~,- ~' -: ~:-
ATTO E - - ~J.-..>- .,.-c.,-
Ted J l.ck .... -'~ '. '.
*Thi s bond is given to comp'1ji ?with
Section 255.05, Florida Statutes~l,alnd
any action instituted by any claimant
under this bond for payment must be
in accordance with the notice and
time limitation prvisions in Section
255.05(2), Florida Statutes
Pnge 2
I " <
I General
Power
of Atto rney
I CERTIFIED COPY
POWER NO. 0992202 04
Westfield Insurance Co.
Westfield National Insurance Co.
Ohio Farmers Insurance Co.
Westfield Center, Ohio'
I
Know All Men by These Presenrs, That WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO
FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, corporarlons, hereinafter referred to individually as a 'Company' and collectively as 'Companies: duly
organized and existing under the taws 01 the State of Ohio, and having its prindpal orlice in Westfield Center, Medina County. Ohio, do by these
presents make, constitute and appoint
THEODORE J. JEDUCK, ROBERT H. BONO, JOINTLY OR SEVERALLY
of DAVIE and State of FL I[S true and lawful Attomey(s)-In-F'act, With full power and autllonty hereby conferred In Its name,
place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver lIl1Y and all bOnd$, recognizances. undert.alangs, or othef' iJ'lS1runents or contracts of
suretyship- - . - - . . . -. - - - - . - - - . - - - - - - - - . - - - - -. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . - - - . . . - - . - '.
LIMITATION: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE GUARANTEE, UORTGAGE DEFICIENCY, MORTGAGE
GUARANT1:E. OR BANK DEPOSITORY BONOS.
and to bind anyof the Companies thereby as fully and.to the same extent as it such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate
seal of ttle applicable COmpany and duly attested by Its Secretary. hereby ratifying and confirming all that tt',e said Attorney(s)-in-Fact may do in
the premises. Said appointment IS made under and by authortty at the following resolution adopted by the Board of Dlrectors of each of the
WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WfSTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY:
'Se I( Resolved, that the President, any Senior Executive, any secretary or any Fidelity & Surely Operations Executive or other Executive shall
be and IS hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint anyone or more SUitable persons as Anorney(sj--jn-Fact to represent and act for
and on behalf of the COmpany subject to the tollowing provisions:
The Attorney-in-Fad may be given lull power and authOrity for and in the name of and on behalf of the COmpany, to execute, acknowledge and
I deliver. any and all bonds, recognizances, cOf"ltracts, agreements of indemnity and othef' conditional or obiigatory undertakings and any and all
notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such Instruments so executed by any such
Attorney-Jn-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as. it signed by the President and sealed and attested by the Corporate Secretary:
"S" it Furtllor RosolvetJ. that the signature of any such designated penlon and the seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any
power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by I'i:lcsimlle, and any power 01 anorney or certificate bearing facsimile signatures or facsimile
I seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bOnd or undertaking 1:0 Whicn il is attached." (Each adopted at a meeting
held on Fe.bruary S, 2000).
In Witness Whereof, WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE
COMPANY have caused these presents to be Signed by their Senior Executive and their corporate sealS te be hereto affixed this 20th day of
MAY A.D.,2003 .
Co~ale /....-;;~
Seal S ,_ ~ ~V:......;.:.--~~"
AffiXed l'-:/ - .\ () \
lstgrx1 ~~i
.... ~:,.~
\ ""~. 11I>.j
\ ..........::'---/~~
State ot Ohi~
I County of Medina SS.:
I
I
I
I
\1'\"'1""
.....~\(')N,'\l ;~"'"
t~~~;""'''''--''{~{\
::=: SEAL :~~
\~"" ,./8/
'.... '.. '.. .. ..... ~~'
'''~'''''''''I~'''I'''''\\''
I
.".......~~'4'....".~.."<r
..':G5. '_" "
.~'V:" - -'. ~~
l":.~...~.r~\C"~
:::!: ~~ ~"t;I ~
~c:o: :~=
-~ .~-
\~'" 1848 ':;;fr:g
\<.......::-. ,.....:")/
I""~."",,,,'I""
WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY
WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY
OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY
By:
Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr.. Senior Executive
On this 20th day of MAY A.D., 2003 , before me personally came Richard L. Kinnaird. Jr. to me known, who. being by me duly
sworn, did depose and say. that he resides in Medina. Ohkl; that he is Senior Executive of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD
NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described in and which executed the above
I Instrument: that he Knows the seals of sajd COmpanies: that the seals affixed to saId InstrumerH are such corp'J(ate seals; that they were so affixed
by order of the Boards or Directors or said Companies: and mar he si9l1ed hJs name mereto by like ordet'. ~
NO~:~I ".,o""'W' ~ ... '
Affixed leA.. ?- ~ ,.'\@ oS~. .
I ( ~~i)~ William J. Kahelin. A rney at Law, Notary Public
State or Ohio " '" i . 10 My Commission Does Not Expire (Sec. 147.03 Ohio Revised Code)
County of Medina :55.: ...... ->-"'1 -?-' ,-
I """ r- E: 01" 0.......
......""--'-.,.......
I, Frank A. Carrino. Secretary of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFI ELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS
INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above and foregOing IS a true and correct copy of a Power of Anorney, executed by said
Companies, which is stili in full force and etfeC\: and l\.Irthermore, lhe resolutions or the Soaros at Directors, set out In the Power of Attorney are
In fuJi force and effect.
In Witness Whereof, I have hereunto set my
A.D.,
/.....;~"
1'. ~~.....:...--~~"
! .-:~' -- ......~..
{~{ SEAL )~)'\
; ~~ 1-
\~
I
I
."111111,,
,.."-;';\()NAl.. ;~:'.,.
.,' ~l-...'''''~': 'oS' -'.
j~j:'" ...\\\
;..-: SEAL :0:
\1.:....... . ......~.)}
..,.....
4'iil.""'II~"'I"""'"
I
I
hand anQ. -alil;~.'t~e'~ls of said Companies at Westfield Cenler, Ohio, this
.-.:;.~..;"~~;'.;,;.~:~" ~/>'" .
{i.t~~~;.,- -',~: ~.. ~
~f~.. ~~\'b\~~~ de I
-' V 's- . -
~.c;!.: -' ~_~ ~~=' S,crTtlV)'
~.... 1848 /;;fr:! ... Frank A. Carrino, ecret .
"1" of ...... 04~~. ~.... ."i'.....-
~'I ....... ".,
"';",................,,_..
day of
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACT
This CONTRACT made and entered into this ~~dday of ~ , 2007 by and
between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the
"City", and TLC DIVERSIFIED. INC. of the City of PALMETTO, County of MANATEE and
State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor".
WITNESSETH:
That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements
on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows:
The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the
sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at
their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the
following:
PUMP STATION 16 RELOCATION (02-0002-UT) FOR THE SUM OF TWO MILLION
TWENTY-FIVE THOUSAND NINE HUNDRED NINETY-FOUR DOLLARS AND FIFTY
($2,025,994.50)
In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special
provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any
advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto
attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this
contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and
assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City.
If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as
contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the
Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf
and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in
accordance with the provisions as contained herein.
THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY
AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE
BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES
ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF
THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES
TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR
DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY
CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE
CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB-CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS
OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED
CONTRACTOR, SUB-CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES.
Page 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACT
(2)
In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements:
In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to
discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or
national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay-off or
termination; rates of payor other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including
apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees
or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the
provisions of the non-discrimination clause.
The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including
contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub-contractors for
standard commercial supplies or raw materials.
It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the
event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated
herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be
due to the Contractor the sum of $1.000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the
Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1.000.00 per
day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of
the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is
not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the
Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract.
It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of
this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and
conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or
sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to
be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own
expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional
bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the
City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and
provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful
performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form
satisfactory to it.
Page 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACT
(2)
In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements:
In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to
discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or
national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay-off or
termination; rates of payor other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including
apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees
or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the
provisions of the non-discrimination clause.
The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including
contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub-contractors for
standard commercial supplies or raw materials.
It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the
event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated
herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be
due to the Contractor the sum of $1.000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the
Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1.000.00 per
day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of
the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is
not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the
Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract.
It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of
this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and
conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or
sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to
be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own
expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional
bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the
City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and
provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful
performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form
satisfactory to it.
Page 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACT
(3)
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and
have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written.
CITY OF CLEARWATER
IN PINEL LAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
By: ~ 8. ~-:ct:
William B. Home, II
City Manager
Countersigned:
By: i.,~ ~
~ Hibbard, . .
Mayor-Councilmember
(Contractor must indicate whether Corporation,
Partnership, Company or Individual.)
(The person signing shall, in his own
handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own
name, and his title; where the person is signing
for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show
his authority to bind the Corporation).
Page 5
Attest: p'. .
'-'-......,
- --
- -'"
-.. .'
~~~
:-- '.
" -, - '.- . r {!welL
~yn i. ;-~~;~u:'~
V CIty Clerk .. .--.-:.-. .'
....,J ~. _ . ~.. ..:-
APpr~~~dkto'fonn' .'
(' ~---
Camilo 80to
Assistant City Attorney
TLC Diversified, Inc.
Diversified, Inc.
~~)-
Thurston La~berson, President
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
!
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
_.' _Ulllli.,~j'wr;i.~':.~fI.U.
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT
(CORPORATION FORM)
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF MANATEE
On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized to
administer oaths and take acknowledgments, , who after being duly sworn,
deposes and says:
That he is the (TITLE) of TLC DIVERSIIFIED.
INC. a Florida Corporation, with its principal place of business located at 2719 17TH STREET E.
PALMETTO. FLORIDA 34221 (herein, the "Contractor").
That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day of
. 2007, with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal
corporation, as Owner, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of:
PUMP STATION 16 RELOCATION (02-0002-UT)
That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub-contractors,
laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature
nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said work
against the described property.
That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes,
and upon consideration of the payment of
(Final Full Amount of Contract) in full satisfaction and discharge of said contract.
That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might arise out of said Contract.
The word "liens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation of
the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes.
Sworn and subscribed to before me
TLC DIVERSIFIED. INC.
AFFIANT
.
.~
This _ day of
.200
BY:
Thurston LaITberson, Presioent
NOTARY PUBLIC
My Commission Expires:
PRESIDENT
Page 6
~
__~x. ..!ll'ti.1.. ~
~
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
PROPOSAL BOND
(Not to be tilled out if a certified check is submitted)
KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned,
TLC Diversified, Inc. .asPrincipalt and Westfield Insurance
Company as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Clearwater,
Florida, in the sum. of Ten Percent of Amount Bid Dollars ($ 10% of ~id
(being a minimum of 10010 of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which, well and truly to
be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, admiDistrato~,
successors and assigns.
The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of
TLC Diversified, Inc. as Principal, and Westfield Insurance Company as
Surety, for work specified as:
Relocation of Pump Station 16
Project #: 02-002-Uf
all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all wotk incidental the~, in accordance with the plans and
speci1icatioDS provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is act:epted and the contract awarded tD the
above named bidder, and the said bidder sball within ten days after notice of said award enter into a
contract, in writing, and ~ the required Performance Bond with surety or sureties to be approved
by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue
by law and the full amount of this Proposal Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated
damages.
Signed this 6
dayof August
.2007
(principal must indicate whether
corporation, partnership, company
or individual)
<:0 r pof:!. tion
TLC Diversified, Inc.
Principal
The person signing shall, in his own
handwriting, sign the Principal's
name, his own name and his title;
the person signing for a corporation
must, by affidavit, show his authority
to bind the corporation.
B~ preSid~n~- " -,.
"\ "" l.\ r ~+c.... l.-~... \::)~... ~",..
Wifl)!ifce Co.
Attorney in Fact
DE GrouD. IDe.
]:\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\SectiOD V .doc
CF-7
Section V -Contract Fonns
July 2007
I
General
I Power
of Attorney
POWER NO. 099220204
Westfield Insurance Co.
Westfield National Insurance Co.
I CERTIFIED COPY Ohio Farmers Insurance Co.
Westfield Center, Ohio
Know All Men by These Presents. That WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO
FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, corporations, tlerelnaner referred to indiVidually as a 'Company' ano collectively as -Companies,- duly
organIzed and exiSting under the laws 01 ttle State of Ohio. and haVing its pnncipal office in Westfield Center, Medina County, Ohio, do by these
I presents make, constitute and appoint
THEODORE J. JEDUCK, ROB~T H. BONO, JOIHTL Y OR SEVERALLY
10f DAVte and State of FL its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name,
place an.d stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings, or other il'lStrYnents or contracts of
suretyship- -.. -. _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. _ _. _ _ _ _ _. __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _.._. _ __.
LIMITATION: THIS POWER OF ATIORNfY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE GUARANTEE, MORTGAGE DEACIENCY. MORTGAGE
IGUARANTEE. OR BANK DEPOSITORY BONOS.
ana to bind any of the Companies thereoy as fUlly and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President. sealed with the corporate
seal of ttle applicable Company and duly attested by its Secretary, hereby ratIfying and confirming all that the said Attomey(s)-in-Fact may do in
ttle premises. Sald appointment is made under and by auttlority of the fOllowing resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of each of the
WESTfiELD INSURANCE COMPANY. WESTfiELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY:
t 'Se I[ ResolVed, (hat the PresiClent, any Senior Executive., any secretary or any Fidelity & Surety Operations Executive or other Executive shall
e and is hereby vested with fUll power and authority to appoint anyone or more suitable persons as Attorney(sHn-Facr to represent and act for
and on behalf ot tile Company subject to the following prOVIsions:
The Aaorney-in-Fact. may be gIven Nil power and authority for and in the name of and on behalf of the Company, to execute. aclcnOWledge and
oellver, any and all bonds, reooglllzances, contracts, agreements of indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all
lotlces and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such Instruments so executed by any such
ttorney-in-Fact shall be as binding upor. the Company as it signed by the President and sealed and attested by the Corporate Secretary.-
-Se it FUrTller Resolved, that ttle signature of any such desIgnated person and the seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to anI'
ower or attorney or any certittcale re/atlng ttlereto by facsimile, and any power ot attorney or certificate bearing facsimile signatures or facsimile
seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with resped to any bond or undettalctng to wtlich It is anaChed.- (Each adopted at a meeting
held on February B, 2000).
i In WJtness Whereof. WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE
OMPANY have caused tnese presents to be signed oy their Senior Executive and their corporate sealS te be hereto affixed this 20th day of
AY A.D.,2OO3 .
~ """""'" ~'
CQrporate ;~~,,~, ,,"':i,ON,'\t ;~"" .... ~
11tr~ j~""':;:-".\~ :(l;:f::........-....~~:i\~ !~!~:;:;:~::~
! tr;;f St.CXl :~} - SEAL" ~i:!:~'-c6: ~
:;: ~ i~' :~: . :m: :0: :~=
:;;~l... ,,-, .11] s'-. :.ao=
1,,,0 0' ~~ ~t:::::.:.::~:.:::::::::'~/ \X::~=:.::::~j
County of Medina 55.:
WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY
WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY
OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY
By:
Richard L. Kinnaird, J~., Senior Executive
I On this 20th day of MAY A.D.,2Q(I;J , before me personally came Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr. to me known, who. being by me duly
worn, aid depose and say. that he resides in Medina, Ohio; that he is Senior Executive ot WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD
ATlONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described in and which executed the above
Instrument; that he knOws the seals of said Companies; that the seals affixed to said instrumenl are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed
oy order at the Boards or Directors ot said Compames: and lOat he SIgned nls name thereto Oy like order. ;aL
I N~:al ~~~ dj .. . .
Affixed ~,,'t..~"M/I/Z..-.. ~ "'"
O_.-~' ~~'" v -
~.~.~ ~. r-)
I - . E-' . William J. Kahelin, A rney at Law, Notary Public
ale of Ohio \. IS' ../...0 My CommiSSIon Does Not Expire (Sec. 147.03 Ohio Revised COde)
umy of Medina ss.: '\. >-.., "0 -.l' ..'
"'~ ~ lr 0 F ...~.
,~_""",,.,""
· I. Frank A. Carrino, Secretary of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS
'SURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above and foregolOg IS a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said
Compclnles, which is sUII in full force and erteq: and fUrttlermore, the resolutions of the Boards of Directors, set out In the Power ot Attorney are
a;full fQfce and effect I
In Witness Whereof, t have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies at Westfield Center, Ohio, this day of
"''} ... Jr A.D., lP"') .
,...~ .....'...',...,. ____...'11.6<<
,.. .....,.UJl.U.~ ....':\,ClNAl. ( >" ..... \Iisu.;-=-....
I. I'. Q !:......;..~4'" "....'''''~:-.......~..~:S'<.-'--._ ~..>~-~.~...~"
I "'W.' - '... ~ ~ ," 0.' ... il ~ ~ ~.' - '.'c'f" ~
. ~ f \D ~ ; Iii:" \~ ~ g ~:"f)AWEJftj"5;. ~
i:5! SEAL ~~1 ~ ~f SEAL H~~ ~:~ ~~~
i",- jA. ;'11]: :r) : S~.', i~~
""'-'" __ ./.,~ ~~-" ..'0/ \"il:"...1848_..~j'
\... '------ /~ ...'.. .'." ~. '. - .'. ."
. ~ ,........:....:,::~:,~::::......,.. -;,..,..,.~:~~-.~............
~;"/L.,~
StrcntlUJ'
I
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-I
-I
-I
-I
I
-"I
I
I
I
I
I
I
AFFIDAVIT
(To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation)
STATE OF FLORIDA )
COUNTY OF Ha. N4 ~~e.. )
:::r 0 (\ t..I N & lA.. t-'\ b~f s.: '" being duly sworn, deposes and says that helshe is
Secretary of \" L C- " _ t" r ...', ~ ~ e.. cl .:t. ...., c.. .
- ~
a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having
its principal office at:
~,~ \\+'" ~"\-. e.
Street & Number
.pA.\f'\c.~t~
City
l=L
County
3t4:);ll
State
Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by-laws of
TL C- "'b", \J ~ (" ~\ -\", e.el t 3:.N Co..
(Name of Corporation)
Affiant further says that Th '-It" ~ +0..3 \...a. '" 'oe.c- .s. 0 iJ is ....:...:.{) r c.~" de ",,1-
(Officer's Name) (Title)
of the corporation, is duly authori7.C14 to sign. the Proposal for 1 L ~ ~ '. "e r .!.', ~: !to", T. ..<- .
for said corporation by virtue of ~ r O""I!.\ 0 ~ 0-\ 1o!# - La. """_
(state whether a provision ofby laws or a Resolution of the Board of
Directors. Ifb esol' on giv option).
Affiant
L4.~k>>e.r.s.otJ ) S~ '-tL4, t 1
Sworn to before me this .:2 Dj '"" day of Q "" 3 u. l.. t
~~~
Notary Pub .
~~')r. KAY 1.. CUNNINOHAM
'!l....I MYCOMMISSIONtlDD302744
~"t"llF,;t\"'- 1XPIRIlS:....... 2S. 2llO8
Type/print/stamp name of Notary
Title or rank, and Serial No., if any
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\0008302] .06\DOC\Specs\Section V.doc
Section V -Contract Forms
July 2007
CF-8
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
STATE OF FLORIDA )
COUNTY OF .M tJ I\J tl -\- t!. lI2.. )
\h.uC" ~~ 0 W \...A. to.o\\oe..t' .s.o l\J
<(re.~~cke~+
being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is
of ,L ~ n',\,) eC" ~', {',eo'" J :t N c.. ,
,
the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that
said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other
bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly
or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain
from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or
communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to
fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any
advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed
contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and fmther, that such bidder
has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data
relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereof.
w ~-
Affiant "
.,. ~ I,H' ~+o N Lcl to\ \)e f .sOfol.. n e.~ ~ .:l e. 11+
Sworn to and subscribed before me this do <1~" day of Pt \4 ~ "\ ~.... . 2007
~N~~
S. MY L. CUNNINGHAM
". ~A MVOOMMIIl810NIlIDD302744
~ \\p" EXIlIRIaI M.I'dI23.2008
THE Group. Inc,
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOaSpecs\Section V.doc
CF-9
S~tionV-Contr~tFonm
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PROPOSAL
(1)
TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for
?CA.k.~ ~Q.-\\OI'\J \tD ~c..\OC.Cl-\-'ION
and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance With the contract documents, marked
c..ON~ r o..c.:t . Dd.- 000 :). - LA,
Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents
signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of
the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract
without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to
be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the fonn and legality of the contract and all
the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is
hereby charged with this notice.
The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties
interested in this Proposal, are nmned in this. Proposal, that he has carefully examined the
Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications,
General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Contract Bond, that he or his representative has made such
investigation as is necessary to detennine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and
agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the fonn
of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessmy labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or
apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General
Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and
hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit:
TBEGroUD. Inc.
J:\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\Section V.doc
CF-IO
Section V-Contract Forms
July 2007
"1
1
-I
1
1
-I
-I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PROPOSAL
(2)
If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall
fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may,
at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal
shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to
become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be
retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the
City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this
Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein.
Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on W, Co.'" ~'.I!. \ cl :t.l\,)~Ur4Nc..e.-
c....OM~,. N,\ Bank, for the sum of \D~o ~ C1 MnLl ~n
n '.cl ($ lO~ o~ Ak-\ 'c'ld)
(being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount).
The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows:
(If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the
names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the
name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements,
enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub-contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or
employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). .
NAMES:
ADDRESSES:
~ '" II r- ~ -'c l\ to.\
~~d f\\le...e..:.t'~\41 W.
La.. M h Q.. f ~o w.)
S53~
\)0.\1'-\2-"\-\-01 ~L ~~a~\
,::)OQ.NII..lIL \...o)ot.'\ocf'.!!!..n....' .s~~q ~-'\d ~\\e..~..~L\LW
\)0.. \ ~t..-\\-l\ ~ L ~ L\ ~,
~
Signature ofBidder~ =-- -- -- .
elEo '~,.u's.~o,..) )...Q~be.rsC)~1 .pte.~~cle",,+
(The bidder must indicate whetb rporatiOii)Partnership, Company or Individual).
THE GraDO. Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\Section V.doc
Section V -Contract Forms
July 2007
CF-ll
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I,.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PROPOSAL
(3)
The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title.
Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice-President, he must, by
affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation.
Principal: \L ~~ n: "~r ~',\ : e.cl.. 'l.1\)c..
By~ .~...... Title: ~ff.~',cle"-+
\ ,",,,, t' !:.""O0.3 \""a '" b u s.o to.)
Business Address of Bidder: ~ '1 ''t \ '1 "''' ~~. {:.
City and State: P -. \ He:'\ '\- o. \= L Zip Code 3 "" Cl a. \
-
Dated at ~ Q. \ k eo -\-\-0 J t: L ,this 3 Oi ~ day of ~ u..5 ~~+ . A.D., 2007
TBE Group, Inc.
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\Section V.doc
CF-12
Section V -Contract Forms
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
CITY OF CLEARWATER
ADDENDUM SHEET
PROJECT: ~ Ll '"' f> ,s-\-CL\\C ~
\1.0 ~f-\O("A",ON
Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and
Specifications.
Addendum No. Date:
-
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
-
Addendum No. Date:
-
Addendum No. - Date:
Addendum No. - Date:
Addendum No. - Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
\L~ -:U'.\le.r(".~~',.d., J:.N~.
(Name of Bidder)
~J ~
(Signature of Officer)
\h\\t "~o..J LQ. ~ D~r~o..J
~ reo!.. " at eo rJ -\-
(Title of Officer)
=
---
....
\\u~u.~'" 60, ;.toa"'1
(Date)
THE Group. Inc.
I :\00083\0008302 I .06\DOC\Specs\Section V.doc
CF-13
Section V-Contract Fonos
July 2007
I
I PROJECT: CITY OF CLEARWATER
PUMP STATION 16 RELOCATION
I
I I Mobilization LS 1
2 Furnish and Install Pump Station 16 LS 1
I 3 Furnish and Install 24"xI2" Tapping LS 1 \3
Sleeves, Valves and Perform Wet T O~()
4 Furnish and Install Thrust Collar EA 1 $
I Assembl 4 .()
Furnish and Install Line Stop EA 1 $
5 Assembl ~1 toO
I 6 Furnish and Install 12-Inch DR 11 LF 1,500 $
HDPE Pi eline b lIDO / nCut 3sd ..sOD
I 7 Furnish and Install Ductile Iron TON L ~ (, ISO. $ IIp
Fi . s 160.
8 Furnish and Install 6-Foot Fiberglass EA 2 $ $
I Manholes 1'1 1,' d.1 350.
9 Furnish and Install 12-Inch DR 18 LF ISO
PVC Gravi Sewer 51 OOf{) .
I 10 Furnish and InstalllO-Inch DRI8, LF 70 7.9.
PVC Pi e Force Main Via Cut
11 Furnish and Install 54"x5/8" Casing by LS 1 ~.;w 7 sa $
I Jack and Bore
12 Place Existing Gravity Sewer Out of LS 1 $~ 7IJ(). $ 3'~ 7'fJO.
Service
,
I 13 Place Existing 24-Inch Force Main LS 1 $Sy' 76 $
Out of Service S,-/ 750
14 Unsuitable Material Removal CY 1,000 $ /1. $ )8 ~IJ().
I 15 Additional Select Fill Material CY 1,000 $ 0 $ ~D ODO
16 Miscellaneous Concrete CY 100 $301 $ 3D IDC
I 17 Furnish and Install Landscaping and LS 1 $18 $ ~o()..
hri ation 00
I Sub Total 39."-
18 Contingency - 10% LS 1 $/~3'1
I Alternate Bid - Demolition of
19** Existing Pump Station 16 and Site LS 1
Restoration
I Total
** This alternate bid item may be awarded at the discretion of the City.
I TBE GrouD. Inc. Section V-Contract Fonns
J :\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\Section V .doc CF-14 July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I BIDDER'SGRANDTOTAL...::1---.<> ~i;:c...-. , ~ r ~ 1
~ ~ I~ ~ 4/ML ~(WOrds)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I TBE Group. Inc,
J:\00083\00083021.06\DOC\Specs\Section V .doc
I
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL
PROJECT:
? \A. ""i>
~ ~ , () c.~ -\ " 0 tV
:S -\-Q. ~'I 0 f\\
\<.0
CONTRACTOR: \'- Co. "1)', \J e.r ~', -\', e.d. \ -:t t-Jc.. .
~
BIDDER'S TOTAL $ ~) () ~SJ 'I "I'" .
(Numbers)
THE BIDDER'S TOTAL ABOVE IS IllS TOTAL BID BASED ON IDS UNIT PRICES AND
LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH
SECTION. TIllS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING
BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES Al'ID
LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT .
SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL
GOVERN.
CF-lS
Section V-Contract Forms
July 2007
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DRUG FREE WORKPLACE FORM
The undersigned vendor in accordance with Florida Statute 287.087, as amended from
time to time, hereby certifies that
TLC Diversified. Inc. does:
(Name of Business)
1. Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture,
distribution, dispensing, possession or use of a controlled substance is prohibited
in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees
for violation of such prohibition. .
2. Inform employees about the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the
business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug
counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties
that may be imposed upon employees for dmg abuse violations.
3. Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual
services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
4. In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a
condition ofworking on the commodities, or contractual services that are under
bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement, and will notify the
employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty, or nolo contendere to any
violation of chapter 893, Florida Statutes, as amended from time to time, or of any
controlled substance law of the United States, or any State. for a violation
occmring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction.
5. Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse
assistance, or rehabilitation program, ifsuch is available in the employee's
community, by any employee who is so convicted.
6. Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through
implementation of this section.
As the person authorized to sign the statement, I certify that this fum complies fully
with the above requirements.
~
Bidders Signature
Thurston Lamberson, President
~
---
.....
- ----
j\u~\.l.!..+ ~(), ~oo1
Date
ACORDTM CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE J DATE (MM/DDIYYYY)
. . ~ 10/10/07
PRODUCER 1-813-229-8021 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
~. E. Wilson Co. , Inc. ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
100 W. Platt St. ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
;te 200
ramp a , FL 33606 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC#
INSURED INSURER A: ROCKHILL INS CO 28053
rLC Diversified, Inc.
INSURERB:Valley Forge Ins Co 20508
2719 17th Street East INSURERC:Westfield Ins Co 24112
?almet to, FL 34221 INSURER 0:
INSURER E:
COVERAGES
THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR
MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH
POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
INSR A,DD'L TV"E OF I"'''' 'RANCE P~}~v,,~~~R~E Pg~!fJ(~>g;lflf~N
LTR NSRD POLICY NUMBER LIMITS
C ~NERAL LIABILITY TRA3972460 04/01/07 04/01/08 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000
X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY ~~~~~~~ YE~~~~~~nce' $ 150,000
I CLAIMS MADE [~ OCCUR MED EXP (Anyone person) $10,000
X Contractual Liability PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $1,000,000
-
X $500 Prop Dmg Ded GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000
-
GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000
I POLICY -rxl j~RT n- LOC
B ~TOMOBILE LIABILITY 2083116659 04/01/07 04/01/08
COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000
X ANY AUTO (Ea accident)
'--
- ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
(Per person) $
f---, SCHEDULED AUTOS
X HIRED AUTOS
- BODILY INJURY $
X NON-OWNED AUTOS (Per accident)
-
- PROPERTY DAMAGE $
(Per accident)
~RAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $
ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC $
AUTO ONLY: AGG $
A EXCESS/UMBRELLA LIABILITY CULOO0387-00 04/01/07 04/01/08 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000
::!J OCCUR D CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000
$
r==1 DEDUCTIBLE $
RETENTION $ $
B WC283116676 04/01/07 04/01/08 I WCSTATU-.l IOTH-
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND X inRY LIMIT" ER
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY $500,000
ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE E.L. EACH ACCIDENT
OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $500,000
~~~~~~f,'~c5~~~NS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $500,000
OTHER
B Auto Physical Damage 2083116659 04/01/07 04/01/08 ACV
Comp Ded: PerSchedule
Co 11 Ded: PerSchedule
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS I VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT / SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Pump Station 16 Relocation, Contract Number 02-0002-UT
City of Clearwater, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 as Additional Insured
TBE Group, Inc. , 380 Park Place Blvd., Suite 300, Clearwater, FL 33759 as Additional Insured
CERTIFICATE HOLDER
CANCELLATION
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLiCIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION
City of Clearwater DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL ~ DAYS WRITTEN
NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL
Attn: Alice R. Eckman IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, iTS AGENTS OR
P.O. Box 4748
REPRESENTATIVES.
Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE L ~
USA .7- :e<--
ACORD 25 (2001/08) JL002
7249101
@ACORDCORPORATION1988
IMPORTANT
If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement
on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may
require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate
holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
DISCLAIMER
The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between
the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it
affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon.
ACORD 25 (2001/08)
ACORDm CERTIFIGA TE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE ' I DATE (MM/DDIYYYY)
. 10/10/07
.
PRODUCER 1-813-229-8021 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
M. E. wilson Co. , Inc. ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
300 W. Platt St. ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
Ste 200
Tampa, FL 33606 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC#
i INSURED INSURER A: ROCKHILL INS CO 28053
TLC Diversified, Inc.
INSURER B: Valley Forge Ins Co 20508
2719 17th Street East INSURERC:Westfield Ins Co 24112
Palmetto, FL 34221 INSURER D:
INSURER E:
COVERAGES
THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR
MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH
POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
INSR ~~~~ TYpo: no: INS'"....N('E POLICY NUMBER PJll+~1~~~~8~E Pg~!fll~~~t~N LIMITS
LTR
C ~NERAL LIABILITY TRA3972460 04/01/07 04/01/08 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000
X 3MERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PREMISES rEa occurence) $150,000
- CLAIMS MADE ~ OCCUR
f--- MED EXP (Anyone person) $10,000
X Contractual Liability PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $1,000,000
-
~ $500 Prop Dmg Ded GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000
~'LAGGRE~ELlMIT APn PER: PRODUCTS. COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000
POLICY X ~~~;: LOC
B ~TOMOBILE LIABILITY 2083116659 04/01/07 04/01/08 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
$1,000,000
X ANY AUTO (Ea accident)
-
- ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
$
SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person)
-
X HIRED AUTOS
- BODILY INJURY $
X NON-OWNED AUTOS (Per accident)
-
- PROPERTY DAMAGE $
(Per accident)
GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY. EA ACCIDENT $
R ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC $
AUTO ONLY: AGG $
A fJESSIUMBRELLA LIABILITY CULOO0387-00 04/01/07 04/01/08 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000
X OCCUR 0 CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000
$
==1 DEDUCTIBLE $
RETENTION $ $
B WC283116676 04/01/07 04/01/08 I WCSTATU.: I IOTH-
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND X TORY LIMITS ER
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY $500,000
ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE E.L. EACH ACCIDENT
OFFICERlMEMBER EXCLUDED? E.L. DISEASE. EA EMPLOYEE $500,000
If yes, describe under E.L. DISEASE. POLICY LIMIT $500,000
SPECIAL PROVISIONS below
OTHER
B Auto physical Damage 2083116659 04/01/07 04/01/08 ACV
Comp Ded: PerSchedule
Coll Ded: perSchedule
DESCRIPTION OF. OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT I SPECIAL PROVISIONS
City of Clearwater, Pump Station 16 Relocation, Contract Number 02-0002-UT
City of Clearwater as Additional Insured
TBE Group, Inc. as Additional Insured
CERTIFICATE HOLDER
CANCELLATION
SHOULD /iJ>lY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION
TBE Group, Inc. DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL ~ DAYS WRITTEN
NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL
380 Park Place Blvd. , Suite 300 IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR
REPRESENTATIVES.
Clearwater, FL 33759 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ~ ~
USA /-:~
ACORD 25 (2001/08) JL002
7249647
@ACORDCORPORATION1988
IMPORTANT
If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement
on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may
require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate
holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
DISCLAIMER
The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between
the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it
affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon.
ACORD 25 (2001/08)
~ Clearwater
u~
~
CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
410 N. Myrtle Ave., 33755
PO Box 4748, Clearwater, FL 33758-4748
Phone: (727) 462-6126, Fax: (727) 462-6989
TRANSMITTAL FORM
~TO:
Official Records & Legislative Services
Attn: Susan Chase, City Clerk Specialist
Re:
Current Certificate of Liability
Insurance
Date: April 14, 2008
WE ARE SENDING TO YOU
IZI ATTACHED 0 UNDER SEPARATE COVER VIA
THE FOLLOWING ITEMS:
o Shop Drawings
o Copy of Letter
o Prints
o Change Order
o Plans
o Specifications
o Samples
o As Requested
COPIES DATE NO. DESCRIPTION
1 04/11/08 1 Attached copy of "Current Certificate of Liability Insurance" for TLC Diversified, Inc. for
the "Pump Station #16 Relocation" Proiect (02-0002-Un
THESE ARE TRANSMITTED AS CHECKED BELOW:
o For approval & payment
o As requested
o
o
o Approved as submitted
o For review and comment
o
o
o Approved as noted
o Return _ corrected prints
o
o
ROUTE
DATE RECEIVED DATE REVIEWED
INITIALS & COMMENTS
REMARKS: Attached Current Certificate of Liability Insurance for your Executed Contract.
SIGNED:
~U:"'-_ f' ~~
Alice Eckman, Construction Office Specialist
Please notify us if attachments are not included
Thank you for your business
cc: Kathy Bedini, Staff Assistant/Engineering (Copy 0/ Certificate)
III
ACORDTM CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE I DATE (MM/DDNYVY)
03/29/08
PRODUCER 1-813-229-8021 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
M. E. wilson Co., Inc. ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
300 W. platt St. ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
Ste 200
Tampa, FL 33606 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC#
INSURED INSURER A: Westfield Ins Co 24112
TLC Diversified, Inc.
INSURERB:Valley Forge Ins Co 20508
2719 17th Street East INSURER C: ROCXBILL INS CO 28053
Palmetto, FL 34221 INSURER D:
INSURER E:
COVERAGES
THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR
MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH
POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
I~~: :.~~~ POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS
A ~NERAL LIABILITY TRA3972460 04/01/08 04/01/09 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000
X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PREMISE'" 7E~~~6~~ncel $ 150,000
I CLAIMS MADE 0 OCCUR MED EXP (Anyone person) $10,000
X Contractual Liability PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $1,000,000
X $500 Prop Oms Oed GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000
~'L AGGRErilE LIMIT APn PER: PRODUCTS.COM~OPAGG $2,000,000
POLICY X ~~R.,: LOC .
B ~TOMOBILE LIABILITY 2083116659 04/01/08 04/01/09 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
$1,000,000
X ANYAUTO (Ea accident)
-
- ALL OWNED AUTOS EC~~V ED BODILY INJURY
R ""_ I (Per person) $
- SCHEDULED AUTOS
X HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
- $
X NON-DWNED AUTOS APR 11 2008 (Per accident)
-
PROPERTY DAMAGE $
(Per accident)
~RAGE LIABILITY Ci I Y Or CU:A....r t:H AUTO ONLY. EA ACCIDENT $
ANYAUTO PUBLIC W'JRKS CONsn UCilON EAACC $
OTHER THAN
AUTO ONLY: AGG $
C EXCESS/UMBRELLA LIABILITY CULOO0387-00 04/01/08 04/01/09 EACH OCCURRENCE $5,000,000
~ OCCUR D CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000
$
~ DEDUCTIBLE $
X RETENTION $10,000 $
B WORKERS COMPENSATION AND WC283116676 04/01/08 04/01/09 X I WCSTATU.: I IOJJ;l"
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY $500,000
ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNERlEXECUTIVE E.L. EACH ACCIDENT
OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? E.L. DISEASE. EA EMPLOYEE $500,000
If res, describe under E.L. DISEASE" POLICY LIMIT $500,000
S ECIAL PROVISIONS below
OTHER
B Auto Physical Damage 2083116659 04/01/08 04/01/09 ACV
Comp Oed: perSchedu1e
Coll Oed: perSchedu1e
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/ LOCATIONS/VEHICLES/ EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT /SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Pump Station 16 Relocation, Contract Number 02-0002-UT
City of Clearwater, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, FL'33758-4748 as Additional Insured InsurJPR 1) 2008
TBE Group, Inc., 380 Park Place Blvd., Suite 300, Clearwater, FL 33759 as Additional
I ~'ECORDS A"j
. . Si;'VCS nF T
CERTIFICATE HOLDER
CANCELLATION
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION
City of Clearwater DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING. INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 2L DAYS WRITTEN
NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL
Attn: Alice R. Eckman IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR
P.O. Box 4748
REPRESENTATIVES.
Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE tB.J?~
USA
ACORD 25 (2001/08) kbanks
8416000
@ACORDCORPORATION 1988
~
IMPORTANT
If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement
on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may
require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate
holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
DISCLAIMER
The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between
the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it
affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon.
ACORD 25 (2001/08)